TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1- GENERAL … · table of contents rizo, ... 01831 sustainable design...

CITY OF MIAMI CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS PROGRAM FIRE STATION No. 13

PROJECT NUMBER B-60453A ∆ Addendum #4

TABLE OF CONTENTS Rizo, Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project #08012.00 1 of 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 01043 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 01200 PROGRESS MEETINGS 01230 ALTERNATES 01312 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01340 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS (SUBMITTALS) 01354 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01740 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 01741 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL FOR LEED COMPLIANCE

01750 EXECUTION - ∆ Addendum #4 01809 TESTING FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY (LEED) 01831 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES (LEED) 01910 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS (LEED)

DIVISION 2- SITE WORK

02072 REMOVALS 02200 EARTHWORK 02221 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES 02280 SOIL TREATMENT 02371 AUGER CAST GROUT PILES ∆ Addendum #4 02444 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02511 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02580 PAVEMENT MARKING 02660 WATER SYSTEMS 02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02731 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02735 WASTE WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02840 SIGNAGE 02900 LANDSCAPING 02935 SODDING

DIVISION 3- CONCRETE

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300 CAST- IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03330 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03351 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH 03410 STRUCTURAL PRECAST HOLLOW CORE SLABS 03522 CELLULAR INSULATING CONCRETE ROOF DECK 03600 GROUT

DIVISION 4- MASONRY

04200 GREY UNIT MASONRY 04232 REINFORCED GLAZED ARCHITECTURAL UNIT MASONRY 04400 REINFORCED ARCHITECTURAL UNIT MASONRY 04530 MASONRY PATCHWORK

DIVISION 5- METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05400 LIGHT GUAGE METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05515 FIXED ACCESS LADDERS 05590 STEEL FRAMED EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 05720 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

DIVISION 6- WOOD AND PLASTICS

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06300 WOOD TREATMENT 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK AND SOLID SURFACE TOPS

DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07116 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 07120 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07121 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOF WALL COATING 07190 VAPOR AND RADON RETARDER 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07214 FOAMED IN PLACE MASONRY WALL INSULATION 07500 ROOF ASSEMBLY 07501 ROOF ASSEMBLY SPECIAL WARRANTY FORMS 07503 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 07525 SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07541 DÉCOR G410 FELTBACK ADHERED THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

zwethington

Polygon




07630 PVC RAIN WATER LEADERS (RWL) 07712 ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 07721 SUPPORTS FOR ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT 07723 ROOF ASSEMBLY HATCHES 07727 ROOF ASSEMBLY EDGE GUARDS 07840 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALING 07920 SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07950 EXPANSION JOINTS COVERS

DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOW

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08210 WOOD DOORS 08305 ACCESS PANELS 08313 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL GLASS DOOR (Apparatus Room) 08330 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS (Apparatus Room) 08410 EXTERIOR ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT WITH BULLET RESISTANT GLAZING 08411 ALUMINUM EXTERIOR STOREFRONTS WITH HURRICANE GLAZING 08412 ALUMINUM INTERIOR STOREFRONTS WITH TEMPERED GLAZING 08415 HURRICANE SHUTTER SYSTEM 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 08811 FIRE RATED GLAZING

DIVISION 9- FINISHES

09120 PLASTERED CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 09200 METAL STUDS, METAL LATH, SUSPENSION CEILINGS, PLASTER, AND STUCCO 09212 SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09656 SPORTS RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 09672 RESINOUS FLOORING 09900 PAINTING 09905 EPOXY RESIN WALL FINISH 09920 EPOXY TERRAZZO

DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 10100 MARKERBOARDS & TACKBOARDS 10200 WALL LOUVERS 10265 INTERIOR CORNER GUARDS 10350 FLAGPOLES 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10505 LOCKERS

zwethington

Polygon




10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10605 WIRE MESH DOORS AND PARTITIONS 10675 SHELVING – UTILITY/STORAGE 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT

11132 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS 11400 FOODSERVICE COUNTERS AND CABINETS 11452 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS 12480 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13742 TELEPHONE AND DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM 13801 FIRE STATION CONTROL SYSTEM ∆ Addendum #4 13810 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS)

13845 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM 13851 CARD ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 13900 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 13901 FIRE PROTECTION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND WET AUTOMATIC

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 13910 FIRE PROTECTION PIPE AND FITTINGS

DIVISION 14- CONVEYING SYSTEMS

NOT USED

DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL 15010 STANDARD MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15071 HVAC - VIBRATION ISOLATION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 15110 VALVES 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15180 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION 15195 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15485 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

15510 PIPING (HVAC) ∆ Addendum #4 15555 FUEL STORAGE/DISTRIBUTION 15670 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 15720 AIR HANDLING UNITS 15734 COMPUTER ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ∆ Addendum #4 15736 DUCTLESS AIR CONDITIONER 15810 DUCTWORK 15820 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15821 FANS 15830 POWER VENTILATORS 15841 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15850 AIR OUTLET AND INLETS 15861 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT 15885 AIR FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15905 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15955 TESTS

DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL 16023 CODES AND STANDARDS 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16112 RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 16120 WIRE AND CABLE 16131 OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16156 MOTOR STARTER GROUP CONTROL 16160 TERMINAL CABINETS 16250 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 16402 ELECTRICAL SITE UTILITIES 16430 METERING AND SUB-METERING 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16450 GROUNDING 16470 PANELBOARDS 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16511 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 16530 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




16620 STANDBY EMERGENCY CNG/LPG DIESEL GENERATOR (ENGINE DRIVEN) ∆ Addendum #4 16630 BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY INCANDESCENT LIGHTING UNITS 16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16709 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16721 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon


PROJECT NUMBER B-60453A

PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 6

SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A. Requests for Interpretation (RFI): See Division 0, Section 3, Article 9.

1. Use standard agreed upon form “Request for Interpretation” for requesting information. Remove form for marking additional copies or request an original copy from Architect.

2. Limit each RFI to a single issue or a group of related issues.

3. If Architect is able to respond to submitted RFI’s by making specific reference to information contained in a Drawing sheet(s) or Specification Section, Contractor shall be responsible by contract for the full reimbursement to the Owner, for all associated charges by the Architect and Architect’s Consultants for performing review and coordination services for Contractor in connection with such RFI submittal.

4. If Contractor disagrees with Architect’s response to Contractor’s RFI, Contractor shall notify Architect immediately, but no later than within seven days of receipt of response. Notification shall acknowledge and certify that Contractor has generated coordination drawings regarding specific conditions and exhausted all coordination efforts and has not been able to resolve the issue. Lack of such notification and certification as required herein shall be understood to mean that Contractor agrees with response and is able to proceed per contract.

5. Allow minimum of 7-day response time from receipt by Architect of each RFI.

∆ Addendum #4

6. RFI’s requesting confirmation of a previously issued directive, or requesting confirmation of a prior response to a previous returned RFI, or requesting confirmation for items clearly shown or identified in the construction documents will not be accepted, and will be returned to contractor, and required to be deleted from the RFI Log and duly marked “THIS IS NOT AN RFI”.

7. The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the contract documents and may, if appropriate, prepare and issue supplemental drawings and specifications in respond to the request of information. The issuance of supplemental drawings does not constitute an admittance of inadequacy in the construction documents, but may be considered a method to assist and facilitate the contractor in meeting his/her contractual responsibility in an expeditious manner.

8. RFI’s received after 5:00PM Mondays thru Thursdays will be logged in the ‘RFI Log’ as having been received by architect the following normal business day, and RFI’s received after 5:00PM on Fridays will be logged in the ‘RFI Log’ as having been received by architect the following normal business day, except for nationally recognized holidays.

zwethington

Polygon



ALTERNATES 01230 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 1

SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 ALTERNATE REQUIREMENTS

A. Definition:

1. Alternate is defined as a portion of Work that is to be priced separately in the Bid and to be included in the Work at the Owner’s option.

2. If there is more than one Alternate, Alternates may be selected by Owner in any random order.

B. Coordination:

Description for each alternate is recognized to be abbreviated but requires that each change as priced in the Bid shall be complete for scope of work affected.

1. Coordinate related requirements among sections of Specifications as required.

2. Include as part of each alternate; miscellaneous devices, appurtenances and similar items incidental to or necessary for complete installation.

3. Coordinate alternate with adjacent Work and modify or adjust as necessary to ensure integrated.

4. Once an Alternate is accepted, proceed to perform the work in full accordance with the contract documents and all requirements herein.

C. Notification:

Immediately following award of Contract, prepare notification of status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for consideration at later date.

1. Distribution of Notification to Include:

a. Owner.

b. Architect.

c. Subcontractor and suppliers.

d. Other as appropriate.

1.02 ALTERNATE DESCRIPTIONS

A. Alternate No. 1: In lieu of the sealed, polished concrete floor finish (Base Bid) at the Apparatus Room

No. 137, provide the high grade Epoxy Terrazzo finish described in Spec Section 09920. - ∆ Addendum #4

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

zwethington

Polygon



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS (SUBMITTALS) 01340 Rizo, Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 4

SECTION 01340 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS (SUBMITTALS)

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Submittals, manufacturer’s catalog cuts, product data, samples, and attached shop drawing/catalog cut submittal form necessary to satisfy the requirements specified.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 0, Section 2, Articles 42, 43, 44 and 45. 2. 01312 – Construction Progress Documentation 3. 01700 – Contract Closeout

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS/MANUFACTURER’S CATALOG CUTS A. Shop drawings: Submit 6 prints for each required shop drawing. ∆ Addendum #4 1. Identify each shop drawing with the following information placed on each drawing: a. Name of the facility. b. Name of Project at the Facility c. Owner’s Project Number d. Name of Company submitting the shop drawing. e. Date of drawing.

2. Provide a blank space 6 inches wide by 4 inches high in the lower right corner of each shop drawing page for the Architect’s stamp.

B. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts: Submit 6 copies of each catalog cut or 6 edited catalogs. C. Submittal of samples, Color Charts, Color Chips, or Color Samples for Selection and Coordination: 1. Submit required number of material color charts, color chips, or color samples with ample time after start of construction to allow for selection, color coordination, and final acceptance by Architects. Material color charts, color chips, or color samples shall be manufacturer’s full color range and of standard sizes, unless specified otherwise.

2. Where architectural precast or poured-in-place architectural concrete is required, submit architectural con-crete finish color and texture samples.

3. Where exposed unpainted concrete masonry units are specified, submit masonry samples in manufacturer’s full color range

zwethington

Polygon



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS (SUBMITTALS) 01340 Rizo, Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 4 of 4

1.11 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require material vendors, or product suppliers, or manu-

facturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces, quality of work-manship, and conditions of installation as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary, including to en-sure that specified bonds and warranties shall be provided. 1. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are sup-

plemental or contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Submit reports within seven days of observation. Distribute copies to Architect, Project site file,

subcontractor, and other entities requiring information.

1.12 USE OF ELECTRONIC CAD FILES OF PROJECT DRAWINGS A. Electronic: CAD Files of Project Drawings: May only be used to expedite production of Shop Drawings for

this Project. Use for other project or purpose not allowed.

B. Electronic CAD Files of Project Drawings: Will be distributed only under following conditions: 1. Sub or vendor and the Contractor will sign Architect’s release form prior to receiving any electronic files. See Standard Release form attached at end of this section. 2. Payment of $50 per file paid in advance by certified check or money order payable to A/E at the offices of

Rizo Carreno & Partners Inc. - ∆ Addendum #4 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

SAMPLE AGREEMENT ADDED ∆ Addendum #4

SAMPLEAGREEMENT FOR TRANSFER OF INSTRUMENTS OF PROFESSIONAL SERVICE

ON ELECTRONIC MEDIA Between

Rizo Carreño & Partners Inc. And

_______________ For

City of Miami Capital Improvements Program Fire Station No. 13

Agreement is made this __ day of ______ 2011, by and between the Architect, Rizo Carreño & Partners Inc. and including all of the design consultants, hereinafter collectively referred to as “RC&P”, and __________________ ,

including all individual trade/sub-contractors, hereinafter and collectively referred to as “RECIPIENT”. RECIPIENT has requested RC&P to provide a copy of its instruments of professional service in electronic media form for the purpose of utilizing the AutoCAD drawing files to develop other documents. The RECIPIENT agrees that these files are provided as a courtesy to assist in the users work and that the information included in the transferred files may be incomplete, uncoordinated and subject to change. RC&P makes no warranties of merchantability of fitness for a particular purpose or any other warranty expressed or implied with respect to the quality of the contents of the files included in the transfer. Due to differences in systems, electronic formats, hardware and software, RC&P will not be responsible for any inaccuracies, anomalies, errors, inexactitudes or incompleteness that occur as a result of any translation process of the original files. As such, The RECIPIENT agrees to use the files and information stored therein at the RECIPIENT’S or other end user’s sole risk and to include this disclaimer in all conveyances of the transfer to other parties. The instruments of professional service being transferred shall remain the property of RC&P and are protected by copyright laws of the United States and international copyright treaties. RECIPIENT may retain copies for information and reference in connection with use on the City of Miami Fire Station #13 Project only. The RECIPIENT agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to hold harmless and indemnify RC&P from and against all claims, liabilities, losses, damages and costs, including but not limited to attorney’s fees arising out of or in any way connected with the use, modifications, misinterpretations, misuse or re-use by any end user of the files provided. The foregoing indemnification applies, without limitation, to and use of the project documentation on other projects, for additions to this project or for completion of this project by others, excepting only such use as may be authorized, in writing, by RC&P. Upon receipt of one signed original of this Agreement, and pre-payment of fees if required, RC&P will transfer the instruments of professional service on electronic media to the RECIPIENT. Rizo Carreño & Partners Inc. ______________________ Trade/Sub-contractor _______________________ ______________________ _____________________ Signature and Date Signature and Date Signature and Date Alberto J. Carreño, PE_____ ______________________ _____________________ Printed Name and Title Printed Name and Title Signature and Date

zwethington

Polygon



TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 Rizo, Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 6 of 8

E. Causes for Rejection of Concrete: The Contractor shall reject all concrete delivered to the jobsite for any of the

following reasons:

1. Wrong class of concrete; 2. Air temperature outside of the following limits: a. Cold weather: Air temperature must be 40deg F and rising. b. Hot weather: Air temperature must be cooler than 100deg F. 3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95deg F. 4. Slumps outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 5. Excessive age: Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant departure or before it begins to set

if sooner than 90 minutes.

F. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: All concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Contractor. Compressive strength, slump, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. All tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C94. Each ticket shall also show the amount of water that may be added in the field for the entire batch that will meet the requirements specified.

3.04 PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Precast Plant Inspection: The Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall perform the following tests and inspections at

the precast concrete plant:. ∆ Addendum #4

1. General: a. Inspection of the batching facilities including aggregate stock piles, material handling facilities,

concrete batching and mixing facilities and in plant procedures and equipment; b. Inspection of in-plant testing and curing facilities;

c. Inspection of the casting beds checking for cleanliness, alignment, and surface condition of the bed; and d. Inspection of the stressing blocks and stressing procedures including verification of the calibration of the

stressing jacks to be used in the Work. 2. Inspection Prior to Placing Concrete:

a. Inspection of formwork for finish condition, dimensions and dimensional tolerances; b. Verification of reinforcing steel placement and concrete cover; and c. For pre-stressed members, observation of the stressing operation as follows: 1) Initial and final gauge load reading during tendon stressing; 2) Tendon elongation measurements; and

3) Obvious irregularities or stress loss during anchoring procedures. 3. Inspection during Concreting Operation:

a. Verification of proper limits of air and concrete temperature; b. Verification of proper class of concrete being used; c. Inspection of plastic concrete to verify proper batching and mix consistency; and

d. Reviewing of curing procedures. 4. Inspection during Stress Transfer:

a. Verification of required cambers; and

zwethington

Polygon



AUGER CAST GROUGHT PILES 02371 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 5

SECTION 02371 – AUGER CAST GROUT PILES ∆ ADDENDUM #4 (section added) PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the Drilled, Cast-In-Place work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for items specified herein or both, except as for items specifically indicated as "NIC ITEMS".

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Installation Tolerances: Deviation shall not be more than 1/8 inch per foot from the vertical or batter line, with a total of the head of pile not more than three inches. Finished elevation to be no more than 1-1/2 inches above or below the elevation indicated.

B. Testing of Grout: One set of six 2 inch cubes made each day while pile casting, with two cubes of each set broken

after three days, two cubes of each set broken after seven days at two cubes of each set broken after 28 days. Cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with ASTM C-109.

C. Volume of Pile: The volume of grout per linear foot of pile shall be equal to or exceed the volume of grout per

linear foot of the applicable test pile. Furnish a method for the positive determination of the volume of grout injected per pile. Piles exhibiting an insufficiency of grout will be rejected or load tested as directed by the Engineer.

D. Depth and Alignment of Auger: Provide an accurate means of determining the depth and alignment of the Auger.

E. Pressure Gauges: Provide grout pressure gauges which accurately indicated displacement at the leads and at the

crane operator's position. Provide gauge savers to protect gauges from grout. Clean gauges daily to prevent grout blockage. Replace inaccurate gauges with new gauges.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Experience: The Drilled, Cast-In-Place pile contractor shall submit evidence to the Engineer that he has been engaged in the successful installation of Drilled, Cast-In-Place piles for at least five years and that his crane operators or "keyman" who give directions to the crane operators have at least two years of experience in the successful installation of Drilled, Cast-In-Place piles.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate methods of Augering and placing of grout and reinforcing steel. 2. Indicate seven and 28 day compressive strength of grout. 3. Indicate the size, number and the installation sequence for each of the scheduled piles. 4. Reinforcing: See 1.03A above.

zwethington

Polygon




∆ ADDENDUM #4 (section added)

C. Equipment Review and Working Drawings: 1. Complete list of the equipment proposed for use, including the manufacturer's description of the

characteristics of each piece of equipment. 2. Working drawings of accessories showing compatibility with the size, configuration, handling, and

requirements of the type of pile indicated. 3. Working drawings showing the methods and equipment proposed for load tests.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUT

A. Mixture of Portland cement, a pozzolanic material when approved, fluidizers, retarder when approved, sand and water proportioned and mixed to produce a grout capable of being pumped and having a minimum compressive strength as indicated on structural drawings. Other admixtures shall not be used.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. C. Pozzolan: Fly ash or other approved pozzolanic material conforming to ASTM C618.

D. Grout Fluidifier: Corps of Engineers CRD C-566; expansion not to exceed five percent. Use a compound

possessing characteristics which will increase the violability of the mixture, assist in the dispersal of cement grains, and neutralize the setting shrinkage of the high strength cement mortar.

E. Retarder: When approved, conforming to ASTM C494, Type B. Dosage rate shall not exceed manufacturer's

recommendations. Maximum retardation shall not exceed 30 minutes.

F. Water: Fresh clean and free from sewage, oil, acid, alkali, salts, or organic matter patable.

G. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. Materials, assembly and placement of reinforcement shall conform to the requirements see 1.03A above. 2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Grout pump: Use a positive displacement piston pump of an approved design, capable of developing displacing pressure at the pump up to 350 psi. Calibrate the pump discharge capacity in strokes per cubic foot or revolutions per cubic foot by a method approved by the Engineer. Remove oil or other rust inhibitors from mixing drums and pressure grout pumps prior to mixing and pumping. Equip pump with digital counter for counting pump strokes to determine volume of grout pumped.

B. Crane: Use crane equipped with torque converter or hydraulic drive system to permit a slow continuous auger

lifting (grouting) operation.

C. Auger: Use 3-inch minimum I.D. hollow shaft auger to facilitate grout flow.





D. Auger drive: Use auger drive head having a minimum static weight of 4,000 pounds and drive 150 horsepower.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Estimated tip elevations are approximate based upon subsurface explorations and the approximate required lengths of test piles are indicated.

3.2 PILE LENGTHS

A. Estimated quantities of piles indicated are based on the probable lengths in the completed structure and are approximate only. Lengths of piles to be installed shall be determined by the Engineer during the auguring process. These lengths shall represent the lengths which are to remain in the completed structure.

3.3 TEST PILES

A. Place test piles of the type as specified elsewhere in this section.

B. Install test piles in accordance with Article 3.04. of this section.

C. Grout shall not be pumped until the Engineer has approved the final tip elevation.

D. Pile Load Tests: 1. Install 4 test piles in the locations directed by the Engineer. The engineer will select at least one of these

piles for load testing. One pile shall be load tested for compression and one for tension. 2. Test piles which pass the load test in an undamaged ccondition may be authorized as permanent piles in

the work. 3. Load test requirement: At the direction of the Engineer compression and tension load tests shall be made

in general accordance with ASTM D1143. The load testing of the piles shall be used to determine the following: a. That correct lengths and installation criteria are being used, and if this is not the case to:

b. Establish that revised lengths or installation criteria are satisfactory.

4. Load application: The test pile shall be loaded up to a total load of not less than two times the design

capacity of the pile. Loads shall be applied to the maximum test load in 15 ton increments.

5. Acceptance Criteria: For the pile to be acceptable, the gross pile head movement at 200 percent of the design load shall be less than the 1/2 inch and the graphical plot of load vs. settlement up to 150 percent of the design load shall be linear.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PILES:

A. General: Provide piling of the length and configuration necessary to: 1. Achieve the required penetration determined by the Engineer.





2. Extend into the pile cap or structure footing the indicated length. 3. Attain the indicated bearing capacity.

B. Install piling to the required penetration, or to the required bearing layer, or to refusal as determined by the

Engineer. Refusal is defined as the depth where less than 6 inches of downward penetration is achieved in one minute of auguring.

C. Excavation of the pile cap may be completed prior to or after auguring and grouting. Completely fill the

augured hole with grout and sleeve to cutoff elevation. The excavation of the pile cap shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer.

D. Feed materials to the mixer accurately measured by weight, except water, which may be measure by volume. E. Drill each pile hole and fill with grout in an uninterrupted operation. Provide grout injection equipment with

grout pressure gauges which are readable by the crane operator at his normal work station and the inspecting Engineer at the leads.

F. If the auger jumps upward more than six inches but less than 12 inches during withdrawal, reinsert auger to at

least three feet past the position where the inspecting Engineer first detected the deficiency and re-grout the pile from that point upward.

G. If the auger jumps upward more than 12 inches during withdrawal, or the pile is not installed in general

accordance with accepted procedures, reinsert auger to the point that the auger jumped or to the base of the questionable area and regrout the pile to the grout surface. This pile will be considered a rejected pile and an additional pile shall be installed adjacent thereto.

H. Rapid drops in the grout pressure of 50 psi or more at the leads, occurring when otherwise accepted

procedures are being used for installation, may be cause for pile abandonment. Such abandoned piles, however, will be paid for along with the replacement piles. In case of a rapid drop in the grout pressure, lower the auger three feet past the point of pressure loss and attempt to grout the pile to the surface. If grout pressure cannot be built-up to the specified pressure head during the regrouting operation and more than 50 cubic feet of grout is lost at any five feet interval during the regrouting attempt, complete the pile as well as possible and abandons the pile. Rapid drops in the grout pressure of 50 psi or more at the leads occurring when unacceptable procedures are being used for installation shall be cause for rejection of pile. Such piles shall be completed as well as possible and be replaced by additional piles.

I. The initial pressure at the base of the leads shall be maintained at a minimum of 150 psi at the start of pile

grouting.

J. Drilled Cast-In-Place Pile reinforcement: The cage shall have suitable "chairs" attached to the vertical bars to assure centering of the cage in the pile and the cage shall be placed immediately after grouting the pile.

K. After installation of the piles, the pile cap base shall be cleaned until reasonably free of cuttings. Dispose of

material excavated by auguring outside the limits of footing area unless otherwise directed. Do not leave





partially completed piles overnight, but completely grout and protect at the termination of each day's operation.

L. Grout volume: The volume of grout per linear foot of pile shall be equal to or greater than the volume of grout

per foot of applicable test pile. Volume measurements shall be made by the Engineer or his representative, but the Contractor shall provide calibrated equipment to make such measurements.

M. Protection of piles: Provide a sequence of pile installation such that adjacent piles are not disturbed.

Evidence of disturbance may appear as a drop in the grout surface. Keep the equipment far enough away from the pile being augured to avoid compressing or shearing of the soil which may in turn displace or squeeze off the grout column. Do not place piles within three feet of adjacent piles until the grout in the piles has undergone initial set and has set for at least two hours.

END OF SECTION



ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03330 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 6

SECTION 03330 – ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE - ∆ Addendum #4 (section added) PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work covered by this Section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials, labor, hardware, equipment and services required in conjunction with or related to the forming, delivery and pouring of all cast-in-place Architectural Concrete work. Extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings, including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members and type of concrete to be poured.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. General: As specified under other applicable concrete Sections and as follows:

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI301; Chapter 13, Architectural Concrete.

2. ACI303.1, “Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer.

B. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified if requested by Architect/Engineer, including names, sources and descriptions.

C. Laboratory Test Reports and Mix Designs: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs as specified in this section.

D. Material and Mill Certificates: Provide material and mill certificates as specified herein and in the Testing Laboratory section of the specifications. Material and mill certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

E. Construction Joints: Submit drawings of proposed construction joints in concrete for slab-on-grade, structural floors, roofs and walls.

zwethington

Polygon




∆ Addendum #4 (section added)

F. Minutes of Pre-Concrete Placement Conference.

G. Shop Drawings:

1. Reinforcement: Submit as specified under applicable concrete Sections.

2. Formwork: Show type, design, and materials. Show locations and details of formwork joints, construction joints, and form ties. Form ties are to be placed in strict accordance with the documents.

D. Samples:

1. Concrete: 12-inch by 12-inch by 11/2-inch-thick; each type and finish for preliminary review. Final re view by mock-up.

2. Form Ties: Full size, selected color. Form ties locations strictly per construction documents.

3. Poly-Overlay Forming Panels: 12-inch by 12-inch.

E. Certificates: For admixtures, concrete mix design, and concrete trial mixes; as specified under other applicable concrete Sections.

F. LEED Submittals

1. Product Data for MR 4 Recycled Content: Printed statement with percentage by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include the cost of the products with recycled content. Architectural concrete shall contain 15% minimum pre-consumer recycled content. or 7.5% post consumer content.

2. Product Data for MR 5 Regional Materials: Printed statement for products manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project. Include the cost of the products with regional material.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mock-ups

1. Preliminary Mock-Up: Construct mock-up of sample wall shown at Project site. Install concrete as re quired for permanent work. Prior to commencement of final work, prepare three (3) 8 ft. wide x 5’6” high mock-ups as specified, including finishes, and reinforcing required for final construction. Include hori zontal and vertical form joints with form ties as shown on documents. Obtain approval of location and orientation of mock-up and approval of mock-up formwork shop drawings and produvts from Architect and mix design from Engineer before mock-up formwork construction.

2. Mock-up: Following review of preliminary mock-up, construct mock-up of full size elements indicated on the Drawings and conforming to building details. Use reinforcing required for final construction. Provide





footings and bracing on interior faces to assure continuous stability. Obtain approval of location and orientation of mock-up and approval of mock-up formwork shop drawings and products from Architect and mix design from Engineer before mock-up formwork construction.

3. Vary approved trial concrete mix design parameters including water-cement ratio, and self consolidating admixtures to achieve acceptable Architectural finishes with proper workability, finishability, curing and setting time. Re construct mock-ups as required to obtain acceptance.

4. Approved mock-ups shall be retained during Architectural Concrete construction and serve as a standard of quality for specified items for the project.

5. Provide mock-ups on site in remote locations as designated by Owner and approved by Architect.

6. Provide contractor quality control and Owner testing and inspection quality assurance as for final work during mock-ups including certification of materials, mix design and casting and testing of test cylinders.

1.06 SCHEDULING

A. General: Coordinate with other trades for installation of items to be embedded in concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: As specified under applicable Sections, except as follows:

B. Concrete: Use natural gray cement, pigment, and aggregates, each from a single source, to assure uniformity of appearance. Match Architect’s sample.

C. Formwork:

1. Poly-Overlay Forming Panels:

a. Manufacturer: Sylvan Industries, LLC “Durapour” or equal.

b. Standard Description: ¾” Poly-Overlay From Panels, .065”/.065” peel coat overlays, with minimum 5/8” full thickness BB Douglas-fir plywood core, and subject to US Product Standard PS 1-95.

Core-line plywood specification- minimum 5/8” full thickness BB (or better) Douglas-fir plywood core, with net panel thickness no less than ¾”, subject allowable thickness and wood patch tolerances under PS 1-95. An 11-ply or more solid BB/BC (or better) birch core is a permissible alternative for the core-line only, particularly to improve stiffness and smoothness. If the panels are to be of a net size larger than 5’ (wide) x 10’ (long), then a scarfed and sanded core-line will





be accepted, subject to application of a the overlay described below, and appropriate engineering at the jobsite.

Overlay specification: A balance polyethylene face and back, with .065”/.065” minimum thickness, and with “peel coat” protective sheets on face and back. The pour side of the panel must have no less than a .100” poly thickness, with a “peel coat” protective sheet on the face. The back-side on the panels can be a .020” vapor barrier overlay, if these panels are being back-screwed to supportive plywood of a minimum ¾” in thickness. If the panels will not be back-braced to supportive plywood, then these must have a balance lay-up of an equal .100” face and back, with a minimum net thickness of .825” (or nominal 13/16”). For panels wider than 5’, a smooth fiber reinforced surface overlay with an appropriate release coating will be accepted pending successful completion of an on-site mock-up test, or if necessary, requiring Nox-Crete PCE or Unitex Q-2 release agents, or equal.

A. Form ties and Spreaders:

1. Ties: RJD Industries, Inc.; Supertie, Fiberglass Formtie Syatem from RJD Industries.

2. Spreaders: Same as ties, cut to wall thickness.

3. Spreader clips; Proprietary clip to position spreaders adjacent to ties.

2.02 MIXES

A. General: As specified under other applicable concrete Sections.

B. Admixtures: Use air entraining and water reducing admixtures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. At least one week prior to commencement of concrete work, meet at the Project site to review methods and sequence of concrete construction, standard workmanship, material selection, testing and quality control requirements, detailed requirements of the design mixes, placement procedures, off-site batching requirements, coordination of the work with other tradesand other pertinent topics related to the Work. Meeting shall include the following:

1. Owner’s representative

2. Architect/Engineer





3. Construction Manager/General Contractor

4. Concrete subcontractor

5. Owner’s testing laboratory

6. Ready mix concrete supplier

7. Admixture Manufacturer representative

8. Formwork supplier

9. Any other subcontractor and/or material supplier or manufacturer required.

3.02 FORMWORK


3.03 REINFORCEMENT


3.04 CONCRETE

A. General: Mix, convey, place consolidate, cure, and protect concrete as specified under other applicable concrete Sections.

B. Consolidation: Do not spade concrete at finish surfaces. Vibrate exposed faces with external vibrators to en sure a dense homogeneous mass without voids.

E. Placing: Deposit concrete as closely as possible to its final position to avoid rehandling. Place in uniform, horizontal layers not deeper than 18 inches, care being taken to avoid vertical joints or inclined planes. Depo sit concrete continuously and as rapidly as practical until the entire unit of pour is completed. Avoid jarring the forms or placing any strain on the ends of projecting reinforcement after the concrete has taken its initial set.

3.05 FINISHES

A. Architectural Concrete Type 2 (Smooth Form Surfaces): Provide smooth, glossy and sealed finish upon form removal with no patching, stoning, or other form of repair.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Mock-up: Use as standard for finishes, appearances, quality and workmanship.





B. Architectural Concrete Type 2: Exposed concrete with rock pockets, mortar paste leakage, voids, discoloration, sanding, or deviations from specified surface will be considered defective. Replace defective work at no additional cost to Owner.

3.07 CLEANING

A. General: Clean finished surfaces with mild detergents and brushes. Do not permit laitance to penetrate stain or harden on finished surfaces. Rinse off cleaning solutions with clear water.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect outside horizontal and vertical corners with full length wood guards. Place immediately after stripping. Remove when hazards of damage from construction operations are no longer present.

END OF SECTION



METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720 Rizo, Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 10 of 10


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. - ∆ Addendum #4 B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed handrail and railing

assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in the completed Work. Handrails and railings will be tested according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with ASTM E 985.

C. Remove and replace handrails and railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified

requirements, unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and will comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.08 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective

coverings approved by railing manufacturer.Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction

work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION

zwethington

Polygon



DOOR HARDWARE 08710 Rizo, Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 14 of 20

C. Demonstration: Conduct a training class for building maintenance personnel demonstrating the adjustment, operation of mechanical and electrical hardware. Special tools for finished hardware to be turned over and explained usage at this meeting.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Leave manufacturer’s protective film intact and provide proper protection for all other finish hardware items that do not have protective material from the manufacture until Owner accepts Project as complete.

3.06 HARDWARE SETS

A. The following schedule of hardware sets shall be considered a guide only. Furnish door hardware to meet required codes.

3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HDW SET 1 HDW SET 1 Door Numbers: 101, 117, 121, 122A, 131, 131A, 136 ∆ Addendum #4 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 2 Cylinders 3902 US26D 1 Electric Strike As required US32D 1 Floor Stop (101, 131A) 241F US26D Note: Doors to have Card readers HDW SET 1A Door Numbers: 122, 122A Qty Type Description Finish 2 Floor Stop 241F US26D Note: Hardware by aluminum door manufacturer. Verify cylinder type and quantity required. Verify electric strike type required to work with the aluminum door hardware. Contractor to coordinate with Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies for the security system and specific hardware requirements for each door equipped with an electric strike: Contractor to contact Steve Andrietta, 2854 Corporate Way, Miramar, Florida, 33025, 954.391.4520 for Card reader coordination and installation.

zwethington

Polygon




Note: Doors to have card readers, contractor to coordinate with Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies for the security system and specific hardware requirements for Card reader. ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 5 Door Numbers: 142 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 2 Continuous Hinge 780-112HD RBCC CLR 2 Surface Bolts 275D US26D 1 Classroom Lock 3470 WTN US26D 2 Closers 5100 HDCS ALM 1 Threshold 520S N MIL 1 Weatherstripping 881S N MIL 1 Drip Guard 810S + 4” door width MIL Note: “Z” type astragal by door manufacturer HDW SET 6 Door Numbers: 102, 118, 118A, 119, 120, 123B, 124B Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Privacy Set 3440 WTN US26D 1 Mop Plate 194S 8” US32D 1 Floor Stop (102, 123B, 124A) 241F US26D 3 Silencers 307D GREY ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 7 Door Numbers: 103, 123, 124 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Office Lock 3450 WTN US26D 1 Overhead Stop 9 Series US26D 3 Silencers 307D GREY 1 Wall Stop (123, 124) 236W US32D 1 Floor Stop (103) 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




HDW SET 8 Door Numbers: 104 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Classroom Lock 3470 WTN US26D 1 Closer 5100 MLT ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D 3 Silencers 307D GREY HDW SET 9 Door Numbers: 105 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Privacy Set 3440 WTN US26D 1 Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 3 Silencers 307D GREY 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 10 Door Numbers: 106 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 1 Continuous Hinge UL-FF780-112HD RBCC CLR 1 Storeroom Lock 3480 WTN Tactile US26D 1 Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 1 Smoke Seal 721S CHARCOAL 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 11 Door Numbers: 107 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Passage Set 3410 WTN US26D 1 Closer 5101 PAR HDCS ALM

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 3 Silencers 307D GREY 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 12 Door Numbers: 108 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 1 Continuous Hinge UL-FF780-112HD RBCC CLR 1 Classroom Lock 3470 WTN US26D 1 Closer 5101 PAR HDCS ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 1 Smoke Seal 721S CHARCOAL 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 Note: If intumescent seal is required, delete 721S smoke seal and add 720S intumescent seal HDW SET 13 Door Numbers: 110, 111, 113, 115, 116, 121A, 121B, 121C Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Passage Set 3410 WTN US26D 1 Wall Stop (121A, 121B, 121C) 236W US32D 1 Overhead Stop/Holder 9 Series US32D 3 Silencers 307D GREY 1 Floor Stop (110, 111, 113, 241F US26D 115, 121C) ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 14 Door Numbers: 109, 109A Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Push Plate 30S 8” x 16” US32D 1 Pull Plate H33G 4” x 16” US32D 1 Closer 5100 ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




3 Silencers 307D GREY

HDW SET 15 Door Numbers: 112, 114, 134, 135 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1191 4.5” X 4.5” US32D 1 Passage Set 3410 WTN US26D 1 Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 1 Smoke Seal 721S CHARCOAL 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 16 Door Numbers: 123A, 124A, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 130 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Privacy Set 3440 WTN US26D 1 Wall Stop 236W US32D 1 Overhead Stop 9 Series US32D 3 Silencers 307D GREY 1 Floor Stop (123A, 124A) 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 17 Door Numbers: 138 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 1 Continuous Hinge 780-112HD RBCC CLR 1 Classroom Lock 3470 WTN US26D 1 Closer 5100 HDCS ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 1 Weatherstripping 881S N MIL 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




HDW SET 18 Door Numbers: 139, 140 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 2 Continuous Hinges 780-112HD RBCC CLR 1 Set Flush Bolts 282D US26D 1 Dust Proof Strike 280X US26D 1 Classroom Lock 3470 WTN US26D 2 Closers 5100 HDCS ALM 1 Weatherstripping 881S N MIL 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 19 Door Numbers: 201 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Passage Set 3410 WTN US26D 1 Overhead Stop 9 Series US32D 3 Silencers 307D GREY 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4 HDW SET 20 Door Numbers: 136, 121 Each opening to receive: Qty Type Description Finish 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 Passage Set 3410 WTN US26D 1 Push Plate 30S 8” x 16” US32D 1 Closer 5101 PAR HDCS ALM 1 Kick Plate 194S 8” US32D 3 Silencers 307D GREY 1 Floor Stop 241F US26D ∆ Addendum #4

END OF SECTION

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon



EPOXY TERRAZZ0 09920 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 6

SECTION 09920 - EPOXY TERRAZZO PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 03300 . 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acceptable supplier: 1. Materials furnished shall meet NTMA Specifications.

B. Installer qualifications:

1. Installer shall be a contractor member of NTMA and shall perform all work in accordance with NTMA standards.

2. If installer is not a contractor member of NTMA, they shall submit a list of completed projects of a similar magnitude and complexity.

1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Samples:

1. Submit a maximum of three samples, minimum 8” x 8” for each Color and type of terrazzo. 2. Submit two, 8” minimum lengths of each type and kind of Divider strips.

B. Maintenance Literature:

1. Submit a maximum of three samples, minimum 8”x 8” for each Color and type of terrazzo. 2. Submit two copies of maintenance recommendations of NTMA or maintenance product

members of MTMA. ∆ Addendum #4 C. Certification: 1. Suppliers shall furnish certification attesting that materials meet specifications requirements.

2. Suppliers shall furnish properly labeled material and Material Safety Sheets, which comply to current state and federal requirements.

D. LEED Submittals

1. Product Data for MR 4 Recycled Content: Printed statement with percentage by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include the cost of the products with recycled content. Epoxy Terrazzo shall have a minimum of 100% post-consumer recycled content aggregate.

2. Product Data for EQ 4.1 Low Emitting Materials- Adhesives and Sealants: Printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. All adhesives and sealants on the interior (inside weather-proofing applied on –site) shall comply with South Coast air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




3. Product Data for EQ 4.3 Low Emitting Materials- Flooring Systems: Printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. Epoxy Terrazzo shall be certified compliant with FloorScore or meet product requirements for California Department of Health Services Standard Practices for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers and 2004 Addenda.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Deliver materials in a manner to prevent damage to containers and/or bags. B. Storage of materials:

1. Store materials in a clean, dry and heated (if necessary) location (50-90 degrees Fahrenheit) furnished by others.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. One year from date of substantial completion and acceptance by Owner of the project for the Terrazzo installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Primer: As recommended by Epoxy Resin Supplier.

B. Epoxy resin mixed according to manufacturers’ recommendation and tested without aggregate added. All specimens cured for 7 days at 75 degrees plus or minus 2 degrees Fahrenheit and 50% plus or minus 2 R.H. The product shall meet the following requirements:

PROPERTY TEST METHOD REQUIREMENT HARDNESS ASTM D-2240 Using Shore D Durometer 60-85 TENSILE ASTM D-638 RUN AT .2” MIN 3,000 Min STRENGTH specimen made using “C” die Listed in ASTM D-412 COMPRESSIVE ASTM D-695, specimen B cylinder 10,000-psi min STRENGTH CHEMICAL ASTM D-1308 – 7 days at room temperature by immersion method have no deleterious

effects. The following contaminants used:

zwethington

Polygon




Distilled Water…………………... 1% Soap Solution Mineral Water…………….. 10% Sodium Hydroxide Isopropanol………………… 10% Hydrochloric Acid Ethanol……………………... 30% Hydrochloric Acid .025 Detergent Solution………… 5% Acetic Acid

C. Epoxy Resin mixed according to manufacturers recommendations and blended with 3 volumes of Georgia White marble blended 60% #1 chip and 40% #0 chip, ground and grouted with epoxy resin according to 3.02 C-2-Finishing to a nominal 1.4” thickness. All specimens cured 7 days at 75 degrees plus or minus 2 degrees Fahrenheit and 50% plus or minus 2% R.H. The finished epoxy terrazzo shall meet the following requirements: 1. Flammability: When tested in accordance with ASTM-D635, the Epoxy terrazzo shall comply

with the following value: Self-extinguishing, extent of burning 0.25 inches maximum. 2. Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: when tested in accordance with ASTM-D696, the

Epoxy terrazzo will comply with the following value: 25 x 10-6 inches per inch per degrees to 140 degrees Fahrenheit.

3. Bond Strength: When tested in accordance with Field Test Method For surface soundness and adhesion as described in ACI Committee No. 403 Bulletin Title No. 59-43 (Pages 1139-1141) the Epoxy Terrazzo shall comply with the following value: 100% concrete Failure minimum, with 200-PSI minimum tensile strength.

D. Marble Chips:

1. Size: To conform with NTMA gradation standards. 2. Hardness according to ASTM C-241 Ha-10 minimum. 3. 24 Hour absorption rate not to exceed 0.75 percent. 4. Chips shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter. 5. Dust content less than 1% by weight.

E. Strips:

1. Stop and divider “L” strips of zinc 1/8” heavy top. 2. Construction joint double “L” strips back to back 16 gauge.

F. Terrazzo Cleaner:

1. Ph factor between 7 and 10, where applicable. 2. Biodegradable and phosphate free.

G. Sealer:

1. Ph factor between 7 and 10, where applicable. 2. Shall not discolor or amber 3. Flash point: ASTM D-56, 80 degrees Fahrenheit minimum, where

Applicable. 4. U/L listed as “Slip Resistant.”

zwethington

Polygon




2.02 MIXES A. Terrazzo Selection:

Type: and design as selected by architect. B. Proportions:

1. Epoxy Terrazzo Topping: In accordance with resin suppliers recommendations.

C. Mixing:

1. Terrazzo Topping: Charge and mix marble chips, filler and epoxy resin in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.03 RESILIENT BASE ∆ Addendum #4

A. Manufacturer: 1. Johnsonite, Inc., 16910 Munn Road Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023

Phone: (800) 899-8916, Fax: (440) 543-8920 Web: www.johnsonite.com E-mail: [email protected]

2. Or Equal B. Proprietary Product Description:

1. Construction: Johnsonite Millwork Resilient Wall Base is manufactured from a proprietary thermoplastic rubber formulation designed specifically to meet the performance and dimensional requirements of ASTM F-1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base, Type TP, and Group 1.

C. Physical Characteristics:

1. Mandalay™ 2-1/2″ high (MW-XX-H25): 3/8″ (9.52mm) thick by 2-1/2″ (6.35cm) high wall base, a rectangular shaped profile with a 45° chamfer top, 5 per carton, 8 ft lengths, 40 ft (12.2m) per carton, 40 lbs (18.14kg) per carton

D. Product Performance and Technical Data:

1. Hardness: ASTM D 2240: 85 Shore A 2. Flexibility: Will not crack, break, or show any signs of fatigue when bent around a 1/4"

(6.4 mm) diameter cylinder. 3. Fire Resistance: 2.3.1 ASTM E 648/NFPA 253 (Critical Radiant Flux) – Class 1 2.3.2

ASTM E 84/NFPA 255: Flame/Smoke – Class A / less than 450 Smoke

E. Chemical Resistance: 1. ASTM F 925, Passed – 5% Acetic acid, 70% Isopropyl alcohol, White mineral oil

(medicinal grade), Sodium hydroxide solution (5% NaOH), Hydrochloric acid solution (5% HCl), Sulfuric acid solution (5% H2SO4), Household ammonia solution (5% NH4OH), Household bleach (5.25% NaOCl), Olive oil (light), Kerosene (K1), and Unleaded gasoline (regular grade)

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




2. Meets or exceeds the performance requirements for resistance to heat/light aging, chemicals, and dimensional stability when tested to the methods, as described, in ASTM F-1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.

F. INSTALLATION

1. The installation of Johnsonite Millwork Resilient Wall Base should not begin until the work of all other trades has been completed, especially overhead trades. Areas to receive wall base shall be clean, fully enclosed, weathertight, and maintained at a uniform temperature of at least 650 F for 24 hours before, during, and after the installation is completed. The wall base and adhesives shall be conditioned in the same manner. Floors and walls shall be clean, dry, free of dust, all paints, wallpaper, and all other foreign material, which may affect proper adhesive bonding. Wall Base may be installed on interior plaster, gypsum wallboard, concrete, masonry, mineral-reinforced cement board or similar porous surfaces. Wall Base shall not be installed on surfaces that will be exposed to drastic temperature changes or moisture. Cut the wall base to finished length and miter cut the ends for inside and outside corners.

G. Porous Surfaces 1. Johnsonite #960 Acrylic Cove Base Adhesive 2. Application - 1/8" square notch trowel Approximate Coverage in Linear ft/gal MW-XX-

H25 (Mandalay) = 400 to 480

H. Non-porous Surfaces 1. Johnsonite #945 Contact Bond Adhesive Application - Brush or roller Coverage -

approximately 360 sq ft /gallon ∆ Addendum #4

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

1. Defects in existing work that affect proper execution of terrazzo shall be corrected by contractor such as; cracks in substrate will usually be transmitted through topping to surface.

2. Deviations beyond allowable tolerance for the concrete slab work. 3. Sub floor not to vary more than ¼ inch from true plane in 10 feet. Epoxy terrazzo, as specified, is

not intended to level substrate and will only follow the contour of the concrete slab. If, for any reason, the subcontractor questions the suitability of the substrate for bonding, any work required to eliminate non-conformity of subsurface specifications is the responsibility of others, materials used to correct nonconformity must be compatible with epoxy system selected and be approved by the terrazzo contractor.

B. Start work only when all defects have been corrected by others. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Sub floor:

1. Prepare substrate to receive epoxy terrazzo in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

zwethington

Polygon

zwethington

Polygon




2. Install control joints directly above control joints in sub floor. 3. Install divider strips as shown on drawings. 4. Broom clean area to receive terrazzo of loose chips, laitance and all foreign matter. 5. Sub floor should not vary more than ¼” from true plane in a 10 foot span with a broom finish free

of. No curing agents or other additives which could prevent bonding should be used. The slab should have an efficient moisture barrier under the concrete slab when placed directly on grade. Saw cutting of control joints must be done 12-24 hours after placement of structural concrete.

B. Placing Terrazzo: 1. Prime sub floor in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Sufficient water, temporary heat and light, and adequate electric with suitable outlets connected

and distributed for use within 100 feet of working space. 3. Place terrazzo mixture in panels formed by divider strips. Trowel

Mixture to top of strips.

C. Finishing: 1. Rough Grinding:

a. Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. b. Follow initial grind with 80 or finer grit stones.

2. Grouting: a. Cleanse terrazzo with clean water and rinse. b. Remove excess rinse water and hand apply grout using identical Epoxy Formulation as used in topping, taking care to fill voids.

3. Cure Grout: a. Grout may be left on terrazzo until all heavy and messy work in project is completed.

4. Fine Grinding: a. Grind with 80 or finer grit stones until all grout is removed from surface. b. Upon completion, terrazzo shall show a minimum of 70% of marble chips.

D. Cleaning and Sealing: 1. Wash all surfaces with a neutral cleaner. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s directions

E. Protection:

1. Upon completion, the work shall be ready for final inspection and Acceptance by the owner or his agent.

2. The General Contractor shall protect the finished work from the Time that the terrazzo contractor completes the work

END OF SECTION

zwethington

Polygon


PROJECT NUMBER B-60453A Header has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

TELEPHONE AND DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM 13742 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 4

Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 13742 – TELEPHONE AND DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Complete empty raceway system with pullstrings for telephone/data communications including

necessary accessories. Provide wiring closets, plywood backboards, conduits, cable trays, appropriate supports, pull boxes, and outlet boxes to form an empty raceway system.

B. Related Sections:

1. 07270 - Firestopping and Fire and Smoke barrier Caulking ∆ Addendum #4

2. 13740 - Intercom and Clock/Bell Raceway System ∆ Addendum #4

3. 16100 - Basic Materials and Methods. 4. 16112 - Raceways and Conduits. 5. 16120 - Wire and Cable. 6. 16131 - Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes.

7. 16132 – Floor Boxes ∆ Addendum #4

8. 16160 - Terminal Cabinets. 9. 16450 - Grounding. 10. 16511 - Lighting, Fixtures, and Lamps.

07270 - Firestopping and Fire and Smoke Barrier Caulking. 2. 13740 - Intercom and Clock/Bell Raceway System. 7. 16132 - Floor Boxes.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Black Cable: Jelly-filled multi-conductor copper cable, also known as PIC ASP sheath-filled cable. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. Submit for review, properly identified product data giving materials, finishes, accessories, and installation

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon





directions where required. B. Furnish a set of "Record Drawings" to A/E indicating accurate plan layout, conduit runs, and the like as installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Telephone/Data Communications Raceway System:

1. Extend main raceway conduits from the Data Room to the existing underground utilities system. 2. Size underground conduits as follows: Conduit Size Number of Pairs 2” (minimum) 1 – 99 3” 100 – 300 4” 301 – 900 3. Refer to the telephone/data riser diagrams shown on the Drawings. 4. Branch conduits to final telephone/data outlet locations from Data Room shall be ¾” minimum and not

exceed a length of 250 feet. 5. Furnish and install necessary interior conduit, sleeves, strip cabinets, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and other

materials for a complete conduit system for telephone/data as shown on the Drawings. 6. Provide pull wires in empty conduits. 7. Computer lab outlet boxes require one 4-pair cable. Any other outlet box served requires four 4-pair

cable. Any other outlet box served requires four 4-pair cables to be pulled from wiring or closet. Size conduits as follows:

Conduit Size No. of Cables if Pulled Together ¾” (minimum) 4 1” 7 1 – ¼” 12 1 – ½” 16 2” 22 2 – ½” 36 3” 50 8. Raceways shall contain no more than two 90 degree bends or equivalent. Provide additional junction or

pull boxes to meet this requirement.

B. Backboards: 1. Data Room: Cover all walls with ¾” plywood painted with gray fire retarded paint. 2. Terminate telephone/data conduits at the top and bottom of the blackboards.





C. Floor Sleeves: 1. Extend 6 inches above and below the slab construction at Data Room. D. Outlets: 1. Wall Telephone/Data outlet boxes. a. 4 inch boxes. b. Faceplates and jacks. E. Service Entrance Conduit: 1. Underground: PVC schedule 40. 2. Aboveground: Rigid metallic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials according to local and national codes. B. Conduit from branch telephone/data outlets shall terminate at the top and 6” above ceiling (minimum). Provide

empty conduit with suitable pull wires. Allow 10 inches minimum slack at each end of pull wire. C. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 24 inches below finish grade. D. As indicated on drawings, provide an insulated No. 6 AWG grounding wire terminated on a grounding bar in the

Data Room. E. Ensure the empty raceway system installed, for telephone, data, and spares is clearly marked and is not used for

any other purpose. F. Mount wall telephone/data outlets in one outlet box at 18 inches above finish floor. G. Conduit Installation: 1. Install ¾” conduit from the final outlet box to an accessible ceiling space. 2. Wiring from outlet-box to oulet-box (daisy-chaining) is not acceptable. 3. Provide wall space and access to the following as required: a. Protection assemblies for black cables as determined by ITS. b. Splice case. c. Data hub and patch panels. d. Jack panels. e. Light guide interface unit. f. Telephone termination blocks.





END OF SECTION



FIRE STATION CONTROL SYSTEM 13801 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 7


SECTION 13801 - FIRE STATION CONTROL SYSTEM Section Added ∆ Addendum #4 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This specification will provide the detailed requirements of a fire station control system (herein FSCS) to be installed in fire stations within the City. 1.02 DESCRIPTION The FSCS shall provide command and control of the fire stations for all alarm situations requiring a response from emergency personnel located in the fire station. Command and control of the fire station personnel shall be done in a manner that reduces turn-out time and the stress level associated with conventional methods of awaking personnel at night. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Construction – The FSCS shall be an integrated system design with modular expansion capability permitting

the fire department to construct the system in incremental stages while maintaining full fire station command and control capability. The FSCS design must meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 1221 (2007). All functions shall be re-configurable by software changes only, without requiring changes to the hardware units.

B. Alarm Activation Capability – The FSCS shall be capable of function activation from a minimum of two

independent sources of information with supervisory control over both primary sources. The FSCS shall also be capable of function activation from a secondary source in addition to the two primary activation sources. One of the primary sources of activation shall be capable of bi-directional data transfer rate of 9.6 KB per second.

C. Pre-Announcement Capability – The FSCS shall be capable of recorded human voice pre-announcements that

contain company-specific information that is customizable to the requirements of each individual fire station within the fire department. The pre-announcement capability shall include a separate pre-announcement for a minimum of 32 companies per station, 250 major types of incidents and 250 of emergency response levels. There shall be separate pre-announcements for daytime operation and separate pre-announcements for nighttime operation controlled by internal clock function of the FSCS. Multi-company pre-announcement messages shall be capable of any and all combinations of company responses required from a fire station. The human voice pre-announcements may be preceded by any tone signaling required by the fire department and this tone signaling shall be have the ability to be being altered or eliminated based on time of day programming in the FSCS.

sys1

Polygon





D. Zoned Capability

1. Ceiling-Mounted Colored Light Indicators – The FSCS shall be capable of providing Colored Light Indicators throughout the fire station. Each Colored Light Indicator shall: a. Contain a minimum of five distinct colors (i.e. blue, green, red, white and yellow) that are

used to designate five separate fire companies. The colors must be programmable to activate in any combination.

b. Be mounted in the ceiling areas of the fire station and shall illuminate upon receipt of command data from the dispatch center indicating company-specific responses.

c. Be housed within one unit that also contains an internal speaker capable of delivering pre-announcement and dispatch audio (see Section E and Section M for additional design requirements of the internal speaker).

d. Shall be visible from a minimum of twenty, unobstructed feet from the indicting device. e. Shall be capable of programming that controls the audio level in one (1) dB increments

over a range of ninety (90) dB remotely from the network interface controller (see Section E and Section M for additional design requirements of the internal speaker).

f. Shall be capable of producing nightvision lighting for a programmable time period after activation by a company-specific response command (see Section G for additional design requirements of the nightvision lighting.

g. Capable of meantime between failures of greater than 50,000 hours.

2. Dorm Room Indicating Devices – The FSCS shall be capable of supporting the operation of indicating devices that can be placed in individual dorm room locations. These devices shall be programmable by fire department personnel to activate company-specific zones. These devices shall also: a. Be capable of human voice pre-announcements for the programmed company-specific

zone, dispatch audio and nightvision lighting of the bedroom area during the activation period.

b. Be programmable to accommodate personnel assignments to more than one company-specific zone.

c. Be housed within one unit that also contains an internal speaker capable of delivering pre-announcement and dispatch audio (see Section E and Section M for additional design requirements of the internal speaker).

d. Be capable of programming that controls the audio level in one-dB increments over a range of ninety dB.

e. Be capable of programming a lower audio level during nighttime hours of operation in one dB increments (see Section E and Section M for additional design requirements of the internal speaker).

f. Be capable of enabling or disabling station radio audio permitting radio watch operations. g. Have an integral lamp attached to the unit itself or overhead in the ceiling that illuminates

the bunk area without requiring additional illuminating devices. h. Be capable of programming nightvision lighting level over a range of fifteen (15) different

levels of illumination. i. Be cable of being relocated by fire department personnel without any assistance from

outside services.





j. Be equipped with programming switches embedded in a waterproof membrane panel capable of being sanitized with liquid disinfectant.

k. Contain a two-line, sixteen character per line display device that is located behind the membrane switch panel and viewed through a waterproof transparent section of the membrane panel.

l. Be capable of supporting externally Colored Light Indicators and nightvision lamp assemblies.

E. Distributed Audio System – The FSCS shall be capable of incorporating a distributed audio system that does

not utilize centralized amplification devices driving remotely located speakers. The Distributed Audio System shall: 1. Be incorporated in all active Colored Light Indicators, all Dorm Room Indicating Devices, and all

High-Level Audio Systems (see Sections D (1), D (2) and N). 2. Be capable of delivering a minimum of ten (10) watts of audio power per each Colored Light

Indicator and Dorm Remote Indicating Device. 3. Be capable of delivering a minimum of 100 watts RMS (see Section N). 4. Shall support inputs from telephone paging systems, public address microphones and dedicated

telephone lines, in addition to the base station radio.

F. Zone Activation Indication – The FSCS shall be capable of displaying all company-specific zones that are activated from a command by the dispatch center on a front panel display device during the command sequence. Indicating devices located in individual bedrooms shall be capable of displaying company-specific activated zones during the command sequence. Zone activation indication shall be automatically cleared on the FSCS at the end of a command sequence and zone activation indication shall be cleared and the display extinguished at the end of the command sequence by the indicating device.

G. Nightvision System – The FSCS shall be capable of nightvision illumination of the active nighttime areas of

the fire station to provide retention of night vision by the fire department personnel during a command sequence. 1. The Dorm Room Indicating Devices (Section D (2)) shall provide nightvision illumination in

individual dorm room areas. 2. The Ceiling-Mounted Colored Light Indicators (Section D (1)) and Clone Indicator Device (Section

P) shall provide nightvision illumination in the common dormitories, hallways and apparatus bay areas.

3. The nightvision system may be strip lamp of six (6) to seven (7) feet or more in length. The strip lamp must be capable of being mounted to the t-bar of a drop-tile ceiling or underneath a stairway handrail. The strip lamps shall be capable of both white light illumination, as well as red light illumination during an alert. Red illumination shall be capable of directional lighting of egress areas, as well as variable levels of illumination based up ambient light levels.

4. Nightvision illumination level shall be automatically increased from the lowest level to the programmed upper level during the first twenty seconds of a command sequence to prevent optical shock to awakening fire personnel.

5. Nightvision lighting illuminators shall be capable of mean time between failures of greater than 50,000 hours of operation.





6. The Nightvision system shall be capable of also providing white light illumination in areas of the fire station, including illumination of the entire length of the hallways with pendent or wall mounted devices. These devices shall be at least thirteen (13) feet in length. The hallway Nightvision System shall automatically switch to red illumination of the entire hallway during a command sequence and return to white illumination at the end of the command sequence. The Nightvision System shall provide a minimum of three (3) levels of white light output, controllable by programming software.

H. Control System – The FSCS shall be capable of operating control and sense devices throughout the fire

station in response to commands and requests sent from the dispatch center. 1. Entertainment Control Devices – The FSCS shall be capable of operating the entertainment system

control devices that mute audio of entertainment systems during the command sequence and un-mute entertainment systems upon the completion of a command sequence. The entertainment system control device shall be remotely located and not connected to the entertainment equipment that it is controlling. The control device shall be capable of mounting into both fixed and suspended ceiling assemblies.

2. Remote Control Devices – The FSCS shall be capable of operating remote sense and control devices that control fire station operating parameters utilizing closed loop control technologies. The Remote Control Devices shall be capable of inverted control logic, enabling complex control functions. The command and control functions available to the dispatch center shall be 1,024 separate commands. The Remote Control Devices shall have the capability of sending 1,024 completed status verifications.

3. Video Alerting Devices – The FSCS shall be capable of displaying dispatch call information on televisions and monitor screens located throughout the fire station. Video information shall be displayed as an overlay on present video or black background. The screen shall return to normal status at the end of the alert sequence and shall not display the dispatch call information until the next alert.

I. Supervised Status Verification – The FSCS shall be capable of automatic supervised status verification by the

dispatch center. Upon loss of status verification, the FSCS shall activate all light indicators and indicating devices and pre-announce a communications failure has occurred providing audio and visual indication of the failure. The FSCS shall be capable of supervised status verification of the internal fire station control network. Upon loss of status verification, the FSCS shall activate all light indicators and indicating devices and pre-announce a network failure has occurred providing audio and visual indication of the failure. The FSCS shall be capable of notifying the dispatch center of a fire station network failure.

J. Interactive Data Collection And Control - The FSCS shall be capable of simultaneous command and control of

the fire station as well as data collection from the fire station. Interaction between the dispatch center and fire station located control and sense devices shall occur with no degradation of command and control sequences.

K. System Security – The FSCS shall use a command and control data protocol that includes command and

control verification of all functions prior to the execution of any commands or interpretation of any control data. Verification of all command functions shall be at the same security level required for command functions.





L. Monitoring Capability – The FSCS shall be capable of monitoring the fire stations status through the use of dry contact closure, RS232 9600 Baud or less serial data, parallel data and RS485 serial data. Monitoring of critical data applications shall also include pre-announcements to all zones of the fire station and notification to the dispatch center when monitored data exceeds pre-established windows of acceptability. The FSCS shall be capable of reporting unacceptable, critical data situations to a remotely located data collection center within thirty (30) seconds of detection of an unacceptable critical data situation.

M. Ambient Noise Level Monitoring –The FSCS shall be capable of monitoring ambient noise level at any

location within the fire station facility. The ambient noise level monitoring sensors shall continuously monitor ambient noise level and report this data to the FSCS for the purpose of maintaining an acceptable audio signal to ambient noise ratio during the command and control sequence. The ambient noise level monitoring system shall maintain the minimum audio level necessary to achieve speech intelligibility during the command and control sequence.

N. High-Level Audio System – The FSCS shall have the capability of delivering a minimum of one hundred (100)

watts RMS into a four (4) Ohm load with a total harmonic distortion of less than one (1) percent. The FSCS shall be capable of supporting twenty (20) separate one hundred (100) watt audio systems per fire station.

O. Installation Software – The FSCS shall be capable of complete system configuration from an RS232 serial data

input on the network or from a remote service center, utilizing installation software. The installation software shall be capable of identifying and communicating with all units within the FSCS network. The installation software shall be capable of verifying and altering the unit address, the unit variable allocation tables, including audio levels and light intensity, verifying correct unit operation by activation of the built in test function, test activation of any discrete unit function and archiving the variable allocation tables for maintenance functions. The installation software shall enable an expanded command set at each indicating device controllable from the front panel of the indicating device or network serial data port. This expanded command set shall enable the setting of function limits, enabling and disabling of multiple zone activation, zone name identification by company function and disabling the system security during the installation period. The installation software shall be capable of enabling fire department maintain personnel to add or delete units from the FSCS network with out the assistance of outside service personnel.

P. Clone Indicator Devices-The FSCS network shall support the operation of ceiling-mounted Colored Light

Indicator clone devices that are capable of identical audio and light outputs that are produced by the Ceiling-Mounted Colored Light Indicators. The Clone Indicator Devices shall be powered from and controlled by the Ceiling-Mounted Colored Light Indicators.

Q. Category 5 Cable Requirements- The FSCS shall be capable of operation with category 5 cable as the only

wiring required for system operation. 1. The Category 5 cable plant shall be installed per ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-A-1991 standards using only UL

Listed Category 5 Cable verified to EIA/TIA 568-A specifications. All components of the installed Category 5 cable plant shall be manufactured by the same manufacture. All cables shall be a minimum size of 24 AWG and identified at each end of the cable with a numerical identifier indicating the source and destination of the cable. All cable shall be rated for plenum installation with the exception of vertical cable runs which shall be rated for vertical installation. A floor plan





showing the location of each Category 5 cable shall be completed and delivered to the responsible party prior to the acceptance of the cable plant.

R. Interruptible Power System-The FSCS shall be powered from an on-line, fulltime dual-conversation

uninterruptible power system (herein UPS) that is capable of one hour of continuous operation after loss of power input from normal sources. The FSCS shall be capable of reporting loss of station power to the dispatch CAD.

PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Ups Power Requirements – The FSCS shall be equipped with a full time UPS supporting the both the FSCS as

well as all base radio equipment associated with the FSCS. This UPS shall be capable of a minimum of one-hour continuous operation after loss of power input from normal sources.

B. Phone Line Surge Suppression – All phone line connections made to the FSCS shall be equipped with both

surge suppression and over-voltage protection. The surge suppression and over-voltage protection devices shall be connected to the fire station earth ground system with a maximum distance to the earth ground connection of fifty feet and a wire size minimum of AWG 8.

C. Earthquake Tolerant Capabilities – The FSCS shall be installed throughout the fire station in a manner that

prevents damage causing movement. D. Apparatus Room Installation Specifications – The FSCS equipment installed in an apparatus room shall be

installed in locations that do not inhibit any normal functions within the apparatus room. All cabling shall be installed in EMT conduit to prevent cable damage.

E. Control And Sense Device Installation Specifications – The control and sense devices shall be installed within

six feet of the controlled device. F. Dispatch Center Equipment – There shall be no equipment in the dispatch center to operate the primary

alerting circuit. The alerting connection shall be from CAD directly to the fire station alerting equipment in the fire station using the fire department’s IP network.

3.02 WARRANTY AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS





A. One-Year Warranty – The FSCS shall come with a one-year parts and labor warranty, including 24/7 telephone technical support for fire department personnel.

B. Extended Warranty – Upon the expiration of the one-year warranty, the fire department shall be offered an

extended warranty for a price to be determined at the expiration of the one-year warranty. C. Maintenance Contract – Upon the expiration of the one-year warranty, the fire department shall be offered an

on-site maintenance contract on the entire FSCS.

3.03 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Westnet First-In Fire Station Alerting and Control Systems or equal.

B. All equipment specified herein shall be a standard product of the manufacturer or approved equal. The Fire Department shall make the final determination of an approved equal.

C. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) years experience in the manufacture of fire station

alerting systems. All equipment specified herein must be equipment that has been manufactured by the manufacturer for a period of not less than fifteen (15) years.

D. The equipment must be capable of multi-agency, wide-area alerting utilizing different CAD vendors and radio

systems. The equipment must be capable of utilizing both IP and radio-based formats.

END OF SECTION



ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 13810 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 14


SECTION 13810 - ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: The energy management system (EMS) including the following major subsystems: HVAC

temperature controls, HVAC automation, and lighting automation. B. Related Sections: 1. 15240 15071 - HVAC - Vibration Isolation. ∆ Addendum #4 2. 15510 - Piping (HVAC). 3. 15515 15060 – Valves, Hangers and Supports. ∆ Addendum #4 4. 15890 15810 - Ductwork. ∆ Addendum #4 5. 15910 15820 - Duct Accessories. ∆ Addendum #4 6. 15990 15955 - Tests (HVAC). ∆ Addendum #4 7. 161556 - Motor Power Starter Group and Control Wiring. ∆ Addendum #4 8. 167221 - Fire Alarm and Detection System. ∆ Addendum #4 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Energy Management System Contractor. B. The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated work of other trades.

Reference the Division 15 Sections for details. C. It is the intent of this specification to describe the performance requirements of the EMS. Five business days prior to

bid, the EMS Contractor shall have submitted a complete Technical Proposal to the DCP. EMS Contractors not supplying this Technical Proposal in compliance with these specifications cannot bid this work.

1. This Technical Proposal shall be to the satisfaction of the DCP. At minimum this submittal shall contain the following documentation which shall become part of the Contract.

2. Statement of Compliance. The Statement of Compliance shall address the Specification, paragraph by paragraph. Identify on a paragraph by paragraph basis, compliance or deviation. For each deviation, detail the means to achieve the intent. For each paragraph, supply and reference factory product documentation to substantiate. The Statement of Compliance shall form part of the EMS Contract.

3. EMS network architecture diagram.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon





4. Product information sheets for each model of EMS product, including software, and feature identified on the EMS network architecture diagram.

5. Specific printed product information detailing the operator workstation hardware and operator interface software.

6. Location of the EMS Contractor’s branch office that would perform warranty work, routine maintenance and 24/7/365 emergency repair services. Provide the phone number that could be used by the Owner for emergency service.

D. The Technical Proposal shall be reviewed with and accepted by the DCP prior to contract execution. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. The EMS Contractor, hereinafter referred to as the Contractor shall provide equipment, installation materials, labor,

and accessories necessary for a complete, integrated, operational system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's literature for proposed equipment, materials, and software showing performance specifications,

dimensions, and installation instructions. B. Submit detailed shop drawings showing proposed equipment locations, control sequences, raceway routing,

grounding requirements, interconnections, and special instructions. Wiring shall be clearly shown with terminations occurring on labeled terminal strips.

C. Submit a list of equipment for which spare parts shall be provided as specified in this section. D. Furnish to electrical contractor wiring diagrams and wire runs specified in Division 16. E. Substantial Completion Submittal Requirements: Upon substantial completion, provide the Board with the following: 1. Record drawings: 6 sets. 2. Record sepias and AutoCAD compatible disk. 3. EMS network diagrams. 4. System operator’s manuals: 6 Sets. 5. Manufacturer's maintenance and repair instructions (6 sets) including troubleshooting instructions and

schematic diagrams for system components. 6. A list of recommended spare parts with current prices at the time of bid submittal. 7. Special tools (2 each) as required to perform maintenance, calibration and repairs. 8. Diagnostics and maintenance software as required to perform maintenance and repairs. 9. Direct connect cables for 1 laptop computer. 10. Spare parts: 10 percent (minimum one unit) of the total installed for the following components: fuses,

temperature sensors, humidity sensors and transducers, plug-in and remote relays, and any other sensors used.





F. The Contractor shall satisfy additional project completion requirements as specified elsewhere. G. Any manufacturer that considers any of the above requirements to be proprietary shall be unacceptable. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Components of the EMS, temperature control, and lighting control systems shall be supplied by one manufacturer. B. Submit proof of having a local office within a 50-mile radius of the job site. This office shall be staffed with factory

trained engineers fully capable of rendering training, instruction, and routine/emergency maintenance service on system components.

C. Submit proof of having a minimum of 5 years successful history in design, installation, and ongoing support of

Facility Management Systems similar in performance and scope as specified. D. Quality Management Program: 1. Provide a competent and experienced EMS Project Manager employed by the EMS Contractor. The Project

Manager shall be supported as necessary by other EMS Contractor employees in order to provide professional management service for the work. The Project Manger shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the EMS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager shall:

a. Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and other resources are available as needed. Manage the financial aspects of the EMS Contract.

b. Coordinate as necessary with other trades. c. Be responsible for the work and actions of the EMS workforce on site. E. EMS Wiring: 1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Energy

Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the EMS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 16 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 16 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.

2. All EMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with EMS manufacturer recommendations. 3. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility

of the EMS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the EMS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.

4. Class 2 Wiring a. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit.





5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.

6. Perform circuit tests using qualified personnel only. Provide complete testing for all cables used under this Contract. Provide all equipment, tools, and personnel as necessary to conduct these tests. 7. Provide for complete grounding of all signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so as to

ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

F. EMS Line Voltage Power Source 1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Energy Management System shall be taken from panelboards and circuit

breakers provided by Division 16. 2. Circuits used for the EMS shall be dedicated to the EMS and shall not be used for any other purposes. 3. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits. G. EMS Raceway 1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”. 2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway (Wiremold) may be used

as approved by the Architect. 3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines and shall

follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Furnish copies to the Board of guarantees for equipment or materials as specified in Instructions to Bidders and

General Conditions. B. Components, parts, and assemblies furnished and installed by the manufacturer's representative or distributor shall be

warranted for 1 year after substantial completion, in writing, against defects in materials and labor. C. The Contractor shall respond to routine warranty service requests by completing repairs within 24 hours of service

request by the Board. D. The Contractor shall respond to emergency warranty service requests with the arrival of service technician at affected

site within 4 hours of notification of emergency. Repairs shall be expedited to bring system online as soon as possible. Emergencies include, but are not limited to failures of controls and any other component causing system failure.

E. If problem is not correctable within specified time frames, the Contractor shall provide in writing an expected

completion date to the Board. F. Inspections at End of Warranty:





1. At the end of the 1 year general warranty period, the Board will decide if the warranty items cited during the course of the warranty period have been completed to the satisfaction of the Board.

2. Meet on-site with M-DCPS Warranty Section before the end of the 1 year warranty period and address unresolved warranty items to the satisfaction of the Board.

1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Provide a 3-year comprehensive service and repair contract to cover the components of the complete system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Energy Management Systems/Components: 1. Delta Controls by South Florida Control. 2. Advanced Controls. 3. Barber Coleman. 4. Siemens. 5. Tran. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. The energy management, HVAC controls, and lighting automation system shall be integrated using direct digital

control (DDC) technology. B. The system provided shall be microprocessor based and include a central control station, a field control station,

standalone field/unitary control processors and all necessary components (software and hardware) for a fully integrated, functional system.

C. Provide equipment with adequate (see Miscellaneous Provisions paragraph in this section) protection from electrical

transients and power line fluctuations. D. Provide equipment with an internal auxiliary power source capable of maintaining the contents of system parameters

stored in volatile memory (eg. RAM memory) for at least 48 hours upon power interruption. E. Provide equipment, software, and instructions necessary for the Board's reprogramming of any system parameters

resident in non-volatile memory (eg. EPROM, EEPROM, magnetic media, etc.). For those systems using custom software programming, instructions and documentation shall be provided.

F. Bidirectional communications (memory loading and storing) between the central control station and field control





processors shall occur via dial-up data communications lines to be provided by the Board. Systems requiring dedicated lines or continuous communications are unacceptable.

G. The Field Control Station and Field/Unitary Control Processors: 1. Interconnected via a multiplex communications trunk. 2. Systems using building power wiring for EMS communications/control are unacceptable. H. Miscellaneous Provisions: Electrical Transient Protection shall be provided for equipment according to the following: 1. Telephone Line: Northern Technologies, Inc., Spokane, WA (1-800-727-9119), Model No.TCS-RJ-11 at the

connection of all equipment to a telephone circuit. 2. Power Line: a. Northern Technologies, Inc. Model TCS-20HW. b. Device shall be installed at equipment to be protected inside a metal enclosure and connected to earth ground with one #6 AWG (minimum) wire in an isolated conduit. 3. Coaxial Lines (if applicable): General Semiconductor Industries, Inc. No.CX12 at each end of coaxial lines

over 20 feet in length. 4. Data Line (for RS232 lines): Northern Technologies, Inc. Model TCS-RS-232C. 5. EMS Control Lines (At each end of the cables): a. For DC lines below 13 VDC Northern Technologies, Inc. Model Dlp-41. b. For DC lines between 13 VDC and 25 VDC, and for AC lines below 16 VAC Northern Technologies,

Inc. Model No.DLP-42. c. For higher voltages, contact Northern Technologies, Inc. for model number. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. The central control station includes but is not limited to: 1. An HP or compatible Pentium 4, 2 GHZ or faster microcomputer equipped with a minimum 40 gigabyte fixed

disk drive, 256 megabyte RAM, one 3-1/2" 1.44 M-byte floppy disk drive, 56KV.90 modem, CD-RW-DVD Drive, current version PC-DOS/ MS-DOS operating system Windows Prof./NT.

2. HP VGA compatible super high resolution 15 inch color monitor (1024 x 768 lines, 256 color, 1 MB, 0.28 DP).

3. System Printer, 80 column, 240 cps. 4. Accessories and software shall accomplish, but not limited to, the following: a. Full color graphics monitoring and command of remote sites. b. Digital and analog data monitoring and command. c. Time and event programming. d. Duty cycle programming. e. Power demand limiting. f. Chiller optimization. g. Optimum start/stop programming.





h. Bidirectional loading/storage of field/unitary control processors' operating system and data file programs.

i. System logs to include but not limited to: Points, Alarms, Trend, Power Demand, Start/Stop, Energy, etc.

j. Auto dial/answer for polling field control processors and responding to alarms. k. Historical database creation and updating of system points for archival purposes and graphic display. B. The field control processor includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. A standalone microprocessor based control unit that: a. Shall not require communications with any other device to execute EMS programs and other

control functions. b. Shall communicate with other EMS devices on a single multiplexed (twisted pair) communications

trunk for remote programming, reporting and alarm annunciation. c. Shall contain software, programs, and parameters resident in the field control processor in

non-volatile memory. 2. A modular, analog input/output panel with provisions for at least 25 percent expandability in analog points. 3. A modular, digital input/output panel with provisions for at least 25 percent expandability in digital points. 4. Sensors, relays, and accessories to accomplish, but not limited to, the following functions: a. Start/stop control of HVAC equipment, ventilation and exhaust fans, and other equipment as

described in the EMS Input/Output summary. b. Modulating control (analog output) of HVAC equipment including: HVAC equipment, pumps, fans

and other equipment as described in the EMS Input/Output summary. c. Positive digital status (on/off) monitoring of HVAC equipment including: Ventilation and exhaust

fans, and other points as described in the EMS Input/ Output summary. d. Analog status monitoring of HVAC system parameters including: HVAC System, outside air

temperature and relative humidity, indoor space temperatures and relative humidity, and other points as described in the EMS Input/Output summary.

e. On/Off, fail-safe control of exterior and common area (cafeteria, auditorium, gymnasium, hallways, etc.) lighting circuits.

f. Two (east and west orientation) photoelectric light level sensor for EMS control of outdoor lighting circuits.

g. Four discrete digital inputs for the following points: Burglar alarm system status (secure/ access) and common alarm, fire alarm system status (normal/trouble) and common alarm.

C. The unitary control processor includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. A standalone microprocessor based control unit. a. Unit shall not require communications with any other device to execute EMS programs and other

control functions. b. Unit shall communicate with other EMS devices on a single multiplexed (twisted pair)





communications trunk for remote programming, reporting and alarm annunciation. c. Software, programs and parameters shall be resident in the unitary control processor in

non-volatile memory. 2. Analog input/output capability for monitoring/control of analog points for a specific HVAC component

indicated on the plans and in the EMS Input/Output Summary. 3. Digital input/output capability for monitoring/control of digital points for a specific HVAC component as

described on the plans and in the EMS Input/Output Summary. 4. Sensors, relays, and accessories to accomplish, but not limited to, the following functions: a. Start/stop control (digital output) of HVAC equipment including: air handling units (AHUs) and

other equipment as described in the EMS input/output summary. b. Modulating control (analog output) of HVAC equipment including: AHUs, fans and other equipment

as described in the EMS input/output summary. c. Positive digital status (on/off) monitoring of HVAC equipment including: AHU fans, heaters,

ventilation and exhaust fans, and other points as described in the EMS Input/Output summary. d. Analog status monitoring of HVAC system parameters including: Indoor space temperatures and

relative humidity, duct supply and return air temperatures, and other points as described in the EMS Input/Output Summary.

D. The field control station includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. On-line communications with field control processors and unitary control processors. 2. Accessories and software to accomplish but not limited to the following functions: a. Digital and analog data monitoring. b. Digital and analog command. c. Time and event programming. d. Duty cycle programming. e. Power demand limiting. f. Chiller optimization. g. Optimum start/stop programming. h. System Logs include but are not limited to: Points, Alarms, Trend, Power Demand, Start/Stop,

Energy, etc. i. Holiday scheduling and programming (with at least one year advance holiday calendar). j. Daylight-saving time preprogramming. k. Auto dial/answer for polling of field control processors from central control station and for

responding to alarms. l. Critical alarm (user definable) annunciation and processing. 3. The field control station shall be a portable device that can be disconnected when not in use, without

affecting EMS operation. E. EMS Panel Enclosures: Constructed of 20 gage steel. Equip panel doors with locks and transparent windows for





viewing displays. F. Provide energy control stations for use by authorized on-site staff to temporarily energize HVAC and lighting loads

controlled by the EMS. The stations shall have the following features: 1. Provide momentary push buttons for temporary activation of designated loads and pilot light indication of

their status. 2. Include in the stations a site diagram identifying the temporary override zones with their corresponding

button and pilot light. 3. Provide a key switch (with 6 keys) to enable/disable the override stations push buttons. Key is to be

removable in the "disabled" position only. 4. Provide digital displays for outdoor air temperature and office air temperature. G. Input Devices 1. Air Low Differential Pressure Switch a. Rating: NEMA 1 b. Mounting: Duct Insertion c. Range: 0.05” to 5.0” WC, complete with field adjustable setpoint. d. Protection: Overpressure to 1 PSIG e. Output: Form C Contact, minimum 50VA f. Special: Automatic reset, provide complete installation kit including static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filters. 2. Air Low Differential Pressure Sensor a. Rating: NEMA 1 b. Mounting: Duct Insertion c. Range: 0.05” to 5.0” WC, d. Protection: Overpressure to 1 PSIG e. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA f. Special: Provide complete installation kit including static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air

filters. 3. Air High Differential Pressure Switch a. Rating: NEMA 1 b. Mounting: Duct Insertion c. Range: 1” to 10” WC, complete with field adjustable setpoint. d. Protection: Overpressure to 1 PSIG e. Output: 2 Form C Contacts, minimum 360VA f. Special: Manual reset, provide complete installation kit including static pressure tips, tubing,

fittings, and air filters. 4. Temperature Sensors





a. Materials: Nickel or platinum element b. Mounting: Duct/Pipe, Room c. Range: -50ºF to 250ºF, 55ºF to 85ºF d. Room Sensors for Terminal Units: shall include warmer/cooler slidebar adjustment and pushbutton

for occupied/unoccupied override e. Accuracy: 0.1% f. Output: Resistive 1000ohms @ 70ºF/1000ohms @ 32ºF g. Special: Duct Element Holder, Brass Well Assembly, Room Mounting Bracket and Cover. 6. Humidity Sensors a. Materials: Polymer b. Rating: class 2 c. Mounting: Duct or Wall d. Range: 20% to 80% e. Accuracy: +/-3% f. Protection: 0-100% non-condensing g. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA h. Special: Duct or Wall Mounting Kit 7. Air Flow Switch 8. Current Switch a. Materials: Encased copper b. Rating: 600vAC c. Mounting: Split Core d. Range: 1.5amps to 50 amps e. Action: Trip point adjustment f. Output: SPST, N.O. g. Special: Status LED 9. Current Transducer a. Mounting: Field Mounted b. Range: 60 Hz nominal c. Accuracy: +/- 2% full scale d. Protection: 250 A max current e. Output: 4-20mA 10. Static Pressure Transducer a. Rating: NEMA 1 b. Mounting: Duct Insertion, Pipe Insertion c. Range: 0-25 in. water column unidirectional, 0- +/- 5 in. water column bi-directional.





d. Accuracy: +/- 1% full scale e. Protection: 10 PSIG f. Output: 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VD 11. Differential Pressure Transducer a. Rating: NEMA 1 b. Mounting: Duct Insertion, Pipe Insertion c. Range: 0-25 in. water column unidirectional, 0- +/- 5 in. water column bi-directional d. Accuracy: +/- 1% full scale e. Protection: 10 PSIG f. Output: 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC 12. Air Flow Monitoring a. Materials: PVC/ABS b. Rating: 350FPM to 9,000FPM c. Mounting: Duct d. Accuracy: +/- 5% e. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA 13. End Switches 14. Low Temperature Switches 15. High Temperature Switches 16. Thermostats 17. Carbon Monoxide Sensors a. Materials: Metal Oxide Semiconductor b. Rating: 5000 sq feet c. Mounting: Duct and wall mount d. Range: 0 to 200ppm e. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA 18. Carbon Dioxide Sensors a. Materials: Molded plastic enclosure b. Rating: 0 to 5000ppm c. Mounting: Duct or Wall d. Range: 0 to 2000ppm / 0-5000 User selectable e. Accuracy: +/- 50ppm f. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA H. Output Devices 1. Electric / Pneumatic Transducers 2. Control Relays a. Materials: Gold Flash





b. Rating: 10 amps @ 120-277vAC c. Mounting: Standard Electrical Box d. Protection: NEMA 1 Housing e. Output: SPDT, DPDT f. Controlled Devices g. Electric Damper Actuators. h. Rating: NEMA 2 Enclosure i. Mounting: Direct mount j. Stroke: 90 seconds end to end full stroke, 15 seconds return to normal for spring return k. Protection: Electronic stall protection l. Control Input: 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mADC m. Power: Nominal 24 VAC n. Torque: Size for minimum 150% of required duty o. Duty cycle: rated for 65,000 cycles p. Special: field selectable rotational / spring return direction, field adjustable zero and span. 3. Smoke Dampers I. HVAC Input Devices – General 1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation 2. Locate components of the FMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible. 3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps, airflow

stations, etc. 4. Outside Air Sensors a. Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a

continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately. b. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. 5. Duct Temperature Sensors: a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and be positioned

so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. b. The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut

and mounting plate. c. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature stratification exists

such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor. d. The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element holders. 6. Space Sensors: a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements. b. Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on the plans.





J. HVAC Output Devices 1. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation. The mechanical contractor

shall install all in-line devices such as control valves, dampers, air flow stations, pressure wells, etc. 2. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum system shut-off

pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing.

3. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications.

4. Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers: Whenever an analog output signal from the Facility Management System is to be connected to an external control system as an input (such as a chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input a signal from a remote system, provide a signal isolation transducer. Signal isolation transducer shall provide ground plane isolation between systems. Signals shall provide optical isolation between systems

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the EMS according to the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and standards. The 2007 Florida

Building Code. B. The EMS checkout and testing procedures shall include tests for short circuits, ground faults, and continuity of wiring

and components. C. Final connections and operational tests of EMS equipment shall be performed by a certified, factory trained technician

employed by or under the direct supervision of the equipment manufacturer. D. EMS wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and diagrams. EMS wiring shall be

installed in conduit. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for selection of proper control valves including line sizes, pressure rating, flow

coefficient, shutoff rating, and allowable leakage factor. F. Control valves and wells shall be provided by the Contractor for installation under Division 15 (Mechanical Provisions)

of this specification. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following: 1. Provide one 1/2" conduit with pull string from the field control panel to the main Southern Bell cable entry to





the building. 2. Provide access to the field control panels for telephone company installation personnel. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Constant Volume Air Handling Units: 1. AHU shall be energized from the unitary control processor (UCP). 2. Differential pressure and supply and return air temperature sensors shall provide feedback to the UCP. 3. Upon activation of either supply or return air smoke detectors the fan motor shall de-energize. 4. In addition, the fan motor shall be electrically interlocked with the fire alarm system. 5. Cooling Mode: As the return air temperature rises to the programmed setpoint the UPC shall, under direct

digital control, modulate the face damper open and operate the 3-way, 2-position chilled water valve fully open.

6. Heating Mode (if so equipped): Change-over from cooling to heating shall occur automatically and with a deadband between modes. As the return air temperature falls to the programmed setpoint the EMS shall, under direct digital control, energize the electric duct heaters sequentially, in steps.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. The Contractor shall provide training of the Board's representatives in the operation, programming, maintenance, and

repair of the system and its components. B. Training shall be scheduled at the Board's discretion within ninety days of substantial completion. C. On-site instruction (at each remote site) shall consist of at least 8 hours of training on system operation and

programming. D. Central control station instruction shall consist of at least 40 hours of training of system operation, programming,

maintenance, and repair. E. Training shall be conducted by a qualified manufacturer's representative.

END OF SECTION



Header has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4

INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM 13845

Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc.

RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 5

Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 13845 – INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: A complete, operable, tested intrusion detection system, bearing Underwriters Laboratories

(UL) mercantile listing and including raceway system and cables. All programming shall be by the Contractor

with assistance from an Owner Representative.


1. 09900 - Painting.

2. 16112 - Raceways and Conduits.

3. 16131 - Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Significant System Components and Procedures:

1. Contacts for every exterior door including roof accesses.

2. Motion detectors.

3. Intrusion control panels.

4. Power supply. 5. Extended zone modules.

6. Keypads.

7. Raceway and junction box system.

8. Testing.

9. Record drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature and technical data before starting work.

B. Shop Drawings: Include manufacturer's catalog cuts, data sheets, and riser and wiring diagrams with standard

symbols for each component used.

C. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following with the required shop drawings and manufacturer's literature

and data.

1. Load calculations for battery backup and system components.

2. Programming schedule sheet with zone descriptions. 3. Warranty:

a. Letter from authorized manufacturer's representative addressed to the Board, stating

compliance to warranty requirements.

b. Submit 5 copies of warranty to be provided.

D. Closeout Submittals: Record drawings and warranties.









A. Items and Components: UL listed meeting the latest editions of standards 603, 609, 634, 639, 1076, and 1610.

B. Install wiring according to National Electrical Code - 2005 (NEC).

C. Shunt switches are not allowed.

D. System shall be hardwired in its entirety.

E. In terminal cabinets, use screw-on terminal strips for power and signal cable splices.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide full manufacturer's published standard warranty for parts and components.

B. Provide 1 year full maintenance (parts, wiring, and labor) provided by Contractor or manufacturer's authorized

representative from date of substantial completion.

C. Provide warranty response information inside alarm system control panel.

D. Warranty shall allow the Owner to repair vandalized areas without voiding the total system warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Door Contacts:

1. Side Hinged Doors: Recessed magnetic switch, Model 1078W as manufactured by Sentrol, Inc. or

accepted equivalent, complete with necessary mounting accessories for installation in closed circuit

alarm systems.

2. Hinged Roof Access: Magnetic switch, Model 1085W as manufactured by Sentrol, Inc. accepted

equivalent. Provide 2 mounting spacers and matching cover plate, for closed circuit alarm systems.

3. Roll-Up Overhead Doors: Magnetic switch, No.[2205A] [2505A] [2515A] by Sentrol or accepted equivalent, complete with necessary mounting accessories for installation in closed circuit alarm

systems.

B. Cable: Belden No.8740 (2 conductor), No.8443 (3 conductor), No.9794 (4 conductor), or accepted equivalent.

1. Conductors for Monitoring Devices: Minimum 22 gage AWG stranded, unshielded cable with vinyl

plastic insulation, color-coded.

2. UL listed, NEC type CM or CL3, UL standard 13 and 444.

3. Comply with UL 1581 flame test.








4. Power Conductor for Motion Detectors, EZMs, and Keypads: CL-2 or CL-3, jacketed, minimum 18 gage

stranded wire.

5. Power Conductor for Battery: Minimum 18 gage stranded wire. 6. Underground cable shall be for wet locations according to NEC.

C. Motion Detectors: Dual technology (PIR/microwave) motion detector sensors.

1. Recessed Ceiling Mount:

a. Model 2T360 by Sentrol Inc., Tualatin, OR.

b. Model DS9360 by Simplex.

c. Accepted equivalent.

2. Wall Mount: a. Models 2T40, 2T70, or 2T100 by Sentrol.

b. Models DS720, DS860, DS950, RDS97 by Simplex.

c. Accepted equivalent.

D. Intrusion Control Panels:

1. Manufacturers:

a. NAPCO MA 3000 (96 zones).

b. Simplex DS7400Xi.

2. Provide mandatory UL Mercantile listing with tamperproof provisions.

3. Indicate location on riser diagram.

4. Install panels with centerline at 5'-0" above finish floor.

E. Panel Batteries:

1. Provide two 7 amp batteries in parallel in the panel.

F. Remote Power Supplies: 1. Supervised for low battery failure and power supply failure.

2. Show locations on riser diagram.

G. Zone Expansion Modules/Expansion Zone Modules (EZM):

1. Remotely located in a distributed fashion to minimize raceway and wiring.

2. Powered from the intrusion control panel.

3. Power supply load shall not exceed 85 percent of the maximum load.

4. Mount EZM's in a hinged door junction box with a fire retardant painted plywood backboard inside the box, 10" x 10" x 4" minimum size.

5. Install EZM cabinets with centerline at 5'-0" above finish floor.

6. Install power supplies between 6"-0" to 8'-0" above finish floor.

7. List EZM's location numbers inside and outside the junction boxes and on riser diagram.

8. Do not use the keypad as a zone expander.

H. Miscellaneous: Refer to Section 16112 for products also required for installation under this section.








PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of

the Work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring, conduit, boxes, and the like required for a complete system according to manufacturer's

instructions and approved submittals.

B. System equipment and wiring installation shall be by the properly licensed company, either the original

equipment manufacturer or the factory distributor for the brand of equipment used. Furnish wiring diagrams and wire runs for the raceway system installed by the licensed electrical contractor, under Division 16.

C. Provide door contacts and related devices at exterior doors, roof scuttles, and interior doors to spaces indicated

on Drawings. Rooms with interior corridor access and motion detectors do not require door contacts.

1. Hinged Door Contacts: A maximum of 4 associated door contacts may be grouped in a zone. Provide

independent wiring to each switch from a junction box located next to the expansion zone module (E.M.)

before converting to a zone.

a. Side Hinged Doors:

1) Install recessed switch components in spaces in both door and head jamb prepared by the door and frame manufacturer.

2) Set magnet into top of door with accepted silicone sealant.

b. Hinged Roof Access: Mount on inside face of access housing according to switch

manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Motion Detectors:

a. Provide motion detectors in each area with windows, fixed glass, or glass block to the exterior and any room with vision panels, regardless of the location or function.

b. Provide motion detectors at exterior accessed storage rooms.

c. Provide individual zones for each motion detector.

d. Motion detectors shall have their own power supply and not be fed from the security panel.

e. Locate ceiling mounted motion detectors at least 5 feet away from A/C supply registers and at

least 10 feet from windows.

3. Wiring:








a. Install wiring in metallic conduit from door head switch through door lintel construction to

adjacent junction box.

b. Connection between top of sheet metal sleeve in head jamb section and conduit in door lintel construction to adjacent junction box need not be solid but sheet metal sleeve and conduit

shall be in alignment with each other.

c. Provide EOL resistor and indicate location on drawings

d. A maximum of 4 associated door switches may be grouped in a zone. Provide independent

wiring to each switch from a junction box located next to the expansion zone module (E.M.)

before converting to a zone.

e. Splices in main cabinets and sub panels shall be on terminal strips.

4. Bonding and Grounding: Provide as required by the latest edition of the NEC. 5. Conductor Identification: Identify each pair of conductors, each contact in each panel, and at loose wire

terminations.

6. Cable Slack:

a. Terminate cables with enough slack, each duly tagged for future connections by the Owner.

D. At security cabinets, provide 3/4" plywood backboard with fire retardant paint.

E. Connect fire alarm system to the 2 separate lines.


A. Before testing the intrusion detection system transmission from the project site to the central control station,

coordinate with the Owner and A/E.

B. Site Test:

1. Check and test installation for shorts, grounds, circuit continuity, and minimum 12 volts readings at all motion detectors.

2. Cables: Test free from opens, grounds, or crosses (shorts) between conductors.

3. Walk-test doors and motion detectors for proper function and operation. Ensure proper zoning of

devices.

4. Test all functions on intrusion control panels for proper functions and operations.

5. Check for proper standby battery backup in intrusion panels and remote power supplies.

6. Verify remote power supplies are UL 603 listed for burglary systems.

7. Inspect and test cabinet tampers on intrusion cabinets. 8. Verify raceway cover is properly painted blue.

END OF SECTION

CITY OF MIAMI DEPARTMENT OF FIRE-RESCUE FIRESTATION No. 13


CARD ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 13851 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 8


SECTION 13851 – CARD ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A Section Includes: A complete, operable, tested, integrated proximity access control system, to operate on a

proximity principle where card insertion into a reading device is not required and will also be capable to function as an alarm and contact monitoring system.

B. Related Sections: 1. 08710 - Finish Door Hardware. ∆ Addendum #4 2. 13845 - Intrusion Detection System. 3. 16112 - Raceways and Conduits. 4. 16120 - Wire and Cable. 5. 16131 - Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes. 6. 16450 - Grounding. 7. 16721 - Fire Alarm and Detection System. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. One designated door at each of the following locations shall be controlled by a card reader: 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit riser and connection diagrams, schedules showing location and function of each device, and

specification data sheets. 2. Supply a proposed acceptance test procedure. 3. Submittals showing typical riser diagrams and specification data sheets are not acceptable. 4. Submit Six (6) copies each. 5. Indicate card access locations on plans. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system supplier shall have a minimum of 5 years system design, engineering supervision, and installation

experience in the alarm or access control industry. B. The Contractor shall provide a factory-trained technician to assist and advise installing personnel. Final

connections shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

sys1

Polygon





1.05 WARRANTY A. The entire installation, except access cards, shall carry a 2-year guarantee after acceptance of the system by the

Owner. B. Access Card: 5 year warranty, all inclusive, for deterioration with age or damage due to reasonable flexing. C. Contractor shall guarantee all devices against defects in material or quality of construction. D. Electrical Contractor shall guarantee conduit, wire, and electrical installation labor for 2 years. E. Allied trades shall guarantee installation, material, and labor provided under this section of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Card Access Control Systems: 1. Checkpoint. 2. Simplex. 3. Westinghouse Security Electronics. 4. Owner acceptable Manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical transient protection according to manufacturer's requirements. B. Include all necessary tools, equipment, material, and labor to furnish, install, and verify correct operation. C. The system shall consist of a central command center, UPS system, microprocessor based terminal controllers,

input/output boards as required, proximity card readers, magnetic door position monitor contacts, and door strikes as required.

D. Provide a modem according to manufacturers requirements. E. Provide a dedicated UPS system to provide backup power for the card access control headend. F. Remote power supplies for terminal controllers, magnetic locks, and door strikes connected to the card access

system shall be provided with battery backup capacity to maintain complete system operation for 24 hours and be supervised for power failure.

2.03 EQUIPMENT





A. Human Interface: 1. The system shall be capable of supporting a local or remote command center (terminal and printer). The

interface is enabled by a menu-driven full text character set. This device shall be any industry standard ASCII terminal with a serial output. The human interface must accept as a minimum, a user-defined auto-logoff routine selectable from 0 to 240 minutes. This function shall be provided by the system controller.

B. Network Components: 1. The distributed architecture requires the interface of various intelligent controllers. These controllers

shall have operating environments to allow complete functionality at a temperature range of 0 to 50 degrees C and a relative humidity of 90 percent (non-condensing).

C. System Controller: 1. The System Controller shall be microprocessor-based with onboard time and data generation and

battery to allow a minimum of 48 hours data integrity. This device shall be responsible for maintaining the data communications between the terminal controllers attached and the ASCII terminal.

2. This device shall maintain the operating system parameters to include the definitions of, but not limited to, the following:

a. Doors. b. Inputs. c. Outputs. d. Access Levels. e. Time Zones. f. Users. g. Operators. h. Dial-up communications. i. Auto Log-Off. j. Classify Events. 3. The definitions of these parameters shall be in full English text. Abbreviated text or code shall not be

acceptable. D. Terminal Controller: 1. The terminal controller shall be microprocessor based with onboard time date generation and battery to

allow a minimum of 48 hours of data integrity. This device shall be responsible for all access control decision and alarm monitoring detection in the system.

2. It shall also be responsible for all output responses to alarm detection and create the appropriate response through its processor logic. This controller shall be capable of maintaining a buffer of a minimum of 2800 event transactions when communication is lost with the system controller.

3. System shall work with fail-safe and fail-secure locking hardware. 4. The terminal controller shall have all necessary provisions to implement access control for 2 doors. The

capacity shall be present for 2 door contacts, to request to exit devices and 2 door strike outputs. These





strike outputs shall control locking power and are to be rated at a minimum of 1 amp at 24 VDC or 0.5 amps at 120 VAC. Strike outputs that only supply voltage are unacceptable. These devices shall be connected to the terminal controllers through snap-in Buchanan type plugs. These controllers shall be labeled to insure the correct wire coding is followed and the appropriate devices are wired in the correct locations.

5. The terminal controllers shall provide additional alarm points and outputs. The contacts shall be voltage-free Form "C" while the monitor points shall provide 4 conditions of status, normal, abnormal, cut, and short. There shall be 2 of each type of point available per controller and expanded to a capacity of 16 alarm points and 16 outputs total through use of an alarm interface module.

E. I/O Expansion Board: 1. The system shall provide the interface of the I/O Board to be directly interfaced to any terminal

controllers for a total of eight (128 inputs/128 outputs) in the system. Equipment supplied that requires alarm monitoring devices having their own address and take away from the systems total reader or address capacity is not acceptable.

2. The I/O board shall be logic driven by the connected terminal controller and allow the alarm points and output control specified above. These abilities shall exist whether the terminal controller is on-line or off line to the system controller.

3. Each of the 14 alarm points shall have supervision capabilities and shall allow a 500 foot, 22 gauge wire run to each alarm device.

4. Each of the 14 control outputs shall be single pole, double throw (SPDT) Form C relays. These devices shall be rated for 1 amp at 24VDC or 0.5 amps at 120VAC. All outputs shall be made to allow for any of the following states to be programmed. Outputs shall be configured to close momentarily or set to follow the state of the corresponding inputs. These states shall also work with outputs being managed under time zones.

F. Network Wiring: 1. The communications network shall be made up of a primary and secondary bus. The communications

protocol used shall be RS485. Networks using 20 mil current loop or RS232 will not be acceptable. The secondary bus shall use a dual twisted pair, Beldon #8723 (22 AWG) cable and be capable of a distance of 4000 feet, total wire. This network shall be wired in any configuration needed.

2. Reader cabling shall use a 5-conductor West Penn #3280 (18 AWG) overall shield. Readers requiring coaxial cable will not be acceptable. A reader shall be wired a minimum of 500 feet without wire size change. Readers requiring a wire size change or special adapters to drive signal this distance are not acceptable.

G. The system communications shall be supervised for integrity. If communications are detected as failed, the

system shall report the loss and automatically enable the buffer of the non-communicating terminal controller(s) in the network. A system that does not buffer event information upon lost communications is not acceptable.

H. Proximity Card Readers: 1. The proximity card reading sensor shall be a sealed unit with no moving parts that connects to the





terminal controller via a 5-conductor cable. a. It shall detect the coded information in the access cards and send the information to the

terminal controller for processing. b. As a minimum, it shall detect access card codes when a card is within 2 inches of its surface. 2. The reader design shall allow operation behind nonmetallic surfaces and to be surface mounted on

virtually any surface (including glass) without requiring cutouts or mounting bolts. 3. Any reader may be used in a normal mode or anti-passback mode without changes to the reader. 4. The readers shall be designed to operate properly within the temperature range of -50 degrees F. to

+180 degrees F. (-45 degrees C. to 82 degrees C.) and within a relative humidity range of 0 to 100 percent.

5. No special housing nor treatment shall be required for outdoor use. 6. Unit shall be water and vandal resistant. 7. Physical damage including breaking open of the reader housing shall not allow a perpetrator access to

any circuitry that would allow the system to be compromised. Transmission of any frequency or set of frequencies into the sensor at any power level shall not compromise the system.

8. Presentation of an invalid set of frequencies (such as would occur if a perpetrator were attempting to "pick" the system) shall temporarily disable the reader, thus eliminating the possibility of "sweeping" the system and finding a valid combination.

I. Access Cards: 1. The access card shall be credit card size, not deteriorate with age, and shall be capable of reasonable

flexing without damage. 2. Twenty access cards shall be supplied with the system. Each card shall be encoded with a code that is

different from all other system codes. Supply the Board a list of all access codes for programming into memory.

J. Related Door Hardware Requirements: 1. Electro-magnetic lock: Locknetics Series 390, 24VDC conductors to jamb header. Belden 8461, 18

gage, stranded. 2. Medeco cylinder No.10-04005-10 installed at secondary means of egresses. 3. Electro-magnetic locks, exit devices, power supplies, and Medeco cylinders shall be provided by door

hardware supplier and wired under this section. 4. Emergency manual release device: See Life Safety Code S-21.62-C 5. Motion sensor. 6. Electric hinge. K. The system and terminal controller and local modem will be enclosed in a metal cabinet with a door hinged on

the side with key lock. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION





A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of

the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and inform other trades of locations of all pieces of equipment to be installed under this section for

proper functional interface with other equipment or hardware to avoid any interference or delay in the progress of the work.

B. Conduit and wiring installation shall be according to Sections 01043, 16112, and other parts of this Section. C. In case of discrepancies, consult with A/E before proceeding with the work. Failure to comply will make the

Contractor responsible for any cost involved in the proper execution of the work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. System equipment and wiring installation shall be by the properly licensed company, either the original

equipment manufacturer or the factory distributor for the brand of equipment used. Furnish wiring diagrams and wire runs for the raceway system installed by the licensed electrical contractor, under Division 16.

B. Install door control cabinet with centerline at 5'-0" above finish floor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation, the system shall be under complete control of DCOM and perform system controls as specified

without the services of the manufacturer. B. The following is a list of minimum acceptable DCOM initiated management functions: 1. Add cards to memory with ability to define where and when the cardholder may use the card. On a door-

by-door basis, valid access times shall be definable. 2. Group load cards with the same access control privileges using any reader. 3. Delete access cards from memory. 4. Modify access control privileges of individual cards. 5. Define certain cards as "night" (privileged) cards allowing access to "night" readers when the alarm

system is in the "night" mode. 6. Define primary and alternate facility code for cards. 7. Define the system configuration data (i.e., which doors are active IN and OUT doors, relationship of

doors and contact points, etc.). 8. Define which doors will have request-to-exit (alarm shunt) implemented. 9. Define which monitored doors will alarm when "forced" open and during what time such alarms will take





place. 10. Select card controlled areas that are to operate in an anti-passback mode and whether contact closure is

required to change anti-passback status. 11. Manually unlock locks from the terminal. 12. Define up to 15 access codes (groups of doors with up to 4 time codes associated with each door). 13. Define up to 32 holidays. 14. Automatically unlock and relock selected locks by time code. 15. Define which readers are "night" mode (Building Closed) sensors. 16. Define which readers are "switch" sensors that can enable or disable the "night" mode of operation (i.e.

enable and disable the alarm system). 17. Select sensors that will generate an alert message when cardcodes selected for traces are used. 18. Obtain hard copy listings of cardcodes by any combination of access code, time period, location (IN or

OUT), privileged (night mode), and trace status. 19. Obtain hard copy listings of the definitions of any door sensor or monitor point. 20. Obtain hard copy listings of each report type. Define pass-codes and up to 6 levels of access for

operator entry into system command mode. 21. Obtain hard copy report of current system status. 22. Select access and monitor point activity messages that are output to the system printer. 23. Determine if valid access reporting is required only at certain hours of the day and week for selected

sensors. 24. Acknowledge alarm conditions. 25. Select which monitor points are to be monitored at all times and which are monitored only during

selected time periods. 26. Select which doors and monitor points will actuate output contacts. 27. Select which monitor points are to generate a latched alarm and which are to report for information

purposes only. 28. Define under what circumstances the system will "dial up" and report to DCOM. 29. Define up to 4 telephone numbers for dial-up use. 30. Define how many attempts (up to 10) will be made to communicate via dial-up. 31. Define when the system will report that building closure is overdue. 32. Define a 24-character name for each monitor point. 33. Define a 12-character name for each sensor. 34. Define a 12-character name for each employee. 35. Define a 12-character name for each operator. 36. Select card controlled areas that are to be monitored for "Forced" and "Door Held Open" alarms, and

whether such alarms will be generated at all times or only when system is in "night" mode. C. All system activity messages to the operator shall be printed in plain language, English text. Mnemonic type, or

transaction-code type operator messages are not acceptable. D. A complete operator's manual shall also be supplied. 1. The system shall use passwords. A password must be used by an operator to gain access to system

commands. Each password shall be assigned to one of 6 command levels. A command level is a set or subset, of all system commands. It shall be possible to define up to 8 passwords.





E. Central console equipment necessary for full system operation shall be furnished as part of the initial installation. F. A final test before substantial completion shall be performed by the Contractor. G. After substantial completion, Contractor shall provide complete detailed Record Drawings (6 sets), written operation instructions and manuals. H. Wiring Requirements: All wiring incidental to the protection system shall be provided by the low voltage electrical

contractor. Detailed wiring diagrams and necessary job site supervision shall be provided by the low voltage electrical contractor. The term "wiring" shall include furnishing of wire, conduits, miscellaneous materials and labor as required for connecting the system equipment.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Training: Conduct a minimum one day course for system operators and users.

END OF SECTION




FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 13900




SECTION 13900 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications, submit Manufacturer’s data for review on

the following before any work is commenced:

1. Valves and Appurtenances

2. Supervisory and Flow Switches 3. Pipe Hangers and Supports

4. Piping

5. Fire Valve Cabinets

6. Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets

7. Sprinkler Heads

8. 1/8" Scale Drawings of Sprinkler Head Layout

1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Section 13910 - Fire Protection Pipe and Pipe Fittings.

B. Division 16 - Electrical Service, Wiring and Devices.

C. Division 16 - Electrical Fire Alarms and Panels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All fire protection equipment and devices shall be

1. Listed by U.L. and/or Factory Mutual for service intended.

2. All equipment shall be installed in conformance with standards of National Fire Protection Association,

State Codes and within any restriction or limitations of the U.L. Listing.

3. Manufacturers shall be Elkhart, Seco, Allen Manufacturing Company, or Coker Standard.

4. Submit shop drawings.

2.02 VALVES

A. Gate:

1. 2-inch and Smaller: O.S.&Y threaded bronze, rising stem 175 psi WWP Class, U.L. listed and F.M.

approved; Walworth 873, Stockham B-133, Jenkins 175-U.

2. 2½-inch and Larger: O.S.&Y flanged IBBM rising stem, solid wedge disc, 175 WWP class, flanged, U.L.

listed and F.M. approved; Walworth 713 F, Stockham G634, Jenkins 825-A.








B. Check: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Threaded bronze swing type, 200 psi w.o.g class; Walworth 406, Stockham B-319,

Jenkins 92-A.

2. 2½-inch and Larger: Fanged IBBM swing type, bronze mounted 175 WWP class; Walworth 883-F,

Stockham G939, Jenkins 629.

3. Silent Type: Flanged cast iron or steel body, bronze trim, double center guided spring, of proper spring

rating; 175 psi w.o.g. a. 2-inch and Smaller: Threaded end. Mueller 203-AP, Williams Gauge Company.

b. 2½-inch and Larger: Flanged end. Mueller 105-AP, Williams Gauge Company.

C. Special Valves:

1. Globe Valves: Bronze body and disc, union bonnet, 150 psi w.o.g. threaded ends. Stockham B-22,

Crane 7, Jenkins 106-A.

2. Alarm Check Valve: Flanged IBBM variable pressure. Vertical alarm check with retarding chamber,

alarm switches to actuate local alarm and alarm panel, and required accessories, drains, valves, gages

and testing apparatus. Similar to Central Model F, Grinnell. 3. Post indicator valve with tamper switch Grinnell No. F752 Vertical.

4. Free standing fire department connection Potter-Roemer, Inc., Series 5760-UL.

2.03 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES

A. 120 Volt closed circuit supervisory tamper switch, Grinnell f-640, Acme, Notifier Company.

2.04 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Chromium plated steel or chromium steel brass, either one piece or split pattern.

2.05 FLOW SWITCH

A. Paddle type, single pole, double throw with adjustment for sensitivity to flow, wetted parts or brass and monel,

with time delay. Switch shall be of vapor proof construction, 175 psi working pressure and 225̊F temperature.

Grinnell F-602, Viking, or Simplex.

2.06 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Automatic, cast brass closed fusible link-spray type, ordinary degree temperature rating, 135̊F to 170̊F.








B. Sprinkler head shall be: 1. Upright Head on Exposed Piping in Unfinished Areas: Standard bronze finish. Central Model A, center

strut, wedgeable.

2. Concealed Pendent Heads in Areas of Hung Ceilings: Concealed chrome plated pendent head with

ceiling cover plate. Central Model A, Center Strut, wedgeable.

3. Provide one metal cabinet with twelve extra automatic sprinkler heads in cabinet, with a proportionate

quantity of each temperature range type as installed in the new work. Provide two sprinkler wrenches

and water flow stoppers (suitable for interrupting the sprinkler head discharge) with each sprinkler head

cabinet one of the water flow stoppers is to be of the short type and the other to have a long handle. The extra sprinklers within the spare parts cabinet are in addition to the contract quantity.

C. Heads subject to abnormal heating conditions close to heaters, etc., shall be of temperature rating high enough

to prevent accidental discharge when no fire is present.

D. Manufacturers: Viking, Grinnell, Automatic Sprinkler, Central.

2.07 CABINETS

A. As specified by Architect.

2.08 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. As specified by Architect.

2.09 PIPE SUPPORTS

SIZE OF PIPE HANGING RODS ROD DIAMETERS

Up to 2" size pipe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3/8"

2 1/2" to 3" size pipe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --1/2"

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Arrangement and location of Fire Protection System shall be as indicated on drawings and subject to Contractor’s

submittals.

B. Detailed drawings of proposed departures due to actual field conditions shall be submitted to the Project

Consultant for review.

C. Materials installed in fire sprinkler system shall be suitable for pressures and temperatures encountered. Installation shall be as required by NFPA and as specified.








D. Coordination of Drawings: Because of small scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. Contractor shall carefully investigate structure and all other trades involved

including finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such

fittings, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions at no additional cost.

E. Cutting and Repairing: The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and no excessive cutting of construction

will be permitted, damage to buildings, piping, wiring or equipment as a result of cutting for installation shall be

repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved, at no additional cost.

F. Protection of Materials and Equipment: Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.

Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical

injury. Upon completion of all work, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and

operated.

3.02 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Fit and firmly secure escutcheons to pipes passing through finished floors, ceilings and walls; escutcheons of

sufficient outside diameter to cover sleeved openings and set in fire retardant mastic.

3.03 MONITOR SWITCH

A. Sprinkler valves shall be provided with tamper indicators monitored at the central control station. Mount in strict

accordance with manufacture’s recommendations and limitations.

3.04 FLOW SWITCHES

A. Provide water flow switches at sprinkler main branches wired to alarm panel by Electrical Contractor. Switch

mounting fitting shall be the same size as pipe where installed. Mount in strict accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations and limitations.

3.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide adjustable hangers as required for proper support of all pipe lines, in accordance with requirements of

NFPA Standard No. 13. Hangers to allow for expansion and contraction of pipe lines. Hangers to be wrought iron

clevis type.

B. Piping - Support in hangers attached to rods suspended from concrete inserts:

1. Hangers for pipes less than 4" in diameter may be hung from inserts installed by power-actuated

fasteners.

2. Hangers for pipes 4" in diameter and larger must be installed using self-drilling concrete expansion

anchors.

3. Power activated fasteners and devices are not permitted where structural system is pre-tensioned or

post-tensioned reinforced concrete.








4. Contractor must submit shop drawings of proposed fastening devices for review by Project Consultant

prior to commencement of the work. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications.

C. Single pipe runs - support with adjustable swivel ring hangers.

D. Risers - Support by attachment direct to riser or by hangers located on horizontal connections close to riser, and

at every floor using riser clamps.

E. Piping supported from walls or columns - use welded steel brackets, and adjustable swivel ring hanger.

3.06 DESIGN OF WET PIPE SYSTEM

A. Provide Fire Protection System for the areas shown in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 101 requirements.

1. Light Hazard, 0.10 GPM/ Ft²

2. Ordinary Hazard Group I, 0.15 GPM/Ft² over the most remote 1,500 Ft² area of operation in compliance

with NFPA 13, and Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 2-8N.

B. Sprinkler head arrangement shall be carefully planned, symmetrically laid out, fully coordinated with partitions, columns and beams, lighting fixtures, ceiling diffusers and grilles and lay-in ceiling patterns.

C. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings for review.

D. Provide inspectors test valve, sight glass, drain, etc.

E. Pitch piping to provide complete and ready drainage of system with mains pitched back to control valve, and

branches and drip pitched to automatic ball drip drains, where feasible, (slope 1/2" / 10').

3.07 SPRINKLER SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the local Fire Marshall and Owner’s underwriter for approval.

3.08 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

A. System shall be installed as the construction progresses so that it is always ready for fire department use.

END OF SECTION



FIRE PROTECTION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND WET AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 13901 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 9


SECTION 13901 - FIRE PROTECTION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND WET AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section specifies automatic sprinkler system for buildings and structures. Materials and equipment

specified in this Section include: Pipe, fittings, valves, specialties, sprinklers, extinguishing cabinets, and accessories. B. Products furnished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler heads. Furnish to the

Owner's maintenance personnel. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

As per Civil Engineers - Division- Section "Fire Service Piping" for fire protection piping from fire service mains to a point 5 feet outside the building. As per Architects - Section 07920 "Sealant and Caulking," for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through walls and fire/smoke barriers. ∆ Addendum #4

As per Architects - Division-7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through walls and fire/smoke barriers.. ∆ Addendum #4

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe sizes used in the Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon





C. Working plans as used in this Section mean those documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared

pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13 for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire protection system is a "Wet-Pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system

containing water and connect to water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by fire.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department

connection. B. Maintenance Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department

connection, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in Division-1 and Division-15 Section "Standard Mechanical Requirements."

C. Welder's qualification certificated. D. Test Reports and Certificates including "Contractor's Materials & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and

Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground Piping" as described in NFPA 13. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and

accessories and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term qualified means experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with all precautions required, and has complied with all the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect. Refer to Division-1 Section: "Definitions and Standards" for definitions for "Installers."

B. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AWS D10.9,

Specifications for Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. Level AR-3." C. Regulatory Requirements: All systems and components must comply with the correctly adopted edition of the

following codes. 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler System. 2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 3. NFPA 1963 - Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections.

4. UL and FM Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled and Factory Mutual approved for the application anticipant.

5. Florida Building Code – 20017 ∆ Addendum #4

sys1

Polygon





6. Florida Fire Prevention Code – 20016 ∆ Addendum #4 7. Uniform Fire Safety Rules and Standards, Chapter 4A-48 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule rough-in installation with installations of other building components. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, 2 valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed. B. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish six extra sprinkler heads of each style included in the project. Furnish

each style with its own sprinkler head cabinet and special wrenches as specified in the Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the

following: 1. Gate Valves: a. Fairbanks b. Grinnell c. Jenkins d. Kennedy Valve Fig. #68, Div of ITT; Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. e. Nibco f. Stockham 2. Butterfly Valves: a. Grinnell #8000FP b. Nibco #FP20E-L c. Fairbanks d. Jenkins

sys1

Polygon





e. Kennedy Valve, Div of ITT; Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. f. Nibco g. Star Sprinkler Corp. h. Stockham 3. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: a. Stockham b. Victaulic Company of America 4. Water Flow Indicators: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Star Sprinkler Corp. d. Victaulic Company of America e. Viking Corp. 5. Supervisory Switches a. Grinnell #PIV-SU-A2 6. Hose Outlet Valves: a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. 7. Fire Department Connection Valve: a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. 8. Sprinkler Heads: a. Automatic Sprinkler Corp of America. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. d. Globe Fire Equipment Co. e. Grinnell f. Guardian Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. ITT Grinnell h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. i. Viking Corp. j. J.L. Industries k. Larsen's Mfg. Co. l. Johnson-Lee, Division of W.F. Lee Corp m. Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc. n Watrous, Inc. 2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of systems where the below specified

pipe and fitting materials are used.





B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, plain ends. C. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI A21.51 ductile iron pipe, with ANSI A21.4. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 250, standard pattern, for threaded joints. thread shall conform

to ANSI B1.20.1. B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall

conform to ANSI B1.20.1. C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable

iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.

E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a

central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings. Grooved mechanical couplings including gaskets used on dry-pipe systems be listed for dry-pipe service.

F. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. G. Ductile - Iron Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C110, Schedule 150, with cement mortar lining and AWWA C111 rubber

gaskets. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and pressure Vessel Code for welding materials

appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. B. Gasket Materials: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled, and design temperatures

and pressures. 2.05 GENERAL DUTY VALVES A. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water working pressure -

non-stock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.

B. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: iron body; bronzed mounted, 175 pound cold water working pressure -

non-stock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw yoke, rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and





bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing assembly consisting of a cast iron gland flange, brass gland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.

C. Butterfly Valves: Body of cast, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non-stock, lug style, gear operator

provided with easy to read flag type indicator. D. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class

B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.

2.06 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Indicator Post 1. Nibco #NIP-2 straight type 2.07 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS A. Sprinkler Heads: fusible link type, and style as indicated or required by the application. Unless otherwise

indicated, provide heads with nominal 1/2 inch discharge orifice, for "Ordinary" temperature range. B. Sprinkler Heads Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes: 1. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Styles: rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces and not

exposed to view. Heads shall be wax-coated where installed exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

2. Concealed Style: rough brass, with painted white cover plate. C. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: finish steel cabinet, suitable for wall mounting, with hinged cover and space

for 6 spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench. Provide a separate cabinet for each style sprinkler head on the project.

2.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Siamese Connections: polished cast brass, free standing type, and two-way connections. Connection sizes shall

be 4 inch outlet and two 2-1/2 inch female inlets, having NH standard threads, for the connection size indicated, as specified in NFPA. Each inlet shall have a clapper valve, and plug and chain.

2.09 ALARM DEVICES A. General: Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections. B. Water Flow Indicators: vane type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig; designed for horizontal or vertical

installation; have 2-SPDT circuits switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts AC and 0.25 ampere 24 Volts DC; complete with factory-set, field adjustable retard element to prevent false signals, and tamper-proof cover which sends a signal when cover is removed.





C. Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than full open position. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE APPLICATIONS A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded joints for

2-1/2 inch larger. B. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends and grooved mechanical couplings. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general locations and

arrangements of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

Deviations from approved "Working Plans" for sprinkler piping, require written approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Architect prior to deviating for the approved "Working Plans."

B. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. C. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe size. D. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or

in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections. F. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing

and locations for piping joined with grooved couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions, for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13.

G. Make connections between underground and above-ground piping using flange bolted to tie rods from

underground ductile iron pipe and fitting. H. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetrations in foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic

Piping Materials and Methods." I. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test

connections may also serve as drain pipes.





J. Install pressure gage on riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gage with a connection not less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and where they will not be subjected to freezing.

3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Welded Joints: AW D10.9, Level AR-3. B. Threaded Joints: conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and

valves as follows: 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to

determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the

valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens

during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial

contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolts threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.

D. Mechanical Grooved Joints: cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. E. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's

written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised-open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire

department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the stem controlled by each valve. Refer to Division-15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and signs.

C. Install check valves in each water supply connection. 3.05 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS





A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations. Heads to cover plates should be painted by the factory. Cover plates should be centered in ceiling slat or tile.

3.06 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS A. Install automatic drip valves at the check valve on the fire department connection to the mains. B. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetration in outside walls. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and retest repaired portion

of the system.

END OF SECTION




FIRE PROTECTION PIPE AND FITTINGS 13910




SECTION 13910 - FIRE PROTECTION PIPE AND FITTINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s data for review before any work is commenced, in accordance with requirements of Division 1 of

these Specifications.

1. Submit six (6) sets of shop drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Pipe and fitting shall be U.L. listed for the application.

B. Pipe and fittings shall be extra heavy flanged pattern where system working pressure is 175 psi or above at pump

discharge.

2.02 PIPE

A. The following schedule covers materials for Fire Protection Systems

MATERIAL SERVICE

1. Black steel pipe Fire Protection lines above Schedule 40, ASTM grades

A 53-78, Grade B.

2. Galvanized steel pipe Sprinkler test valve and

Schedule 40, ASTM 53 drain piping. lines exposed to weather.

2.03 FITTINGS

A. Black Steel Pipe, 2-inch and Smaller: Malleable iron, 175 psi banded, threaded, black.

B. Black Steel Pipe, 2½-inch and Larger: Standard wight black steel welding fittings.

C. Galvanized Steel Pipe, Schedule 40: Malleable iron, 175 psi banded, threaded, galvanized. ANSI B-16.3

2.04 ALTERNATE FITTINGS

A. Mechanical Coupling for Grooved pipe and Grooved Fittings: (Victaulic or Approved Equal) on Schedule 40 piping.








PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The design drawings are generally diagrammatic. They do not show every bend, offset, elbow or other fitting

which may be required in the piping for installation in the space allotted. Careful coordination of the work of this

Section with that of Civil Engineers Division, Division 16 and other Sections of Division 15 is necessary to avoid

conflicts.

B. Furnish and install sleeves for all pipes passing through concrete floors, concrete block wall and ceiling. Sleeves

shall be Schedule 40 black steel, two pipe sizes larger than the carrier pipe. Sleeves for pipes penetrating floors

shall be as previously stated and shall extend 3" to 6" above the floor.

C. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be packed with 3-hour fire rated ‘F.M.’ or ‘U.L.’ approved resilient

sealant in accordance with local codes. Sealant shall be Dow-Coring Type RTV Silicone Foam or Nelson’s

Flameseal Putty. Sealant shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use prime

coating as required by manufacturer.

D. Blocking shall be provided at all ells, tees, caps and changes of direction in mechanical joint pipe. Use non-

stress concrete against a minimum of 2-square feet of undisturbed earth.

E. Open Ends: Ends of all piping shall be kept closed during construction with caps or plug so as to prevent dirt or

building materials from entering pipes.

3.02 JOINING PIPE

A. Make all joints permanent and water tight.

B. Threaded Joints: After cutting and before threading, ream all pipe and remove burrs. Make joints with joint

compound applied to male threads only. Joint compound to be “Tite-Seal” or approved equal.

C. Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used. Provide extra strong nipples when length of

unthreaded part of standard weight nipple is less than 1½-inch.

D. Provide reduction fittings where changes in pipe sizes occur, no bushings permitted.

3.03 PIPE PROTECTION

A. Coat all exposed threads on galvanized steel pipe with two coats of zinc chromate after assembly.

B. Provide a continuous strip of “Terra-Tape” in 3-inch wide red or orange located directly above all buried pipe

approximately 12-inch below grade.








3.04 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Before making any tests on connections to fire service, flush completely all sprinkler systems to remove foreign

matter.

3.05 TESTS

A. Piping Tests: 1. Concealed work shall remain uncovered until required tests have been completed in presence of Project

Consultant and/or Owner.

2. Test 100 % of piping system under a 200 psi pressure for a period of 2 hours without pressure loss.

3. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be measured at the low point of the system or zone being tested.

3.06 PAINTING

A. ALL Fire Sprinkler Piping shall be painted red oxide.

END OF SECTION




STANDARD MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010


RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 10


SECTION 15010 - STANDARD MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations. The

following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section:

1. Submittals.

2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents.

4. Operation and Maintenance Manual for mechanical systems.

5. Operation and Maintenance instructions.

6. Guarantee.

7. Rough-ins.

8. Mechanical installations.

9. Code requirements, fee and permit.

10. Identification.

11. Motor and starters.

B. Related Sections: All applicable sections of Division 15 and the following:

1. Access to mechanical installations.

2. Excavation for mechanical installations within the building boundaries, and from building to utilities

connections.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit six copies of each shop drawing. Provide shop drawing data on the following items requested

by Architect/Engineer:

1. Fixtures.

2. Drains.

3. Valves.

4. Sprinkler heads and sprinkler layout.

5. Water heater.

6. Specialties.

7. Hose bibbs. 8. Vibration isolation and supports.

9. Motors and starters.

10. Air handling units.

11. Ventilation - power and gravity.

12. Air distribution devices.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 2 of 10


13. Air filters.

14. Automatic controls including control diagrams and sequence of operation.

15. 1/4" layout of ductwork, air handling unit room, sections and piping.

16. Thermal insulation.

1.04 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and

systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other system, installations, and building

components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and

coordination of installation are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily

limited to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following:

a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including coil removal, filter removal, and

space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

c. Equipment connections and support details.

d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

f. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

g. Valve Stem movement.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and

their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light

fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items.

1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents and in addition to the other items, indicate the following installed conditions:

1. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers and

other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units requiring periodic maintenance or repair.

2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered,

concealed units located and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, water

heaters, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Division 15 Section

pertaining to "Mechanical Identification." Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground

piping.

3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

5. Contract Modification, actual equipment and materials installed.

B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state of Florida to record the

locations and invert elevations of underground installations.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 3 of 10


C. Keep a set of prints on the job site for the purpose of tracking the record As-Built data on a daily basis.

D. The record documents will be checked every month by the A/E Field Representative prior to any pay requisitions

being approved.

1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A. Bind Operation and Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in a hard-backed binder. Spline of each binder

shall have the following lettering done in silk screen:

OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

CITY OF MIAMI, FIRE STATION NO. 13

1. Provide a master index at beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tabs indexes for

sections of manual.

2. First section shall consist of name, address, and phone number of Architect, Mechanical & Electrical

Engineers, Contractor, and Mechanical, Sheet Metal, Bridge-Tender, Control & Electrical Sub-

contractors. Also include a complete list of equipment installed with name, address and phone number

of vendor.

3. Provide a section for each type of equipment.

4. Submit four (4) copies of Operation & Maintenance Manual to Architect for his approval 30 days prior to final inspection. Use one of these approved copies during final inspection and leave with MDFRD's

Maintenance Department.

B. Include descriptive literature (manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item. Literature shall show

capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data

underlined. Data shall indicate model number used and the serial number.

C. Operating Instructions shall include: 1. General description of each mechanical system.

2. Step by step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into operation.

3. Provide schematic control diagrams for each cooling system, control panel, etc. Each diagram shall

show locations of start-stop switches, room thermostats, smoke detector, and automatic valves. Mark

correct operating setting for each control instrument on these diagrams. Provide sequence of operation

for each system including building management system and O.C.R. control.

4. Provide diagram for control systems showing wiring of related electrical items such as smoke detectors,

fuses, interlocks, electrical switches and relays.

5. Provide spare parts list, routine preventive maintenance and emergency procedure information.

D. Maintenance Instructions shall include:

1. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of mechanical equipment installed in project.

Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation

instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 4 of 10


2. Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment, locations,

and type and frequency of lubrication.

3. List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and name plate data of each

item together with number and name associated with each system item.

E. Air and Water Balance and Test Reports.

F. A copy of Operations and Maintenance Manual for each air handling unit shall be placed in a plastic pouch and

wired to every installed unit.

G. The Contractor shall obtain maintenance and spare parts forms from MDFRD Maintenance Engineering

Department for their computer data base. The Contractor shall have these forms filled out by appropriate vendors

for all systems and equipment requiring periodic maintenance, service or spare parts. the complete data forms

shall be submitted to A/E along with Maintenance and Operations Manual.

1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Instruct MDFRD's Maintenance Department in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment

utilizing Operation and Maintenance Manual when doing so.

B. Minimum instruction period for any piece of equipment or system shall be eight (8) hours.

C. Instruction periods shall occur after pre-final inspection when systems are properly working and before beneficial

occupancy and before final payment is made.

D. None of these instructional periods shall be overlapping.

E. A portion of the training session shall take place in a sit down classroom environment.

1.08 GUARANTEE

A. In addition to guarantee specified elsewhere, guarantee the cooling, fire protection and plumbing systems to be free from noise in the operation that may develop as a result of failure to construct system in accordance with

Contract Documents.

B. In order to be protected, secure proper guarantees from suppliers, sub-contractors and manufacturers.

C. The new installation covered by this contract shall be fully guaranteed covering all workmanship and materials for

one year, and shall also be completely maintained and serviced by the installing contractor for the same period of

time. Maintenance shall include monthly inspections and adjustments. Each service and maintenance trip to the

project shall have a separate written report mailed to MDFRD Maintenance Department and the Engineer within one week of the inspection trip so an accurate log can be kept of the operation and problems of the installation.

MDFRD Maintenance shall be notified prior to each visit.

D. The guarantee period shall begin from the date of the Certificate of Occupancy.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 5 of 10


1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades compliance labels,

and other information needed for identification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to

be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and

equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components

and trades.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during process of construction, to

allow for mechanical installation.

4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installation of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow

of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the

building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to

provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and

services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, service companies, and controlling

agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including

coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract

Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where

coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the

Architect/Engineer, and provide coordination drawings.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 6 of 10


9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other

building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend

grease fittings to an accessible location.

11. Install access panel or doors where components are concealed behind finished surfaces. "ACCESS

DOORS" are specified in Division 15 Section "DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES". 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed

at a specified slope.

3.03 MATERIALS

A. Materials and equipment shall be new and of domestic manufacture, free from defects, shall meet the

requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, ASTM and ANSI specifications where such exist, Florida

Building Code 2001, and shall be suitable for the use intended.

3.04 CODE REQUIREMENTS, FEES & PERMITS

A. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of local Plumbing, Fire Protection and Mechanical Codes.

Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, ordinances and regulations.

B. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and

Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify Architect in writing of such differences.

C. The currently adopted editions with current revisions and amendments of the following codes and standards are

considered minimum requirements for materials, workmanship, and safety where not covered elsewhere in these

specifications.

1. CODES AND STANDARDS:

a. Florida Building Code 2007 (Supplement 2009).

b. Public Law 91-596 - Occupational Safety and Health Act

c. NFPA No. 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilation

d. NFPA No. 101 - Life Safety Code e. Sanitary Code of Florida

f. ASHRAE Guide - Equipment, Systems and Applications

g. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible

h. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials

i. AWWA - American Water Works Association

j. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

k. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

l. NFPA-13 - Sprinkler Systems

m. Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction n. U.L. 555 - Fire Damper

o. U.L. 555S - Smoke Damper - Smoke Damper/Fire Damper Combination

D. LABELING






RC&P Project # 08012.00 7 of 10


1. Where it is required in other Sections of this Division that a product be "U.L. Approved" or "U.L. Listed",

it shall be interpreted to mean that each such product shall bear the U.L. label.

2. This requirement shall apply to other standards which provide "labels" for products which signifies

"Approval" (i.e. NSF, SMACNA, PDI, etc.).

E. PERMITS, FEES TAXES, ETC.

1. The Contractor shall secure and pay all permits, State Sales Tax, Federal Excise Tax, royalties, meter and tap fees, and other taxes or fees as required for installation of a complete system as outlined herein and

as shown on the plans. The Contractor shall secure all necessary licenses and insurance.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. General: All equipment, valves, piping mains, switches, starters, and control components shall be identified by

the Contractor as noted herein.

B. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Each component of equipment shall have Manufacturer's name, address, model

number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. Nameplate of a distributing agent will not

be acceptable in lieu of Manufacturer's nameplate. Nameplate shall be die stamped, engraved, or etched to

guarantee long term legibility.

C. Nameplates for Mechanical and Associated Electric Equipment: 1. Nomenclature and equipment numbers shall correspond to those used in preparation of operating

instructions, and shall identify equipment and its function contents.

2. Nameplates shall be black laminated plastic with white engraved lettering, attached to equipment with

screws or rivets.

3. Nameplates shall be a minimum 1 inch by 2-1/2 inch for related electrical components such as pilot

lights, equipment starters, switches, pushbutton, etc.

4. Nameplates shall be minimum 2 inch by 4 inch for major equipment such as air handling units, pumps,

water heaters, etc.

D. Valve Tags: Contractor shall provide all valves with 1-1/2 inch brass tags, 0.044 inch thick, fastened with brass

chains on S-hook to each valve. Tags shall have 1/4 inch high depressed back filled letters denoting type of

service in accordance with symbol list included in paragraph 3.07 (g) for pipe, and a 1/2 inch high black filled

sequential number properly coded to valve chart.

E. Piping:

1. All interior exposed piping shall be fully painted as per "PIPE IDENTIFICATION CHART" shown in

paragraph (G) on page 13 of this Section. 2. All interior and exterior piping, concealed and exposed, shall be identified showing contents and

"direction of flow" arrow, using stencil with black oil paint or preformed snap-on markers, using ANSI

background and letter colors.

3. Stencils shall be located at the following locations:

a. Behind each assess door.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 8 of 10


b. At each horizontal and vertical change in direction.

c. Adjacent to each valve and fitting, (except on plumbing fixtures and equipment).

d. At each branch and riser takeoff.

e. At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction.

f. On all aboveground horizontal pipe runs and spaced every 40 feet.

4. Size of stencil letter shall meet ANSI A13.1 requirements for the pipe or covering outside diameter as follows:

Outside Diameter of

Pipe or Covering Size of Letters

3/4" - 1-1/4" 1/2"

1-1/2" - 2" 3/4"

2-1/2" - 6" 1-1/4"

5. For pipe or covering less than 3/4 inch diameter, a permanently legible tag is acceptable in lieu of

stencils.

F. Identification Charts and Diagrams

1. Contractor shall provide a valve chart for inclusion in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual". Chart

shall include valve number, service, function and location. Format shall be submitted for approval by

A/E.

2. Contractor shall provide framed wall mounted charts showing complete list of applicable piping

identification symbols, descriptions and colors for mounting where directed by the MDFRD Maintenance Engineering.

G. Piping Identification Chart

Marker

Pipe Background

Symbol Color Color

DCW Domestic Cold Water Light Green Green

DHWS Domestic Hot Water Supply Orange Orange SW Sanitary Waste Brown White

CD Condensate Drain Black White

VTR Vent Thru Roof Beige White

F Fire Protection Red Red

SW Safewaste Beige White

FS Fire-Sprinkler Red White

PRV or P & T Blow-Off Water Relief Yellow Black

SAN Sanitary Sewer Green White

3.08 WELDING SAFETY IN BUILDING AND INSTALLING UNDERGROUND PIPING

A. All tradesmen operating on property whose work entails open flame cutting, welding or similar hot work shall not

proceed with such operations until the safety of the work area has been approved by the MDFRD and a "Hot Work

Permit" obtained. This directive is specifically aimed at reducing the potential hazards attendant to the presence






RC&P Project # 08012.00 9 of 10


of hydrocarbons in, on, or about the ground water table, when exposed by open trench or pit excavation. The

provisions of this directive shall apply to any operation involving open flames or producing heat and /or sparks.

The following steps shall be followed:

1. The Permit shall be applied for by the General Contractor, who is designated by the MDFRD supervisor,

per NFPA 51B, through MDFRD Fire Department. Authorizations will not be issued for more than two

successive days. Hot work in excess of this period shall be re-authorized with a new Permit.

2. The authorization shall be signed by the Field Representative of the A/E, who is designated by MDFRD manager, per NFPA 51B, and is responsible for checking of the "Required Precautions Checklist." The

manager shall notify and coordinate with adjacent tenants and MDFRD Operations if fumes or other

effects of the operation will impact airport operations, prior to authorizing. The manager shall also

verify, collect, and file the final sign-off by the Firewatch person.

3. A copy of the executed Hot Work Permit shall be faxed by the A/E to the MDFRD Branch of the Fire

Department and to MDFRD Engineering, prior to the start of any Hot Work.

4. A copy of the Permit shall be exhibited at the work site attached to the Hot Work equipment.

5. A Firewatch person shall be assigned by the Supervisor, who shall be responsible for briefing on firewatch duties. The Firewatch person may be the helper of the Hot Worker, and may be responsible for

additional non-conflicting duties as appropriate. Any additional duties must be in the immediate vicinity

and in view of the Hot Work.

3.09 MOTORS

A. Motors: All motors shall be NEMA standard design, American made, sound rated ball bearing type and wound

for specified voltage. Load to which each is connected must not cause running current to exceed the nameplate

amperage. Equip all motors with pressure gun grease fittings.

B. Motors 3/4 HP and larger (unless otherwise noted): 480 volt, 60 cycle, 3 phase. Motors 1/2 HP or smaller

(unless otherwise noted): 120 volt, 60 cycle, 1 phase.

C. Provide slide rails where motors are used with drives requiring adjustment.

3.10 STARTERS

A. All starters for motors of 1/2 HP or less (unless otherwise noted): Across-the-line type with "on-off" push button,

with NEMA-1 enclosure.

B. All starters for 3/4 HP and up (unless otherwise noted): Provide with control circuit transformer, fused CLF

primary, overload protection in three phases and "hand-off-auto" switch in covers. NEMA-1 enclosures unless

otherwise noted. Control transformers shall have a minimum capacity of 100 VA. provide a minimum of two NO

and two NC auxiliary contacts.

C. All starters exposed to weather shall have type 3R enclosure.

3.11 IMMEDIATELY AFTER NOTICE TO PROCEED AND PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall meet with the A/E Consultant and the MDFRD Project Manager to discuss the

following:






RC&P Project # 08012.00 10 of 10


1. Outline the scope of the project.

2. Identify all of the interface problems with existing system such as, existing lift station at the site, and the

impact each will have on the uninterrupted operation of the existing systems.

3. Establish a tentative schedule of each of the interface problems and the responsibilities of the Contractor

to minimize the operation and maintenance problems of the existing systems.

4. Obtain utilities clearance from FPL, Wiltel, MDFRD Information System, MDFRD Irrigation, MDFRD

Engineering and MDFRD Utilities Coordinator. This requirement applies to everyone who digs or drills on MDFRD properties which might contain utilities vital operations.

3.12 CONSTRUCTION PHASE

A. At least one week prior to working on each interface problem with existing system, the Contractor shall meet with

the MDFRD Maintenance Department to plan the step-by-step procedure of how the work will be handled to avoid

needless operational and maintenance problems with the existing systems. Approval of the work procedure must

be given by the Maintenance Department before the work proceeds.

B. Requests for utilities clearances shall be obtained not less than five working days prior to drilling or digging, and

shall be coordinated with MDFRD Engineering. The Contractor shall procure the necessary Underground Utilities

Clearance forms from MDFRD Engineering.

3.13 AFTER SYSTEM IS IN OPERATION AND PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. After all balancing and testing has been completed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to operate the

ystems for a period of eight hours, in the presence of the Owner's representatives for the purpose of instruction in operation and maintenance. The As-built drawings and brochures of equipment shall be delivered to MDFRD at

least one Week before the instructional period is scheduled. Notify the Architect/Engineer one week in advance

for his presence at the beginning of the instructional period to assure proper instruction and training.

B. Additional Owner Instructional Period:

Refer to paragraph 1.07 Section 15010.

3.14 DATE OF BEGINNING OF GUARANTEE PERIOD

A. The guarantee period shall begin from the date of the Certificate of Occupancy. Refer to paragraph 1.08, Section

15010.

B. All or portions of a project may have a date of beginning of guarantee prior to final acceptance due to a need by

MDFRD to start beneficial use.

END OF SECTION




BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050


RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 13


SECTION 15050 – BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification materials and devices.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical

materials and equipment. Do not fabricate or ship any equipment until submittals have been reviewed and

approved by the Architect-Engineer.

C. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.

D. Coordination Drawings: The mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and shall be followed as closely as possible.

The contractor shall develop detailed coordination drawings showing clearances with building structure, ceilings

height and overall coordination with all other trades. Drawing shall detail major elements, components, and

systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of

installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Whenever there is a conflict, the contractor shall show

the proposed solution on the coordination drawings. Ductwork piping offsets, rises/drops, re-routing and re-

dimensioning shall be shown on the coordination drawings for review and approval by the Engineer. Any

changes in the field resulting from not preparing fully coordinated drawings shall be corrected at no extra cost to

the Owner. Contractor shall perform and include the following as required:

1. Contractor shall make sure that no electrical conduits are installed prior to the ducts being hung, where

the conduits may interfere with the required duct clearances in the ceiling spaces. Gravity type

plumbing piping takes precedence over other trades. Plumbing pressure piping may be offset to clear ductwork as required. Ductwork may be run in joist spaces where needed, provided that smooth

transitions are made at all turns.

2. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement.

3. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

4. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their

relationship to other penetrations and installations.

5. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light fixtures,

communication system components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items.


A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification

devices.

B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and

ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical

and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. Additional

costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases. If minimum energy






RC&P Project # 08012.00 2 of 13


ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design and commissioning

requirements.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of

floor, if stored inside.

C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to

allow for mechanical installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other

structural components, as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the

Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.

E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services.

Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.

F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind

finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."

G. The Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic and shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the

building and the work of other trade contractors will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the

work of each Contractor conform to the building construction and the work of other trade contractors shall be done at the appropriate Trade Contractor’s expense.

H. Mechanical or electrical work installed before coordinating with other trades or installed so as to cause

interference with work of other trades, or cause unacceptable headroom clearance problems shall be corrected

without extra change.

I. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to

surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 3 of 13


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Retain above for nonproprietary or below for semiproprietary Specification. Refer to Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment."

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Dielectric Unions:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

2. Dielectric Flanges:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Co.

c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Central Plastics Co.

4. Dielectric Couplings:

a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Lochinvar Corp.

5. Dielectric Nipples: a. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.

b. Perfection Corp.

c. Victaulic Co. of America.

6. Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

a. Metraflex Co.

b. Red Valve Co., Inc.

c. Uniflex, Inc.

7. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Metraflex Co.

c. Thunderline/Link-Seal.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 4 of 13


2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.03 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for joining.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless thickness or

specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type,

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. 1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead

content.

2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.

2. BAg1: Silver alloy.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and

chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

H. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

I. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 5 of 13


J. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.

1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.

2. Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.

3. Gaskets: Rubber.

4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.

5. Finish: Enamel paint.

2.04 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action

and stop corrosion.

B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types and

matching piping system materials.

C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working

pressure as required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type.

Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and

steel backing washers.

1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig minimum working

pressure as required to suit system pressures.

G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends;

and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded,

or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.05 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:

1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.

2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeve in subparagraph below is without seepage holes and cannot be used instead of a floor drain.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 6 of 13


C. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal protruding

fittings and sleeves.

1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.

2. OD: Completely cover opening.

3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw.

a. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.

4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set screw. a. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.

5. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.

6. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed-rivet hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

7. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

2.06 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Manufacturer’s standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in

other types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. If more than one type is

specified for application, selection is Installer’s option, but provide one selection for each product category.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fastened to

equipment.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power

characteristics, labels of tested compliances and similar essential data.

2. Location: Accessible and visible location.

C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with recommendations

of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-inch high letters for ductwork and not

less than ¾-inch high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.

1. Material: Brass. 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior-type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise indicated; either

brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.

3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not other indicated for

piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.

D. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, color-coded, complying

with ASME A13.1.

E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded,

pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.

F. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin—laminate

engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Fabricate in sized required for message.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 7 of 13


2. Engraved with engraver’s standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment

identification.

3. Punch for mechanical fastening.

4. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches long; 1/8 inch for larger units.

5. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.

G. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color code:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.

3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.

4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.

5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above.

6. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:

a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.

c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering, leaving conditions and rpm.

7. Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches for

equipment.

H. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical

identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering and wording indicated for

proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that

indicates individual system number and service such as “Boiler No. 3,” “Air Supply No. 1H,” or “Standpipe F12.”

I. Piping Color Coding: Description and color of pipe markers and painting shall be as follows:

Symbol Description Pipe Color Marker Letters

Background Color

CD Condensate Drain Black Green White

DCW Domestic Cold Water Light Green White

DHWS Domestic Hot Water Supply Orange Orange White F Fire Protection Red Red White

SW Sanitary Waste Brown White Black

VTR Vent thru Roof Beige Green White

2.07 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 8 of 13


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 15

piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless

deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping at indicated slope.

D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are

prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space

above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.

J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and

suspended ceilings according to the following:

1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.

2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.

3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.

4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated

finish.

5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 9 of 13


N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete

floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas

2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as

required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. 3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe

insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.

b. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.

c. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.

d. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure

flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"

for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe

insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials.

5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.

O. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.

3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten

bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

P. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations

using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing

mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten

bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe

penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for

materials.

R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping

specification Sections:






RC&P Project # 08012.00 10 of 13


1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of

Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full

and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to

determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading

is specified.

c. Align threads at point of assembly.

d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.

e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and Procedures

for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding operators according to

"Quality Assurance" Article.

7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and

thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by

sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible.

Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.

8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 401 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers and solvent cements.

b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.

c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.

d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.

e. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.

f. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement according to

ASTM D 3138.

U. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each

piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection.

2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection

to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar

metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 11 of 13


B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic

form. Refer conflicts to Architect.

C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in

exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease

fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts if

possible.

3.03 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.

2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot, uninsulated

piping. 3. Locate pipe markets as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms and accessible

maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums and exterior unconcealed locations:

a. Near each valve and control device.

b. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot,

uninsulated piping.

c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings or enter nonaccessible enclosures.

d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

f. Spaced at maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25-feet in congested areas of piping and equipment.

g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical

equipment.

1. Lettering Size: Minimum ¼-inch high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24-

inches, ½-inch high lettering for distances up to 72 inches and proportionally larger lettering for greater

distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.

2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions and warn of hazards and

improper operations.

C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction.

3.04 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 12 of 13


B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel

undercoat and primer.

2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over

galvanized metal primer.

3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel

undercoat and primer. 4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-

inhibitive metal primer.

5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over

galvanized metal primer.

6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-

inhibitive metal primer.

C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.05 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than

supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations.

Use 3000-psig, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.06 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical

installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3.08 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 13 of 13


B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 9


SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING A. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure.

B. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers. Division 13 Section 13901 on “Fire Protection, General Requirements and Wet Automatic Sprinkler System”. ∆ Addendum #4 C. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls” for vibration isolation. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, system contents, and test water. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield

insert indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and

characteristics of components and fabrication details. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

sys1

Polygon





1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX,

"Welding and Brazing Qualifications." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Pipe Hangers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. c. Grinnell Corp.

2. Channel Support Systems:

a. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit. b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. c. Unistrut Corp.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. c. Pipe Shields, Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and

Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct

contact with copper tubing. B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct

contact with copper tubing.





C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533,

Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. 2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533,

Type I calcium silicate. 3. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 4. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 5. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 6. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 7. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior

applications. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

2.03 CORROSION PROTECTION A. All hanger and support components exposed to the outdoors or installed within interior building without air

conditioned spaces, shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system

Specification Sections.





C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16,

requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or

no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base

stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base

stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.





D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if

longer ends are required for riser clamps. E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification

Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building

attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification

Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers

from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to

attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or

angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable

and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy

loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy

loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip

and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal

movement where head room is limited.





G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that

matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing

insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-

psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification

Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping

systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25

percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25

percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to

25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one

support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,

clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on

field-assembled channel systems. 1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support

together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install

intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.





2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within

maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners

according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of

movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement

will not be transmitted to connected equipment. J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections

allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with

clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill

interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for

pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc

of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for

pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.





4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. 3.04 METAL FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded

because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of

welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of

base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded

surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of

pipe. 3.06 PAINTING A. Retain paragraph below if painting is in Division 9 Section "Painting." Revise reference if Division 9 Section

"Special Coatings" applies instead.





B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint

on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to

comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION




HVAC – VIBRATION ISOLATION 15071




SECTION 15071 - HVAC - VIBRATION ISOLATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings for approval before ordering or commencing work.

1.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect all materials during storage and installation.

1.03 SCOPE

A. All mechanical equipment over one horsepower, unless otherwise noted, shall be isolated from the structure by means of resilient vibration and noise isolators supplied by a single manufacturer to the Mechanical Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION

A. Floor mounted equipment to be supported by unhoused, stable spring isolators, with horizontal stiffness equal or

larger than 0.8 vertical stiffness. isolators to be provided with leveling bolt and 1/4" ribbed neoprene pad bonded to the base plate. Provide 4" high concrete housekeeping pad over complete floor area of equipment.

B. Suspend equipment or piping to be supported by spring hangers with stable springs, position indicators,

neoprene grommets and washers to separate bolt and spring from housing.

2.02 INERTIA BASE

A. Inertia base shall be of reinforced concrete. Inertial bases shall provide a common support for motors and driven equipment. Frames for inertia bases shall be structural steel with reinforcing bars welded in place and shall be

provided by manufacturer of isolators.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Selection of spring mounts to be based on weight information supplied by equipment manufacturer to vibration isolator manufacturer.

B. Spring selection to be based on 2" deflection minimum with equipment and piping in place and ready to operate.

C. Install spring mounts so that springs are vertical and free of side stresses.




HVAC – VIBRATION ISOLATION 15071




D. Weight of equipment and piping supported must not compress spring beyond operating point recommended by

manufacturer.

E. When installing pipe isolation joints, pipes to be supported independently of the equipment to which they

connect.

F. Vibration isolation system shall be guaranteed to have deflection stated herein or as indicated in the drawings.

Mounted sizes shall be determined by mounting manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers for spring mounts: Korfund Dynamics Corp., Mason Industries, Korfund Dynamics,

Vibration Eliminator Co., Amber Booth Company.

3.03 MOUNT AIR HANDLING UNITS AS FOLLOWS

A. The equipment shall be mounted directly on stable bare steel spring isolators. Where units to be mounted are

furnished with internal structural frames and external lugs (both of suitable strength and rigidity), or without any

severe overhangs, no additional structural frame need be furnished and installed beneath unit. In any event,

motor shall be integrally mounted to unit and shall be mounted on slide rails. Minimum static deflection shall be

2 inches.

3.04 SUPPORT PIPING AS FOLLOWS

A. Resilient diagonal mountings or other approved devices shall be provided as required to limit piping motion due

to equipment start up or shut down, to maximum deflection of 1/8 inch.

B. Isolators for water piping shall be resiliently spring and neoprene supported with mountings providing a

minimum static deflection of 1/2 inch.

C. Where supplementary steel is required to support piping, supplementary steel shall be sized so the maximum deflection between supports does not exceed 0.08 inches. The pipe support/rod/clamp is to be resiliently

supported from the supplementary steel.

END OF SECTION



PIPE INSULATION 15083 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 13


SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

∆ Addendum #4

B. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.

∆ Addendum #4

C. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.

∆ Addendum #4

D. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.

E. Section 15180 – Mechanical Systems Insulation.

∆ Addendum #4

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, density, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 4. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections. 5. Application of field-applied jackets.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon





C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or

less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or

less.


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.

1.07 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS





A. Retain above for nonproprietary or below for semiproprietary Specification. Refer to Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment."

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. c. Knauf Fiberglass GribH. 2. Cellular-Glass Insulation: a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.

3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. c. Imcoa.

4. Calcium Silicate Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. b. Pabco. c. Schuller International, Inc.

2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-

retarder jacket. 2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades: a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing

edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation. b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications.

Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. 5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. 7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

C. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible. 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.





1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

E. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.

F. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in performing insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.03 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. A properly sealed foil, scrim, kraft-paper (FSK) jacket, common with most forms of factory-applied jackets for mineral-fiber insulation, meets vapor-retarder requirements of ASTM C 921, Type I.

C. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.

D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil- thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC. 1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps,

soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

E. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper. 1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco-embossed finish, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same material, finish, and

thickness as jacket.

2.04 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

2.05 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.





PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.





L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. 1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at least

12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure

strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal

seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder. 4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. 5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-retarder

mastic. P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. 1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.

3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.

S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."





T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly. 1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports

penetrate vapor retarder.

3.04 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Where pipe expansion is anticipated, detail expansion compensation for insulation on Drawings and

indicate intervals for its occurrence. See MICA's "National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards," Plate No. 41A.

2. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials.

3. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 5. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but

secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows: 1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight

pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at least 1

inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe

insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.

3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. 4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets at least 1

inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve body.

Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing





insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with

manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic. 5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing

compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

3.05 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but

secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.



pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.


available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of cellular-glass

insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands. 3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. 4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets at least 1

inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve body.

Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.





3. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

4. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

3.06 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid

openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows: 1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the


pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to

avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to

avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached

according to the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to

packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

3.07 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten

without deforming insulation materials. 2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer

with 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.





3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.



pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material and thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.


available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of calcium silicate

insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire. 3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit

access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.

2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.

3.08 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended

adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated. 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-

retarder mastic.

C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.





D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.09 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.10 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration-control devices. 3. Fire-suppression piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: 1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect. 2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes. 3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes.

B. Edit paragraph below to limit noncompliance statement as required. As stated, Architect could require all fittings to be removed and replaced.

C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications.

D. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications.

3.12 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-applied jackets.





B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements.

3.13 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE (AIR CONDITIONED SPACES, INCLUDING MECHANICAL ROOMS)

A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water. 1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe, Up to 2 inches: 1 inch insulation. b. Copper Pipe, 2-1/2 inches and over: 1-1/2 inch insulation.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: None. 6. Finish: None.

B. Service: Domestic chilled water. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe, all pipe sizes: 3/4 insulation

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: Painted.

C. Service: Rainwater conductors. Horizontal runs only. 1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Cast Iron and PVC Pipe, All: 1/2 inch. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None.

D. Service: Roof drain bodies.

1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber 3. Insulation Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None.





E. Service: Condensate drain piping. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: Painted.

F. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the disabled. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 120 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: As per manufacturer. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC P-trap and supply covers. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: Painted.

G. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Steel and Copper Pipe – All: 1 inch.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: Painted.

3.14 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE (INCLUDING INTERIOR UNAIRCONDITONED CEILING PLENUM SPACE)

A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building and inside the building in without air conditioned spaces.

B. Service: Refrigerant suction. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe : All - 3/4 inch insulation.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: Painted.

END OF SECTION



VALVES 15110 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 8


SECTION 15110 – VALVES PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification

Sections. the City of Miami Front End Documents. ∆ Addendum #4 B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification,

end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.

C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include

detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph. ∆ Addendum #4 B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping. C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon





B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as

lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Gate Valves: a. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Hammond Valve.

2. Ball Valves: a. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Victaulic Company of America. d. Hammond Valve. 3. Plug Valves:

a. Grinnell Corp. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Victaulic Company of America. d. Hammond Valve.

4. Globe Valves:

a. Delta. b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. c. NIBCO Inc. d. Hammond Valve.

5. Butterfly Valves:

a. Delta. b. Grinnell Corp. c. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. d. NIBCO Inc. e. Victaulic Company of America. f. Hammond Valve.





6. Check Valves:

a. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. d. Victaulic Company of America. e. Hammond Valve.

7. Pressure/Temperature Test Ports:

a. Flow Design, Inc. or Equivalent. 8. Auto Flow Regulator with Port Section: a. Flow Design, Inc. or Equivalent.

2.02 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below. 1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems. B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as

required to suit system pressures and temperatures. C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator features:

1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall have

square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves. 3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 8 inches and larger, installed 96 inches or higher above finished

floor elevation. 4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves 8 inches and larger. E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive

insulation. F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections. G. Threads: ASME B1.20.1. H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. I. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F

for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. Do not use for valves in HVAC service.





2.03 GATE VALVES A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi cold working pressure (CWP), or

Class 150, 300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.

B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and

bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

2.04 BALL VALVES A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and

bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-inch valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:

1. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle. 2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. 3. Memory Stop: For operator handles. Note: Brass alloys used in valves shall contain no more than 15% zinc.

2.05 PLUG VALVES A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton,

or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections: 1. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves. 2. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes 6 inches and larger. 3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes 6 inches and larger, 96 inches or higher above floor.

2.06 GLOBE VALVES A. Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi CWP;

ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.

B. Globe Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and

bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

Note: Brass alloys used in valves shall contain no more than 15% zinc. 2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES





A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi CWP, 150-psi maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body

and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug style: 1. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze. 2. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Standard lever handle with memory stop. 3. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches and Larger, 96 Inches or Higher above Floor: Chain-wheel operator. 4. Operator for sizes 8 inches to 24 inches: Gear operator with position indicator.

2.08 CHECK VALVES A. Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A126 cast-iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless steel fins and

spring, Buna seals, installed between flanges.

B. Silent Check Valves Globe Type: Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.

C. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B62 bronze body and a cap (main components), horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, bronze disc or Buna “N” rubber disc with stainless steel holder threaded or soldered end connections.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing

materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such

operation. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and

material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.





B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and

equipment removal without system shutdown. D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

3.03 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths. B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish.

Clean valve socket. C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position. E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs. F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve

slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux. G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it completely

fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.04 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far

pipe should be threaded into valve. B. Align threads at point of assembly.





C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 3.05 FLANGED CONNECTIONS A. Align flange surfaces parallel. B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as

possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench. C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and

retention. 3.06 VALVE END SELECTION A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam service.

2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.

3.07 APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling

duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements. B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. 2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension. 3. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing. 4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or teflon disc. 5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated ductile iron disc;

EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat. 7. Check Valves: Class 125, lug type as indicated.

C. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. 2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.

3. Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing. 4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze disc. 5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM

or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat. 7. Check Valves: Lug type, as indicated.





3.08 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting

and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

END OF SECTION



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 6


SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 RELATED WORK

B. Division 2 Section “Water Systems” for exterior water service piping.

C. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Specialties” for water distribution piping specialties.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Domestic Water Service Piping: 100 psig. 2. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 80 psig.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with ASME B31.9 “Building Services Piping” for materials, products and installation.

C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.





B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.02 COPPER TUBING

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-

joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required

to match piping. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-

to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. Include threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1 on threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L , water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-

joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required

to match piping. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-

to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. Include threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1 on threaded ends.

2.03 VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing and drain valves.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.





C. Underground Domestic Water Service Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Soft copper tube, Type K: copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.Retain

"any of" option in paragraph below to allow Contractor to select piping materials from those retained.

D. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. Retain one or more of five subparagraphs below. If more than one type of material and joining method is

used, identify various materials on Drawings and show points of transition from one material to another. 2. NPS 1-1/2and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 3. NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 4. NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings; copper-tubing, keyed

couplings; and grooved joints. 5. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 6. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Use NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4hard copper tube, Type L with groove ends; copper.

3.03 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly or

gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2and larger. 2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

3.04 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water piping outside building is specified in Division 2 Section "Water Distribution." Edit below to suit Project.

B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for site water distribution and service piping.

C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

D. Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and location indicated.

E. Install underground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems.

H. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside building at each domestic water service. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages, and to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

I. Install aboveground domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.





J. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

K. Perform the following steps before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during

installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where

used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

L. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

M. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless otherwise indicated.

N. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.

3.05 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Soldered Joints: ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; SN95, SN94 or E.

C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed-coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for seismic-restraint devices.

∆ Addnedum #4

B. Refer to Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

sys1

Polygon





E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inchrod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inchrod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inchrod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inchrod.

G. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.07 CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements specified. If Drawings are explicit enough, these requirements may be reduced or omitted.

B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

D. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

E. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required

by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment

connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.


A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities

having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be

made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after

roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.





B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.09 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. 1. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot

water in each branch. 2. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are

not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

END OF SECTION



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 5

Footer has been updated with - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 15 Section “Waste Piping” for waste and vent piping systems.

∆ Addendum #4

B. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Specialties” for soil, waste, and vent piping systems specialties.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.



B. Comply with ASHE B31.9, “Building Services Piping”, for materials, products and installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

sys1

Polygon





2.02 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING

A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, with dimensions required for pipe class, for each hub.

B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564

rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center pipe stop. a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel

shield; or housing stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket.

2.03 COPPER TUBING

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint

fittings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION



A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Use NPS 1-1/2 hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 3. NPS 2 to NPS 6: Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4. NPS 2 to NPS 6: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

C. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. 2 to 6 inch NPS Hub – and – spigot, cast iron soil pipe, service class; hub and spigot, cast iron soil

pipe fittings, service class, and: compression joints.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.





C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems.

E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller;

1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

I. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems in locations indicated and as follows: 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.






A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod, maximum vertical spacing, 15 feet. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod, maximum vertical spacing, 15 feet. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 6: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by

plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties." 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for

each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after

roughing-in and before setting fixtures.





2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or


2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.


3.08 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION



STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 7


SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps."

2. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Specialties” for Storm Drainage Piping System Specialties.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Storm Drainage Piping” 10-foot head of water.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting seismic

restraints. 2. Controlled-Flow Storm Drainage System: Include calculations, plans and details.

C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.





2.02 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.03 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings ASTM A 666: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers: 1) Clamp-All Corp. 2) Mission Rubber Co. 3) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2.04 STEEL PIPE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 666, Type 304, Stainless steel housing or shield and stainless steel clamp; include basket. 2.05 COPPER TUBING A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

2. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

3. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-

metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION







A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 2 to NPS 6. 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and coupled joints.

C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger. 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;

and coupled joints.

D. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 3 to NPS 8. 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;

and coupled joints.

E. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger. 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard couplings; and coupled joints.


A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. 1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 2. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

F. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.





G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping less than 3” and smaller;

1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and larger.

K. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.05 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge. 1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.





C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump pump discharge.

D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

∆ Addendum #4

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m), if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.

4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches (1500 mm).

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

sys1

Polygon





3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

J. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

K. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following: 1. Storm Sewer: To exterior force main or storm manhole. 2. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after

roughing-in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified

below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.





C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or


2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.



E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has

been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without

exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.



3.09 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION



MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION 15180 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 11 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15180 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 15510 - Piping (HVAC). 2. 15410 - Piping (Plumbing). 3. 15515 - Valves, Hangers, and Specialties. ∆ Addendum #4 4. 15110 - Valves. ∆ Addendum #4 5. 15540 - Pumping Equipment (HVAC). ∆ Addendum #4 6. 15060 - Hangers and Supports. ∆ Addendum #4 7. 15810 - Ductwork. ∆ Addendum #4 8. 15841 - Low Pressure Ductwork. 9. 15890 - Ductwork. ∆ Addendum #4 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C534-94 Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular

Form. 2. C547-95 specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon




3. C552-91 Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 4. C553-92 Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial

Applications. 5. C585-90 Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and

Tubing (NPS System). 6. C612-93 Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 7. D1056-91 Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 8. D1668-95 Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing. 9. E84-96a Test Method for Surface Burning characteristics of Building Materials. 10. E96-95 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. A. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). B. National Fire Protection Institute: NFPA 90A. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - 723. D. Insulation Contractor’s Association of South Florida Inc. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's catalog cuts, performance curves, and procedures before starting work. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect materials from the weather during storage and installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall be labeled, listed, or have certified test reports submitted from testing laboratory accepted by the

Owner. B. Comply with the most stringent requirements between the Insulation Contractors Association of South Florida Inc. and

as specified. C. There shall be no fiberglass in contact with the HVAC airstream anywhere in the system whether protected by

encapsulation or not. D. Foam plastic insulation shall be certified by an independent third-party national recognized laboratory, that the

product emits less than 1 part per million formaldehyde out gassing after 24 hours. 1.06 FIRE HAZARD RATING A. Fire hazard rated materials shall be UL labeled or a certified test report by a Owner accepted testing laboratory shall be

submitted indicating compliance with specified fire hazard requirements.




B. Insulation (including adhesives) shall be fire retardant or self-extinguishing. Finishing jackets, insulation, and adhesives shall have composite fire and smoke ratings complying with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723, as plain or on a composite basis.

C. When insulation, vapor barrier covering, wrapping materials, and adhesives are applied separately in field, each item

shall be tested individually. D. When insulation, vapor barrier covering, wrapping materials, and adhesives are factory composite systems, they shall

be tested as an assembly. E. Insulation materials, adhesives, coatings, and other accessories shall have a fire hazard rating not more than 25 for

flame developed and not more than 50 for fuel contributed and smoke developed, except as follows: 1. Flexible unicellular insulation. 2. Nylon anchors for securing insulation to ducts or equipment. 3. Factory premolded 1 piece PVC fitting and valve covers F. Flame resistance treatments subject to deterioration due to effects of moisture or high humidity are not acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation: 1. Armaflex. 2. Armstrong. 3. Certain-Teed. 4. Cell-U-Foam. 5. Foamglas. 6. Manville. 7. Owens-Corning. 8. Pittsburgh Corning. B. Insulating Cement: 1. Keene Powerhouse. 2. Benjamin Foster.




3. Fibrex FBX fast set. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Insulation: Type and thickness as specified. 1. Provide fire retardant or self-extinguishing insulation, including adhesives. 2. Finishing jackets, insulation, and adhesives shall have composite fire and smoke ratings per ASTM E84,

NFPA 255, and UL 723. B. Domestic Hot Water Supply Piping Insulation: 1. 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with pre-sized factory applied FRJ jacket of glass cloth with

longitudinal lap and butt joint strips with self-sealing adhesive. 2. Insulation may be 1/2" insulation for vertical branches to individual fixtures. 3. Minimum density of 7-1/4 pounds per cubic foot, maximum thermal conductivity factor of 0.26K at 75

degrees F. mean temperature, and alkalinity of 0.696. 4. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 5. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. 6. Accessories: Adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes for fittings, and related materials shall have the same

composite ratings as listed above. C. Solar Collector Piping Insulation: 1. Same as specified for Domestic Hot Water Supply Piping except with metal weatherproof jacket. D. Cold Drainage Piping Drinking Fountain, and Electric Water Cooler Drain Piping Insulation:

1. Elastomeric (foam plastic) thermal insulation 1 inch thick with built-in vapor barrier rated self-extinguishing ASTM D1056.

2. Maximum thermal conductivity factor of 0.26K at 70 degrees F. mean temperature, density of 5-6 pounds per cubic foot, and a water vapor transmission of 0.1 perms.

E. Emergency Generator Exhaust and Gas Boiler Flue Insulation: 1. 3 inches thick hydrous calcium silicate on pipe, fittings, and muffler. 2. 3 inches thick Temp Matt on flexible connections. 3. Fasteners: 14 gage galvanized iron wire on 9 inch centers. 4. Fittings: Fabricated from pipe insulation. 5. Finish: 1200 degree F. glass cloth.

6. Maximum thermal conductivity factor of 0.5 K at 500 degrees F. mean temperature and a density of 11 pounds per cubic foot.

F. Hot Water Storage Tank Insulation: 1. 3 inch thick block insulation with V-grooves.




2. Secure with 24 gage galvanized wire or 1/2" wide galvanized bands on 12 inch centers. 3. Finish with exposed smooth coat of insulating cement and when dry apply Foster GPM mastic with glass

cloth reinforcing. G. Heat Exchanger Insulation: 1. 1-1/2" thick calcium silicate applied in sectional form or lags cut to fit, apply dry. 2. Fasteners: 24 gage galvanized wire or 1/2" wide galvanized bands on 12 inch centers. 3. Finish: Smooth coat of insulating cement and finish with 1200 degrees F glass cloth applied with fire

resistant adhesive. H. Density of 14 lbs. per cubic foot and factor thermal conductivity of 0.42K. I. Tape: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer or 3M adhesive EC-1329. J. Insulating Cement: All-purpose mineral wool cement. K. Glass Cloth Jacket: Factory sized white, standard weight, with 1-1/2" minimum longitudinal pressure sealing lap and

seal strips for butt joints. L. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Flame resistant glass fiber adhered to outside of a 1 mil aluminum foil sheet with longitudinal pressure

sealing lap and seal strips for butt joints. 2. End cement perm rating shall not exceed 0.05. M. Weatherproof Metal Jacket (Exterior Above Ground Only): 1. Damage and corrosion resistant, longitudinal seam closure, joint construction capable of locking insulation

and jacket securely in place. 2. Seal and weatherproof butt joints with factory supplied 2 inch wide "snap-straps" lined with plastic sealing

compound secured with outer holding band. 3. Jacket Material: O.016 aluminum. N. Molded Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 1. Rigid molded sectional pipe covering with integral factory jacket. 2. Comply with ASTM C547. 3. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.23K factor at 75 degrees F. mean temperature. 4. Alkalinity: Less than 0.6 percent. O. Foamed Plastic Insulation: 1. Closed cell. 2. Comply with ASTM C534.




3. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27K factor at 75 degrees F. mean temperature. 4. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.1 perms. P. Cellular Glass Insulation: 1. Comply with ASTM C552 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.33 K factor at 75 degrees F. 3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.00 perm-in. Q. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwrap Blanket Insulation: 1. 2.2/2.3 inches thick, 3/4" pcf density fiberglass blanket with UL approved aluminum foil vapor seal facing

reinforced with fiberglass scrim, laminated to 30 lb. kraft paper, R = 6.5. 2. Comply with ASTM C553, TYPE I, Class B-4. 3. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24K factor at 75 degrees F. R. Rigid Fiberglass Ductboard Insulation: 1. Comply with ASTM C612. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24K factor at 75 degrees F. 3. Provide scrim foil facing having a minimum 3 pcf density, 2 inches thick. S. Accessories: 1. The following accessories shall be used in the application of thermal insulation: a. PVC fittings cover and PVC jacketing: 1) Certain-Teed "Snap Form". 2) Manville Corp. "Zeston". 3) Proto. b. Vapor Seal Mastic: 1) Benjamin Foster 30-86 or 30-25. 2) Childers CP-30. c. Lagging Adhesive: 1) Benjamin Foster 81-42W. 2) Childers CP-50. d. Breather Mastic: 1) Benjamin Foster 45-00 or 30-86. 2) Childers CP-10. e. Insulation Bonding Adhesive (to metal): 1) Benjamin Foster 85-20, or 85-15.




2) Childers CP-82. f. Insulating and Finishing Cement: 1) Fibrex Inc. FBX Super Blend Cement. 2) Manville Corp. No.375 Insulating and Finishing Cement. 3) Keene Corp. Super Powerhouse. g. Coatings: Sealfas G-P-M mastic or accepted equivalent. h. Fire Resistive Mastic: As manufactured by Benjamin Foster or accepted equivalent. i. Sealants: 81-33 as manufactured by Benjamin Foster or accepted equivalent. j. Staples: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel outward clinching type. k. Wire: 16 gage, copper weld wire. l. Bands: 3/4 by 0.015" thick galvanized steel. m. Glass Fabric: 1) Woven open mesh type glass fabric conforming to ASTM D1668. 2) Type I asphalt treated for below ground use. 3) Type III light color organic resin treated for aboveground or below ground use. n. Insulation Jackets: 1) Jackets inside building shall comply with fire hazard classifications as specified.

Insulation jackets shall not support mold growth. 2) Vapor Barrier Jackets:

a) For Cold Pipelines (-30 degrees F. to 60 degrees F.): Perm rating not more than 0.05, ASTM E96, Procedure A. Puncture resistance not less than 50 beach units.

b) For Air-conditioning Ducts: Perm rating not more than 0.05, ASTM E96, Procedure A. Puncture resistance not less than 25 beach units.

2.03 SYSTEMS INSULATION BY TYPE A. Interior Domestic Hot Water Supply/Return Piping Insulation: 1. Molded Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 1 inch thick with pre-sized factory applied FRJ jacket of glass cloth with

longitudinal lap and butt joint strips with self-sealing adhesive. 2. Contractor's Option: Foamed plastic insulation, 1 inch thick. B. Electric Water Cooler Drain, Cold Drainage Piping Refrigerant Suction Piping, and Interior Condensate Drain Piping

Insulation: 1. Foamed Plastic Insulation: 1 inch thick with field applied vapor barrier mastic at joints. C. Interior Concealed Ductwork Insulation:




1. Flexible fiberglass Ductwrap Blanket Insulation: a. 2.2 inches thick, 3/4 pcf density. b. 2.0 inches thick, 1-1/2 pcf density. D. Interior or Exterior Exposed Ductwork Insulation: 1. Rigid Fiberglass Ductboard Insulation: 2 inches thick, 3 pcf density, with field applied fab and mastic finish consisting of a 10 x 10 glass fabric imbedded in 2 coats of a white breather weather barrier mastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation according to applicable codes and regulations. B. Except as specified, install materials according to manufacturer's recommendations and specifications for obtaining

conformance to construction documents. C. Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use and

samples required for acceptance shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached listing manufacturer, brand name, and a description of material.

D. Provide allowances for expansion/contraction, and wall and manhole penetrations. E. Run continuous through wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations. F. Insulation materials shall not be applied until: 1. Test results specified in other sections of these specifications are completed and accepted. 2. Rust, scale, dirt, and any other foreign material have been removed. 3. Ductwork or piping material are clean, dry, joints firmly butted together, and tightly sealed at all joints,

seams, and fittings. G. Wrap butt joints with a 3 inch wide strip of the same material as the jacket. H. Provide aluminum jackets over the insulation where sealant is required. I. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry at all times. J. Duct Materials: 1. Internal duct lining is not allowed.




2. Duct materials solid exposed to the airflow shall be noncombustible metal. 3. Duct insulation for thermal or acoustical purposes shall be separated from airflows by solid metal. 4. Provide natural noise attenuation procedures, as recommended in ASHRAE, Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA), and industry good engineering practices. 5. Fiberglass ducts or ductboards shall not be used to convey air. K. Protection Shield: Where pipe or tubing insulation pass through hangers, provide: 1. For Piping 4 inches and smaller: A protection shield, 180 degree arc, 16 gage galvanized sheet metal

covering, minimum 12 inches long. 2. For Piping Larger than 4 inch diameter: A protection shield, 180 degree arc, 16 gage galvanized sheet metal

covering, minimum 18 inches long. 3. Hangers not exceeding maximum spacing distances recommended by insulation manufacturer to prevent

crushing or compressing insulation. L. Ductwork sizes shown on drawings are actual internal "air side" dimensions. M. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves on Insulated Piping: 1. Provide pre-molded glass fiber fittings wired or taped on and adhered with canvas jacket. 2. Terminate insulation and jacket neatly and finish with insulating cement troweled to a bevel and of the same

thickness as adjoining insulation. 3. Vapor seal insulation on cold systems. N. Vapor Barriers: 1. Intact and continuous. 2. Do not install with staples. O. Omit Pipe Insulation From the Following: 1. Screwed unions, except at "cold drains" and air- conditioning wastes. Terminate insulation neatly at both

sides of unions with insulation cement. 2. Discharge lines from safety and relief valves. 3. Nickel or chrome plated piping. P. All ductwork shall be insulated, except as noted below: 1. Outside air intake ductwork. 2. Exhaust air ductwork. 3. Supply air ductwork, exposed in air-conditioned spaces. (Note: Ceiling plenums, and mechanical equipment

rooms are not to be considered air-conditioned spaces.) Q. Ceiling supply air registers located on perimeter rooms and corridors shall be field insulated with flexible fiberglass

ductwrap insulation as specified. Insulation shall cover the upper body and installation flanges.




R. All appurtenances subject to condensation shall be protected as necessary and covered with vapor seal mastic. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Molded Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Installation (Hot Water Supply/Return): 1. Tightly butt together sections of insulation on pipe runs sealing longitudinal seams of jacket with self-

sealing laps. Position longitudinal seam so seam is on bottom to prevent dirt and moisture infiltration. Seal end joints with 3 inch wide straps of vapor barrier tape. Seal ends of insulation with vapor seal mastic at valves, fittings and flanges.

2. Cover valves, fittings, and flanges with insulation similar to adjacent pipe covering, or one piece PVC cover sections as specified.

B. Foamed Plastic Insulation Installation (Return Suction Piping, Interior Condensate Drains, and Electric Water Cooler

Drains): 1. Insulation shall be slipped on pipe without slitting. Butt joints shall be sealed with the manufacturer�s

recommended adhesive. 2. Where slip-on techniques are not possible, the insulation shall be carefully slit and applied to the pipe. Seal

joints with the manufacturer�s recommended adhesive. 3. Insulate valves and fittings with fabricated foamed plastic insulation, or one piece PVC cover sections as

specified. 4. Provide mastic vapor barrier for chilled water service insulation for areas subject to conditions of 90 degrees

F or 85 percent relative humidity or higher. C. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwrap Blanket Insulation Installation: 1. Apply insulation to duct with joints tightly butted. Prepare stretch-out dimensions and cut out insulation so a

2 inch minimum overlap is created that will overlap the facing and insulation at the other end, and the adjoining seam. Install so insulation is not excessively compressed at duct edges. Foil face shall be on outside. Seams shall be stapled approximately at 6 inches on center with outward clinching staples.

2. On ductwork having a 24 inch or larger dimension, insulation shall be secured to the bottom of the duct with mechanical fasteners spaced at not more than 18 inches on center. and held in place with washers or clips. Cut off protruding pin after clips are secured.

3. Seal all insulation joints, pinheads, tears, punctures, washers, clips, and staples with 2 coats of a vapor barrier mastic type sealant, reinforced with 1 layer of 4 inch woven glass fabric.

D. Rigid Fiberglass Ductboard Insulation Installation: 1. Apply insulation tightly and smoothly to duct. 2. Secure insulation on the sides and bottom of duct by impaling insulation over pins or anchors located not

more than 18 inches apart and held in place with washers or clips. 3. Cut off protruding pins after clips are secured and seal with vapor barrier mastic.




4. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. 5. Seal ductwork joints, punctures, and pin heads with a vapor barrier mastic type sealant. 6. Insulation shall be continuous through walls and floors except at fire dampers and at combination smoke/fire

dampers. 7. Finish with field applied fab and mastic finish consisting of a 10 x 10 glass fabric imbedded in 2 coats of

white breather weather barrier mastic. E. Equipment F. Electric Duct Heaters: 1. Insulate all sides of electric duct heaters (except control panel side) installed in supply air ducts, as

specified for supply air ductwork.

END OF SECTION



FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 15195 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 21 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15195 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Refer to City of Miami Front End Documents. ∆ Addendum #4

1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Service meters. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Grout. 9. Concrete bases.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct

shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and

mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and

weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.

sys1

Polygon




C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 4. Service meters. Indicate capacities. Include bypass fittings and supports. 5. Dielectric fittings. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals. 7. Escutcheons.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and

details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. 1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50).

2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and pressure regulator assembly.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated

with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.

E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Field quality-control reports. I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves pressure regulators and service meters to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and

protect from direct sunlight. D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating

service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Architect's written permission.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces.

Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS




A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded

ends. 4. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and

gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral

wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and

PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm).

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shut-off when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)

and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free

area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).

D. Basket Strainers:




1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)

and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free


E. T-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance. 2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57 percent free


F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free

area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.03 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness

and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying with

AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch

and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve

body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.




2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"



F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.




2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"



G. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities


H. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and

"Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities


I. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.




1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. c. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and

"Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities


J. Valve Boxes:

1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of

length required to operate valve.

2.05 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES

A. Automatic Gas Valves: Comply with ANSI Z21.21. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by

one of the following: a. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson. b. Honeywell International Inc. c. Johnson Controls.

3. Body: Brass or aluminum. 4. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 6. Normally closed. 7. Visual position indicator.

B. Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson. b. Dungs, Karl, Inc.




c. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. d. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

3. Pilot operated. 4. Body: Brass or aluminum. 5. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 7. 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil, and replaceable. 8. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure. 9. Normally closed. 10. Visual position indicator.

2.06 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by

one of the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.

3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and

no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent

of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent

piping. 13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.




2.07 SERVICE METERS

A. Diaphragm-Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by

one of the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Invensys.

3. Case: Die-cast aluminum. 4. Connections: Steel threads. 5. Diaphragm: Synthetic fabric. 6. Diaphragm Support Bearings: Self-lubricating. 7. Compensation: Continuous temperature. 8. Meter Index: Cubic feet. 9. Meter Case and Index: Tamper resistant. 10. Remote meter reader compatible. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. 12. Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.5-inch wg. 13. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 1.0 percent.

B. Rotary-Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.3.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Invensys.

3. Case: Extruded aluminum. 4. Connection: Flange. 5. Impellers: Polished aluminum. 6. Rotor Bearings: Self-lubricating.

7. Compensation: Continuous temperature. 8. Meter Index: Cubic feet. 9. Tamper resistant. 10. Remote meter reader compatible. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. 12. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 2.0.

C. Turbine Meters: Comply with ASME MFC-4M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Invensys.




3. Housing: Cast iron or welded steel. 4. Connection Threads or Flanges: Steel. 5. Turbine: Aluminum or plastic. 6. Turbine Bearings: Self-lubricating.

7. Compensation: Continuous temperature. 8. Meter Index: Cubic feet. 9. Tamper resistant.

10. Remote meter reader compatible. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. 12. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 2.0.

2.08 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. c. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or welded

end connections that match piping system materials. B. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. c. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or welded

end connections that match piping system materials.

C. Dielectric-Flange Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.




2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. 4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt sleeves,

phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or welded

end connections that match piping system materials. 2.09 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends

and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 2.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and

identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in

piping section affected. C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.03 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.




B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer.

3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

D. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

1. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. a. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. b. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

2. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe

material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

4. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in

Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." 3.04 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for mechanical installations.




D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel

to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. New Piping: Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast-brass type with polished

chrome-plated finish. e. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type and set

screw. f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. g. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed. h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. i. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. j. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe

penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in

requirements. O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets.

Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.




a. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to

outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor

channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. R. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping

installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.

5. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions. S. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. T. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. U. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.

Unions are not required at flanged connections. V. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. W. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. X. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section

"Meters and Gages."




3.05 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground.

B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.

C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set. D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen in vent outlet

if not integral with service regulator. E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from service

meters. F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators. G. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal

Fabrications" for pipe bollards.

3.06 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes. C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and

testing. D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing. E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

3.07 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.




4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified.

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where

damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying

with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. 3.08 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in

Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod

sizes: 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8: Maximum span, 84 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.




3.09 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor

of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each

gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each

appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below

subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.11 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel gloss. d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves,

and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior latex gloss. d. Color: Gray.

2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.




c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd gloss. d. Color: Gray.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to

match original factory finish.

3.12 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions

than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel

rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and

anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Use 3000-psig, 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.14 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.

3.15 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following: 1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire

terminated in an accessible location. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings

with protective coating for steel piping. B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.




C. Branch Piping in Cast-in-Place Concrete to Single Appliance: Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-

copper fittings and brazed joints. Install piping embedded in concrete with no joints in concrete.

D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.16 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match

adjacent piping. 2. Annealed-temper, tin-lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.

3. Annealed-temper, copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. 4. Aluminum tube with flared fittings and joints. 5. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 3. Drawn-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with

protective coating for steel piping. E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings

with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. 3.17 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and

listed by an NRTL. B. Underground: 1. PE valves. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze plug valves.

3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron, lubricated plug valves.

3.18 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.




2. Two-piece, full port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

END OF SECTION



PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 8 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 15 Section "Valves” for valves used ad supply stop.

B. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties.”

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain

similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Delete paragraph below if no electrical components.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.




G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

H. The terms “Listed” and “labeled” shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, article 100.

I. Design Concept: The drawings indicated types of plumbing fixtures and are based on the specific descriptions, manufactures, models, and numbers indicated. Plumbing fixtures having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Cotr. Burden of proof for equality of plumbing fixtures is on the proposer.


A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer’s protective packing, crafting, and covering.

B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed. C. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed. D. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 12 of

each type. E. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate compartments for each type and

size of extra materials listed above. F. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 2 of each

type. G. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS




A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated on the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Water Closets: American Standard, Inc. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. Kohler Co. 2. Urinals: American Standard, Inc. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products Kohler Co. 3. Lavatories: American Standard, Inc. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products Kohler Co. 4. Sinks: Elkay Manufacturing Co. Just Manufacturing Co. 5. Mop Basins: Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. E.L. Mustee & Sons, Inc. Florestone Products Co. Inc. 6. Water Coolers: Elkay manufacturing Co. Filtrine Manufacturing Co. Haws Drinking Faucet Co. 7. Showers: Symmons Powers 8. Toilet Seats: Bemis Mfg. Co. Church Seat Co. Olsonite Corp. 9. Flushometers: Coyne & Delany Co. Sloan Valve Co. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Flush valve Operations. 10. Commercial/Industrial Cast-Brass Faucets:




American Standard, Inc. Chicago Faucet co. Kohler Co. Speakman Co.

11. Miscellaneous Fittings (Except Faucets): Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. Bridgeport Plumbing Products, Inc. Central Brass Manufacturing Co. Chicago Faucet Co. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. Kohler Co. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Manufacturing Co., Inc. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 12. Supports: Josam Co. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified in "Plumbing Fixture

Data Sheets" at the end of Part 3 of this Section. 1. Fixtures that are wall hung or abut a wall or other surfaces shall have the abutting edges, surfaces, etc.,

factory ground true and square. 2. Exposed Pipes: All water supplied to fixtures which are exposed to view (excepting from flush valves to

fixture spud and/or otherwise specified) including waste pipe from traps thru the walls, shall be of I.P.S. brass pipe with cast brass screw banded fittings, all of which shall be polished chromium plated. The excepted flush valve pipe shall be of heavy gauge seamless brass tubing which shall also be chromium plated. a. Supplies & Stops: All lavatories and sinks shall be provided with Chicago Faucet Co. chrome

plated, loose key stops either of the straight or angle type as required by type of fixture and chrome plated flexible supplies.

b. Supplies, wastes, and traps, etc., which are in cabinet work below fixtures shall be considered exposed to view.

c. Test connections shall be of the same pipe material as the domestic water supply piping. 3. Wall Flanges: All water supplies and wastes, where they enter wall or pipe spaces, shall be finished

with one-piece brass polished chromium plated wall flanges. 4. Fixture Trim Finish: All exposed metal fixture trim shall be polished chromium plated finish.




5. Flow Controls: Unless included with fixture trim, Dole, Chicago Faucet or Hays chrome plated flow control units shall be provided in the supplies to all sinks, lavatories and showers except Service Sinks, and Safety Showers. Controls shall have a capacity of l-l/2 G.P.M. for both hot and cold water supply to sinks and lavatories and a maximum of 1.5 G.P.M. for showers.

6. Lavatory Waste and Trap: Each lavatory, unless otherwise specified with fixture, shall be provided with a McGuire 155A cast grid drain with 1-1/4" tailpiece, McGuire No. 8872 - 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 semi cast "P" trap.

a. Equal wastes and traps as manufactured by fixture manufacturer will be acceptable. 7. Water Closet Seats: Each water closet, unless otherwise specified, shall be provided with a Bemis

1955-SSC white elongated open front seat, with combination self-sustaining and check hinge. 8. Fixture Supports: All wall hung fixtures shall be supported by means of chair carriers as hereinafter

specified. a. Urinals, Lavatories and Electric Water Coolers: All wall hung urinals, lavatories and electric

water coolers shall be supported by means of a chair carrier with stub feet equal to Zurn ZX extruded system for thin wall construction.

B. Support categories are: 1. Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. Urinal chair carriers shall

have bearing plates. 2. Chair Carriers, Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. 3. Reinforcement: 1/4-inch by 6-inch steel plates attached to wall construction, to secure floor-mounted

and special fixtures to wall. 4. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required to match fixture. 5. Provide supports where specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type requirements

above. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping systems to

verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on

Drawings. B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required:




1. Carriers for following fixtures: a. Wall-hanging fixtures supported from wall construction. 2. Chair carriers for the following fixtures: a. Wall-hanging urinals. b. Wall-hanging electric water coolers. 3. Heavy-duty chair carriers for the following fixtures: a. Fixtures where specified. ∆ Addendum #4 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written installation

instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards. B. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals. C. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are

specified. D. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework. E. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation. F. Set mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout. G. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture. H. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. I. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets

and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. J. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant in

accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Match sealant color to fixture color.

∆ Addendum #4 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

sys1

Polygon




B. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in

other sections of Division 15. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water

pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.

3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units

and controls. C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and flushometers

having controls, to provide proper flow and stream. D. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials. F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." 3.07 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the Owner. 3.08 CARRIERS A. All carriers shall be fully bolted to floor and installed as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lavatory/Lavatory HC:

a. Rectangular structural steel uprights with integral welded heavy steel foot, cast iron concealed arms. Model 17100 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

2. Urinal: a. Rectangular structural steel uprights with integral welded steel foot, hanger bracket, lower

bearing plate. Model 17810 by Josam or accepted equivalent.




3.09 INSPECTION A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of

the work have been corrected. 3.10 EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURE CONNECTIONS A. Provide necessary material and labor to connect fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections including

fixtures and equipment specified and furnished in other sections. B. Supply Pipe Cut-off Valves: 1. Equip supply pipes to each item of equipment or fixture (except faucets furnished with an integral stop)

with a cutoff valve to enable isolation of the item of equipment or fixture for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other items of equipment or fixtures.

C. Supply Pipe Support: Anchor supply piping to all items of equipment or fixtures to prevent movement. D. Templates: Furnish templates and rough opening dimensions to fabricators of countertops and case work for lo-

cation and sizes of openings for faucets and sink.

END OF SECTION



PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 8 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and pressure gages.

B. Basic Mechanical Material and Methods.

C. Basic Mechanical Requirements.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Domestic Water Piping: 150 psig. 2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:

1. Backflow preventers and water regulators. 2. Water hammer arresters and trap seal primer valves and systems. 3. Hose bibbs, hydrants. 4. Cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors. 5. Vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies. 6. Sleeve penetration systems.

D. Shop drawings.

E. Field test reports.

F. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Trap seal primer valves and systems.





A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials and installation.

E. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water

piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Water Filter Cartridges: Equal to 200 percent of amount installed for each type and size indicated. 2. Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each key-operated hose bibb and

hydrant installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers

specified.

2.02 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following characteristics: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.




2. 125-psig minimum working pressure. 3. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber. 4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.

B. Trap Seal Primer System: Factory-fabricated, automatic-operation assembly for wall mounting with the following: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 2. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing inlet and manifold with number of

NPS 1/2outlets as indicated. 3. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover. 4. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power. 5. Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010. 6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurized metal-tube cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

C. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M for compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet. 1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 2. Finish for Service Areas: Rough brass. 3. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 4. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 5. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key. 6. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle Operating key. 7. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 8. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.




D. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 4-lb/sq. 0.0625-inch-thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe with galvanized steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Available Manufacturers: 2. Manufacturers:

a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Division.

3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

E. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

F. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap

seal primer valve connection. 1. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. 2. NPS 2-1/2and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

G. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection.

H. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension with counterflashing.

2.04 CLEANOUTS

A. General: Size cleanouts as indicated on drawings, or where not indicated, same size as connected drainage piping except where indicated otherwise.

B. Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, cast-iron body with straight threads and gasket seal or taper threads and bronze closure plug. Cleanouts installed in floors above grade shall have flashing flange and clamping ring. Cleanouts for installation in floors not having membrane waterproofing may be furnished without clamping ring.

C. Cleanout, Type FCO-1: 1. Description: Cast iron floor cleanout with adjustable housing, bronze closure plug and round scoriated

nickel bronze cover secured with vandal proof screws. Provide carpet cleanout markers where floors are to be carpeted and flashing flange and ring where required.

2. Prototype: Zurn Z-1400 with options as required by specifications.

D. Cleanout, Type YCO-1 (Exterior): 1. Description: cast iron floor cleanout with adjustable housing, bronze closure plug and round heavy-duty

scoriated cast iron tractor cover secured with vandal proof screws. 2. Prototype: Zurn Z-1400 with options as required by specifications.




E. Cleanout WCO-1: 1. Description: Round stainless steel smooth wall access cover, center screw, coated cast cleanout

perrule with no hub-connection and bronze countersunk plug. 2. Prototype: Zurn ZS-1469.

2.05 FLOOR DRAINS

A. General: Size outlets as indicated on drawings.

B. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, cast-iron body, with seepage flange and clamping device. Floor drains for installation in floors not having membrane waterproofing may have seepage flange without clamping device. Floor drains for use as area drains in exterior slab on grade may be furnished with anchor flange instead of seepage flange and clamping device.

C. Floor Drain, Type FD-1 (Interior, Unfinished and Finished Floor Areas): 1. Description: Duro cast iron body with flashing collar, bottom outlet, and adjustable strainer head with

5” Sq. 2. Prototype: Jay R. Smith 2005

D. Acid Waste (FD-2): 1. Polypropylene body with plain end bottom outlet. Polypropylene combination invertible membrane

clamp with adjustable polypropylene head and stainless steel frame and grate. 2. Jay R. Smith 3020.

2.06 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof Drains: Coated cast iron roof drain with sealing gasket, large polypropylene locking dome, non-puncturing clamp ring with internal gravel stop, adjustable top with wide roof flange, large sump with anchor flange and bottom outlet inside caulk connection. No. Z-100-E4 by Zurn or accepted equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout

is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.




3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feetfor piping NPS 4and smaller and 100 feetfor larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors.

E. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

F. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

G. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates

depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inchtotal

depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inchtotal

depression. 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring.

Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing.

Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

J. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.

K. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

L. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.

M. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.

N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.




O. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.

3.03 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft, 0.0938-inchthickness or thicker. Solder joints of

lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft, 0.0625-inchthickness or thinner. 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange

extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around

specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section 07600 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." “Flashing and Sheet Metal."

∆ Addendum #4

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

sys1

Polygon




G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.


A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each backflow preventer, thermostatic water mixing valve, water tempering valve, trap seal primer system, grease interceptor, grease recovery unit and oil interceptor. 1. Text: Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and

emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. 2. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”; “Mechanical Identification" for

nameplates and signs.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled trap seal primer systems and their installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks

exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor

rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain trap seal primer systems interceptor. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

∆ Addendum #4

END OF SECTION

sys1

Polygon



Header has been updated - ∆ A∆ A∆ A∆ Adddddendum #4dendum #4dendum #4dendum #4

DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc.



SECTION 15485 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:

1. Household, electric water heaters.

2. Tankless, electric water heaters.

3. Accessories.

4. Related Section: Division 15 Section “Plumbing Specialties” contains requirements that relate to this

Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-

installed wiring.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products furnished comply with

requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based

on specific units indicated. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be considered.

Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."







C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

E. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:

F. ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings," for commercial

water heaters.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may

have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of water

heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include heating elements, storage tanks.

2. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion:

3. Heating Elements: (5) Five years.

4. Storage Tanks: (5) years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Heaters" for

cautions about naming products and manufacturers.

2. Point-of-Use, Tankless, Electric Water Heaters:

a. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.

b. Eemax, Inc.

c. PVI Industries, Inc.

3. Commercial, Storage, Electric Water Heaters: a. Lochinvar Corp.

b. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.

c. State Industries.

2.02 POINT-OF-USE, TANKLESS, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with UL 499.







B. Construction: Without hot-water storage.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 2. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.

3. Interior Finish: Materials complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water tank linings.

4. Jacket: Aluminum or steel, with enameled finish, or plastic.

5. Temperature Control: Flow-control fitting in inlet piping.

2.03 COMMERCIAL, STORAGE, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with UL 174 or UL 1453, and listed by manufacturer for commercial applications.

B. Storage Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure rating.

1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping connections, relief valve,

drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread, 2-inch NPS and smaller.

2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water

tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except connections and controls,

fiberglass, polyurethane foam or manufacturer standard.

4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.

C. Heating Elements: Two, unless otherwise indicated; electric, screw-in, immersion type.

1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

D. Anode Rod: Factory-installed, magnesium.

E. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.

F. Special Requirement: NSF 5 construction.

2.04 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with

ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less than

water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank.

B. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combination relief valve.

1. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.

C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping.

1. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.

D. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.







E. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONCRETE BASES

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer.

Concrete bases are usually not provided for household and commercial water heaters in finished spaces.

B. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and

Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

3.02 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases. 1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand, bracket,

suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

B. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are

accessible.

C. Anchor water heaters to substrate.

D. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing

elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge to outside of building pointing down 6” above grade.

E. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.

F. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining.

G. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end

drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15

Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.

H. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure

gages.

I. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.







J. Fill water heaters with water.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions.

D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.

E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections. Arrange

wiring to allow unit service.

F. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Delete paragraph below if factory-authorized service representative is not required.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

C. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.

3. Check for piping connection leaks. 4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.

5. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.

6. Energize electric circuits.

7. Adjust operating controls.

8. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping system

application requires higher temperature.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and

maintain water heaters.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping, troubleshooting,

servicing, and maintaining equipment.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."







3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION



PIPING (HVAC) 15510 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 7 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15510 PIPING (HVAC) Section was added ∆ Addendum #4 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections:

1. 07920 - Sealant and Caulking. 2. 15060 – Hangers and Supports. 3. 15510 - Valves. 4. 15905 - Controls and Instrumentation 5. 15955 - Tests (HVAC).

1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A47-90(95) Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. A53-96 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A183-83(90) Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. 4. A197-87(92) Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. 5. A234/A-96b Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and

High Temperature Service. 6. A536-84(93) Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. B32-96 Specification for Solder Metal. 8. B88-96 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 9. D1784-96 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Pipe and Fittings: Manufacturer's name and mill test reports. B. Piping Systems: 1/4" to 1 foot scale shop drawings.

sys1

Polygon




PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Size Description A. TYPE "A" PIPING

1. Pipe: To 2" Copper per ASTM B88, Type "L" hard drawn. 2. Fittings: To 2" Wrought copper, solder joint type per ANSI B16.22 made with 95-5 or silver solder per

ASTM B32, as specified. B. Type "B" Piping (Refrigerant)

1. Pipe: To 3" Copper tubing per ASTM B88 a, type "K" hard drawn, with silver soldered connections. 2. Fittings: To 3" Wrought copper, soldered type. Where required for connection to gauges and control

devices tubing not larger than 3/8" o.d. may be Type K soft (annealed) with flared tube or double ferrule compression fittings suitable for high pressure.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install as shown on Construction Documents, or as necessary to complete working systems according to

Construction Documents, a system of piping and valves to control and isolate apparatus and appurtenances. 1. Construction Documents are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. 2. Piping may be offset, lowered, or raised as required or as directed at site. This does not relieve Contractor

from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect suitable for the work intended according to specifications and accepted by A/E.

B. Arrangement:

1. Piping shall not interfere with removal of other equipment or devices. 2. Piping shall not block access to doors, windows, panels, or other access openings. Piping shall be arranged

to facilitate removal of tube bundles. 3. Provide flanges or unions, as applicable for type of piping specified, in piping at connections to equipment

and piping interfering with access or tube pull space. 4. Place and install piping to not interfere with installation of the equipment and ducts. 5. Piping shall be installed to insure noiseless circulation. 6. Place valves and specialties to allow easy operation and access, and valves shall be regulated and packed

and glands adjusted at completion of work before acceptance. 7. Piping shall be erected and pitched to insure proper draining.




C. Connections:

1. Install piping connections to pumps and other equipment without strain at piping connection. 2. Contractor shall be required as directed to remove bolts in these flanged connections or disconnect piping

to demonstrate that piping has been so connected. 3. Provide at pump suction and discharge flexible connections with ends to match connecting pipe.

D. Where equipment requiring different arrangement or connections from those shown is accepted, it shall be

responsibility of Contractor to install equipment to operate properly and with intent of Construction Documents and specifications. 1. When directed by A/E, submit documents showing proposed installation. 2. If proposed installation is accepted, make incidental changes in piping, duct work, supports, insulation,

wiring, heaters, panelboards, etc. Provide additional motors, controllers, valves, fittings, and other additional equipment required for proper operation of system resulting from selection of equipment, including required changes in affected trades.

E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at building, work into place without springing or forcing, and

properly clear windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be allowed unless accepted by A/E.

F. Install piping mains, branches, and runouts to allow for free expansion and contraction without developing leaks or

undue stressing of pipe. Stresses to be within allowable limits of ANSI Code B31.1-73 for pressure piping. G. Pipe Sizes: If size of any piping is not evident in Construction Documents, request instructions from A/E as to proper

sizing. Changes resulting from Contractor's failure to request clarification shall be at his expense. H. In mechanical rooms, avoid piping runs over electrical panels and other electrical equipment, if necessary provide a

suitable sheet metal shield or gutter. Submit shop drawings showing proposed shielding at each location. I. Each mechanical trade is responsible for lines and levels of ductwork and piping based on reference lines and bench

marks established by General Contractor for general work. J. Provide the following:

1. Di-electric couplings between dissimilar metals. 2. Drain valves at low points of each system to enable complete drainage. Valves shall be full line size. 3. Capped hose connections on drain valves. 4. Drain piping from pump glands, relief valves, to spill over open sight drains, floor drains, or other acceptable

discharge points terminating drain line with plain end (unthreaded) pipe. 5. Caps of plugs for open ends of pipe lines and equipment during installation to keep dirt and other foreign

matter out of pipe and equipment.




6. Temporary cross-connections, valves, oversize flushing connections, and pumps required to thoroughly flush systems.

7. Shut-off valves and unions or flanges at each branch and in supply and return to each item of equipment such as pumps, coils, automatic valves, etc., for isolation of equipment without complete system shutdown.

8. Gate valve on capped services for extension to equipment furnished under other sections or by the Board when shown on Construction Documents.

9. Expansion loops with adequate anchors and guides to absorb pipe expansion as shown on Construction Documents or as required. Expansion joints are acceptable if accepted in advance by A/E.

10. Safety relief piping from fusible plugs, safety valves, relief valves, etc., full relief port size from equipment equipped with these devices, whether shown on Construction Documents or not. Discharge pipe safety relief piping to the building exterior in an accepted manner.

11. Auxiliary cooling piping and connections for compressors, etc., whether shown on the Construction Documents or not.

K. Cleaning and Flushing: Take every precaution to remove dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from each length of

piping before making connections in field. After each section of piping is installed, flush with clean water, except where specified otherwise. A temporary flushing connection shall be arranged for each section of piping and flushing arranged for all piping. Water required for flushing shall be furnished by Contractor.

L. Threads on screwed piping shall be clean cut to exact length. Ream piping after cutting threads. Accepted joint

compound shall be applied to male thread only. Lamp wick in joints is prohibited. M. Reduction in pipe sizes shall be made with eccentric reducers or reducing elbows. Bushings are not allowed.

Reducers in water piping shall have flat side up to facilitate venting.

3.02 PIPING TYPE A. Above ground chilled water, hot water and condenser water piping shall be Type "A" piping. B. Below ground condenser water piping shall be Type "D" piping. C. Below ground chilled water and hot water piping shall be Type "E" piping. D. Make-up water and pump drainage piping shall be Type "B" piping. E. Chemical treatment piping shall be Type "C". F. Refrigerant piping shall be Type "F".




3.03 OPTION: At the Contractor's option, the following type connections may be used for aboveground chilled water pipe in equipment rooms and condensing water systems only, instead of the screwed/welded connections specified for type "A" pipe and fittings.

A. Mechanical Pipe Couplings:

1. Mechanical pipe couplings may be used instead of unions or welded, flanged, or screwed pipe connections. 2. Couplings shall be self-centering and shall engage and lock in place grooved or shouldered pipe and pipe

fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Fittings shall provide some degree of angular pipe deflection, contraction and expansion.

3. Coupling housing clamps shall consist of 2 or more malleable iron castings complying with ASTM A47. Housing clamps shall hold in place a composition watersealing gasket designed to allow internal water pressure increase the seal's watertightness.

4. Coupling assembly shall be securely held together by 2 or more trackhead, square or oval neck, steel bolts. Bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel and shall be according to ASTM Al83.

5. Pipe fittings connected to mechanical pipe couplings shall have grooved or shouldered ends and shall be fabricated of malleable iron casting according to ASTM A47 or ductile iron Grade 60-45-10 according to ASTM A536.

6. Before couplings are assembled, pipe ends and outsides of gaskets shall be lightly coated with cup grease or graphite paste to ease installation.

7. Pipe grooving shall be according to pipe coupling manufacturer's specifications. Pipe sizes 3/4" through 24 inches may be cut-grooved or roll-grooved, except that pipe and tubing with wall thicknesses less than minimum recommended by manufacturer for cut-grooving shall be roll-grooved without removal of and metal.

8. Pipes, fittings and valves shall be provided with grooved or shouldered ends according to pipe coupling manufacturer's guidelines. Flanged or threaded end valves may be used with grooved adapters.

9. Couplings and fittings shall have a working pressure of 125 psig or 150 percent of system operating pressure, whichever is greater.

10. Entire coupling installation shall be according to manufacturer's guidelines. 11. Couplings shall be manufactured by Victaulic or Gustin-Bacon.

3.04 PIPE JOINTS, FITTINGS, AND CONNECTIONS TO VALVES AND EQUIPMENT AND BENDS IN PIPING A. 2 inches and smaller shall be made with screwed fittings and B. 2-1/2" and larger shall be made with welded and flanged fittings. 3.05 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Install refrigerant piping to insure continuous automatic return of oil to compressors at system capacities. Oil traps

shall be properly sized, located, and installed. Install piping according to standard engineering practice as recognized




by ASHRAE. B. Refrigerant piping shall be installed to allow removal of DX coil. C. Refrigerant pipe shall be cut with an accepted type of pipe cutter and reamed before brazing. Pipe shall pitch sharply

toward the reamer during reaming and cuttings shall be carefully removed after reaming. Moisture and dirt shall be removed from piping before joining as follows:

1. A clean, lintless cloth shall be drawn through the tubing by means of wire or an electrician's tape, to remove

coarse particles of dirt and dust. 2. A clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene shall be pulled through pipe, until the saturated cloth

is not discolored by dirt. 3. A clean, lintless cloth saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, shall be drawn through the tubing. A

visual inspection shall be made to see that tubing is perfectly clean. 4. Cleaning shall be completed by pulling through a clean, dry, lintless cloth.

D. Joints shall be brazed with silver solder containing 49 percent silver and having a melting point of 1,120 degrees F. E. Pressure test lines before charging. When testing is complete, evacuate lines by the double evacuation method,

breaking each vacuum with the system refrigerant to 5.16 mm of pressure absolute. Bring first vacuum break to 2 psig and final break to normal operating pressure. The compressor shall not be used to evacuate the system.

3.06 PIPING PENETRATIONS TO FLOORS AND FIRE WALLS: A. Joints around pipe penetrations shall be packed with fire safing insulation and sealed with fire and smoke barrier caulk

as specified in Section 07270 Firestopping and Fire and Smoke Barrier Caulking. 3.07 UNDERGROUND CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING: A. Fittings and O-ring slip couplings shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. The services of a factory trained field service instructor shall be required during critical stages of installation and

testing. C. After thrust blocks are poured and cured, a hydrostatic test of 125 psig (1-1/2 times operating pressure) shall be

required for 4 hours. D. After hydrostatic test, a final backfill of selected earth shall be hand-placed and hand-tamped in 4 inch layers to 12

inches minimum over the top of the jacket. Remainder of the backfill shall be free of large boulders, rocks over 6




inches in diameter or foreign matter. The backfill operation can now be completed by any convenient means. Do not use tracked or wheeled vehicles for tamping.

END OF SECTION



FUEL STORAGE/DISTRIBUTION 15555 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 6 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15555 - FUEL STORAGE/DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 3 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

B. Section 15160 - Excavation & Backfill Section 02221 – Excavating, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities, under sitework Division 2. ∆ Addendum #4 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Governing Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 30-84 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit copies of shop drawings for each tank. Drawings shall include all critical

dimensions and show locations of all fittings and accessories, i.e., manways, ladders, hold-down straps, heating coils, etc.

2. Catalog Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature. 3. Certification Plate: U.L. labels for petroleum products shall be affixed to each tank. 4. Installation Instructions: Include copies of manufacturer's latest installation instructions. 5. Calibration Charts: Contractors shall include copies of manufacturer's latest calibration charts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following is a list of manufacturers' names of material and equipment that is acceptable: ITEM OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER Gate, Globe, and Check Valves: Hammond Valve Corp.

sys1

Polygon




Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Ball and Butterfly Valves: Hammond Valve Corp. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Aboveground Fuel Storage Tank: Convault, Lube Cube, Hallmark, Phoenix, Envirovault Fuel Piping: Perm Alert ESP, Smith, Red Thread, Ameron, Fibercast Leak Detection System: Tracetek, Perm Alert ESP Tank Level Gauge: Pneumercator Co., Inc. Dam Tanks: Simplex 2.02 STORAGE TANK A. General

1. Provide the Convault Aboveground Tank System approved for listing under U.L. Standard 2085, Aboveground Tanks, Protected Type, Secondary Containment with Vehicle Impact and Projectile Resistance. Unit must comply with all provisions of U.F.C. 79-7, Appendix A-II-F. The tank system shall be approved for Phase I and Phase II Vapor Recovery by the California Air Resource Board for gasoline and methanol. Contact Core Engineered Solutions, Inc. at (703) 563-0320 or (800) 826-572.

B. Products

1. Primary Tank: The primary tank shall be rectangular in shape, constructed with a minimum of 10 Gauge thick carbon steel, listed per U.L. Standard 142, and meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 30. Welds shall be continuous on all sides, conforming to the American Welding Society Standard for continuous weld. The tank shall be warranted for a minimum of 30 years by the manufacturer.

2. Concrete Encasement: The concrete encasement shall be 6” thick of monolithic reinforced concrete with minimum design strength of 4000 psi at 28 days. Concrete enclosure shall encase and protect both the primary steel tank and the secondary containment. The concrete design shall include the following for long-term durability: less than 3% air entrainment, water-reducing admixture, and steel reinforcing bars. Concrete encasements with seams will not be approved. Concrete placement shall be Monolithic (without seams) and placement methods shall ensure the absence of voids on all sides and beneath the steel tank. An exterior steel jacket covering the concrete vault will NOT be permitted. The steel tank shall be prestressed at factory by pressurizing the primary steel tank to 5 psi during concrete encasement to allow for expansion and contraction of the primary steel tank. Vault enclosure shall have concrete support legs of unitized monolithic construction raising the concrete enclosure a minimum of 3” above the ground to meet visual inspection requirements. A mid-level seam or other joint construction which could compromise the liquid tightness (secondary containment) and fire protection capability of the




vault is not permitted. All opening shall be from the top only. 3. Fire Resistance: The tank system shall be designed and tested to provide 2 hour fire protection for the

primary tank as per U.L. 2085 2-hour furnace fire test and 2 hour simulated pool fire test. No steel members shall penetrate the walls or floor of the concrete encasement to assure isolation from pool fire Heat.

4. Thermal and Corrosion Protection: The tank construction shall include thermal insulation equivalent to .25 inches of polystyrene to protect against temperature extremes and to protect against corrosion by isolating the steel tank from the concrete or other corrosive material. All steel exterior to the concrete encasement shall be anti-oxidant powder coated to inhibit corrosion and meet A.S.T.M. B117.

5. Secondary Containment with Leak Monitoring: The tank system shall include an impervious barrier of 30 mil high-density polyethylene to contain leaks from the primary tank. A monitoring tube shall be located between the inner tank and secondary barrier.

6. Spill/Overfill Containment: The tank system shall include a U.L.listed 15-gallon spill/overfill container

manufactured as an integral part of the primary tank, surrounding the fill pipe and protected by 2 hour fire rating of the enclosure. The spill/overfill container shall include a stick port and normally closed valve to release spilled product into the main tank. Exterior steel shall be anti-oxidant powder coated to inhibit rust.

7. Overfill Protection: Overfill protection shall be provided by the following methods: a) direct reading level gauge visible from fill pipe access; b) valve rated for pressurized delivery located within fill pipe to close automatically at 95% full level; c) high level alarm activated by a float switch at a specific fill level.

8. Exterior Finish: The tank system shall be a low maintenance exposed aggregate or architectural (STO, Permacrete, Thorocoat) exterior concrete finish. Fiber clad steel, or painted steel vault tanks are not acceptable.

9. Signage: Tanks shall be marked on all sides as per state and local codes. Signs will be recessed in concrete exterior to insure against damage during off-loading, refilling or general functions.

10. Venting: Tank system shall include a 2” atmospheric vent and emergency venting in accordance with N.F.P.A. 30.

C. Tank Size: Provide vaulted tanks at locations as indicated on the drawings. 2000 gallon diesel fuel vaulted tank

and 1000 gallons gasoline. 2.03 PIPING A. Fuel Piping: 1. Black Steel, ASTM A53 or A120 with threaded joints and fittings, aboveground, exposed. B. Fittings: Malleable iron, 150 psi Class, ANSI B16.3; or forged or rolled steel, ASTM A234; or socket welding;

ANSI B16.11. C. Miscellaneous Fittings: 1. Vent Cap: Cast iron body, threaded ends, with 40 mesh brass screen. 2. Fill Units: 4 by 4 inch tight fill adaptor, brass, with gasketed lockable cap. 3. Drop fill, supply and return pipe shall be glass fiber reinforced plastic, stainless steel or aluminum. 4. Prime Valve: Cast iron body, double-poppet valve, bronze seat and discs, normal pressure limit 25 psi;

temperature limit 350 degrees F, and brass screen.




5. Prime Valve Extractor Fitting: Cast iron with cap and gasket. Furnish extractor tool. 2.04 DOUBLE CONTAINMENT PIPING UNDERGROUND A. Smith Red Thread IIA piping system with interior carrier pipe manufactured in epoxy resin rated for 250 psi and

temperature of up to 150 degrees F. and exterior sleeve of the same material but of larger sizes. Pipe shall meet all requirements of ASTM 02996. Fittings, adhesives, supports, guides and anchors shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. Underground carrier piping may be schedule 40 black steel pipe & fittings with Ameron fiberglass containment piping. Installation and burial methods shall comply with all manufacturer's requirements. Care shall be taken especially of the thermal expansion qualities and the stress load limits of the piping. Total Containment, Fibercast, Inc. and R & G Sloane Contain-It are acceptable alternatives.

2.05 FUEL LEVEL GAUGE A. For the storage tank, provide transmitter, level switch (for low level alarm) tubing and flexible conduit. Connect

transmitter output to generator control panel for monitoring of fuel high and low level and dearrangement alarm. 2.06 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM A. Furnish and install continuous leak detection and monitoring system for aboveground double-wall fuel tank,

sumps, and piping. System shall include electronic alarm and locator module, fuel and water sensing cable, graphic display map, and auxiliary equipment. The system shall detect the presence of liquid fuel at any point along the fuel cable's length, sound an alarm, and determine the location of the leak. The sensing cable shall be such construction that no metallic parts are exposed to the environment. The system shall provide pre-connectorized sensing cable and components. The system shall be UL listed and FM approved. The system shall be Pneumercator Liquid Level Control or approved equal.

1. The fuel sensing cable shall be installed in the interstice of the double wall tank to detect leaks from the

primary containment. The water sensing cable shall be installed in the interstice to monitor for water entering through the outerwall.

2. Fuel sensing cable shall be installed in the annulus of double wall pipes at the six o'clock position. The minimum clearance required between the primary and secondary pipes is 3/4 inch.

Sensing cable shall be installed using a pull rope through the pipe annulus. Coordinate installation of pull rope with mechanical contractor.

Access to the pipe annulus shall be provided to allow installation of the sensing cable. Accesses shall be located at all entries, terminations, branches, after 180 degrees of pipe bend, and for every 250 feet of straight pipe. Accesses shall be minimum 4 inch diameter and shall extend from the pipe to the surface of grade. Coordinate location of access points with mechanical contractor.

3. A fuel sensing cable shall be installed in the floor of the piping sump, if required, and vertically up the

length of the sidewall. 4. A graphic display map shall be prepared after completion of the installation from as-built drawings. The

map shall indicate the location of the tanks, piping, sumps, sensing cable, and alarm module. The map shall correlate alarm module distance readouts to specific locations within the tank and piping system.




The map shall be located adjacent to the alarm module. 5. The Pneumercator System shall be commissioned upon completion of the installation to verify proper

installation and operation. Commissioning shall be performed by manufacturers authorized representative in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Manufacturer will have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing specified tank for commercial use and

document at least 10 installations in satisfactory operation. B. The tank system including accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and applicable fire and environmental codes. All state and local permits shall be obtained by contractor prior to installation.

C. Tanks shall be installed on a reinforced concrete base slab designed to support the fully loaded tank. Protective

bollards shall be installed where required by state and local codes. D. Electrical work shall be in accordance with applicable codes and shall be rated for hazardous area as required.

Electric feed for dispensing pumps shall include an emergency shutoff switch located per code requirements. Tanks shall be electrically grounded in accordance with N.F.P.A. 78.

E. The system installation shall be inspected and approved by the system supplier or its certified contractor. The

system supplier shall submit a comprehensive checklist of quality and safety items critical to the system and verify that the installation has been in accordance with these standards and applicable fire and environmental codes.

F. Any proposed equal alternatives to this specification must be submitted for review and approval prior to bid

opening. If the proposed alternative is deemed to present a better solution, review expenses will be waived. Ifthe proposed alternative is denied or deemed to be equal, all expenses incurred for such review is to be paid for by the bidder prior to submittal of bid.

3.02 OPERATION TESTS A. Prior to final acceptance, perform an operation test of all equipment installed under this section to demonstrate

the workability and functioning of the system. Perform these tests in the presence of the Architect. 3.03 INSPECTION AND LEAKAGE TESTS A. Tank Test: After tank is set in place, test by applying internal air pressure of five psig for 30 minutes without loss

of pressure. Leaks shall be repaired in accordance with instructions of the manufacturer and under the personal supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. Tank shall be retested until all leaks are repaired.

B. Fuel Pipe Test: After all piping is in place, exposed, and before connection to the tank and equipment, test with

air to 75 psig for 30 minutes without loss of pressure.




C. Secondary Containment Pipe: After all piping is in place and exposed, test with air to 10 psig for 30 minutes

without pressure loss. D. Final System Test: After pipe connections to tank and equipment have been made, backfilling and paving

complete, the entire system shall be tested with five psig air for 30 minute without loss of pressure. E. Any tank, pipe or equipment that does not pass the tests specified shall be repaired or replaced, at no additional

cost to the Owner and tests repeated until all items are approved. 3.04 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM A. Execution 1. Sensing cables shall be installed after tank and piping installation and testing is completed. 2. Fuel and water sensing cables shall be installed in the tank interwall space to detect the presence of fuel

or ground water, and a Fuel sensing cable shall be installed in the piping sump. 3. Fuel sensing cable shall be installed continuously along piping exceeding 25 feet in length.

Containment piping shall be sized to provide a 3/4 inch clear space and access to the pipe annulus shall be provided per the manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Fuel sensing cable shall be installed on the floor around the perimeter of emergency generators and interior fuel tanks and piping.

5. System installation details shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations. The completed system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's authorized representative.

END OF SECTION

CITY OF MIAMI CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS PROGRAM

FIRE STATION No. 13



AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 15670




SECTION 15670 - AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Related Sections:

1. 15240 - Vibration Isolation.

2. 15510 - Piping (HVAC).

3. 15515 – Valves, Hangers, and Specialties.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit properly identified product data before starting work.

B. Unit Schedule: Provide air cooled condensing units of type, size, efficiency rating, and capacity shown in unit

schedule.

C. Submit, before starting work, a current, legible, and clear copy of the following required documentation from the

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

1. EPA Technician Certification.

2. EPA Refrigerant Recycling/Recovery Equipment affidavit.


A. Regulatory Requirements (EPA):

1. EPA Technician Certification: According to EPA Section 608, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990, individuals

doing service, repair, or disposing of air conditioning and refrigeration equipment (including installers,

contractor employees, in-house service personnel, and anyone else who performs installation, maintenance,

or repair of HVAC/refrigeration equipment) shall be certified by EPA.

2. Refrigerant Recycling/Recovery Equipment: According to EPA Section 608, Clean Air Act Amendments of

1990, owners of refrigerant recycling or recovery equipment (including contractors and others responsible for

HVAC equipment servicing) shall submit a signed statement from the appropriate EPA Regional office, stating

that they have sufficient certified equipment to perform on-site recycling or recovery.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Air Cooled Condensing Units:

1. Bohn-Dunham-Bush.

2. Carrier.

3. Lennox.

4. McQuay.


FIRE STATION No. 13







5. Trane.

6. York.

2.02 EQUIPMENTS

A. Air Cooled Condensing Units:

1. Casing:

a. Fully weatherproof unit, suitable for outdoor installation.

b. Fabricate casing of galvanized or zinc-coated steel and finish with baked enamel.

c. Fabricate structural members of continuous galvanized steel with steel channel.

d. Provide openings for power and refrigerant connections and adequate removable panels for service

access.

e. Unit shall be welded hermetic type with internal vibration isolation and be covered with a shield to

muffle operating sound.

f. Compressor shall have both thermal and current sensitive overload devices and internal high

pressure protection.

2. Condenser Fans: Direct drive, propeller-type fans arranged for vertical discharge.

a. Resilient mount fans factory statically and dynamically balanced and provide heavy gage safety

guards.

3. Condenser Coils:

a. Copper or Aluminum Plate Fins: Mechanically bonded to copper tubes.

b. Adequately protect fins against hail damage on coils for 20 tons or greater.

c. Fin Coating: Heresite or Bronze Glow epoxy coating.

4. Control Center and Accessories:

a. Factory wired controls within a weatherproof cabinet.

b. Accessories:

1b. Heating/cooling thermostat with sub-base suitable for continuous or automatic fan

operation.

2b. Head pressure control to maintain proper condensing temperature at low ambient

temperature.

3b. Low voltage control transformer.

4b. Indoor fan relay.

5. Refrigerants:

a. R410A

6. Efficiency Rating: Air cooled condensing unit shall comply with FPL Commercial/Industrial Energy

Conservation Program Standards.


FIRE STATION No. 13







PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations, accepted Shop Drawings, and as indicated on Construction

Documents.

END OF SECTION



Header has been updated - ∆∆∆∆ Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4

AIR HANDLING UNITS 15720



Footer has been updated - ∆∆∆∆ Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4

SECTION 15720 - AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY



2. 15860 - Air Filtration Equipment.

3. 15810 - Ductwork.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA): Standard 210 Fan Performance Testing.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI B3.16 Roller Bearings, Load Rating, and Fatigue Life.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 90A Air- conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

D. Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: Standard 410 Air Cooling and Heating Coils.

E. Standard Mechanical Code (SMC), 1994 with 1996 revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, list of materials, cooling coil performance data, fan performance data, and fan curves.

Performance data shall be certified by unit manufacturer.


A. Cooling coils shall bear the ARI label.

B. Air handlers and components shall be ARI certified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Air Handling Equipment: Trane is the basis of Design.

1. Trane.

2. Dunham-Bush.

3. McQuay.

4. Carrier.

5. York.








2.02 FACTORY FABRICATED AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Unit shall be of arrangement and type shown on Construction Documents with design capacities as scheduled.

Design units for floor mounting. Central station air handler and components shall be ARI certified and complete

with fans, coils, motors, v-belt drives, belt guards, drains, filter sections, and accessories as specified.

B. The entire air handler shall be constructed of galvanized steel removable panels. The removal of side panels

shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Contractor shall be responsible to provide connection flanges

and all other framework that is needed to properly support the unit.

C. Fan Section

1. Fans: The fan shall consist of a centrifugal forward curved wheel, dynamically balanced and belt driven.

Dual wheels are not acceptable due to center bearing being inaccessible for repair or replacement.

a. Fan wheel shall be dynamically and statically balanced at factory.

b. Maximum fan rpm shall be 25 percent less than the first critical speed. Fan wheel diameter

shall be as indicated.

c. The motor shall be open drip-proof with permanently sealed ball bearings. Motors shall be factory run tested.

d. Manufacturer shall provide unit arranged for draw-through application. Blow-through is not

acceptable due to condensate carryover.

2. Fan shaft shall be solid or hollow, ground and polished steel, and coated with rust inhibitor.

a. Drives shall be selected for the mean rpm of the drive to match the fan operating rpm at design

fan rpm.

3. Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated, ball bearings, self-aligning type. Bearings shall be designed for an average life of 200,000 hours. Provide extended lubrication lines with external grease fittings.

4. Electric Heating Coils: Factory-wired and installed one or two stage electric heating coil with over-

temperature protection and magnetic contactors.

D. Coil Section: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins rated for 300 psig and 200

degrees F. Coils shall be tested with 450 psi air pressure under water at the factory. Coils shall be capable of

being rotated in the field for left hand or right hand connection.

1. Drain Pan: The IAQ drain pan(s) shall be constructed of smooth, corrosion resistant material. Acceptable materials include polymer or 304 stainless steel. The bottom of the drain pan shall be

sloped in two planes that pitch the condensate to the drain connection. Units without 2-way sloped

drain pans shall coat drain pans with anti-microbial treatment. To eliminate bottom sweating under

drain pan manufacturer shall provide drain pan with double wall internally insulated construction.

2. Insulation: Foil-Faced - Interior surface of unit casing is acoustically and thermally lined with a

minimum of 1 inch, R-value 4.3, 1.9 lb./cu. ft. foil-faced insulation. All exposed edges are sealed to

prevent fibers in the airstream. Meets NFPA-90A, UL 181 and bacteriological standard ASTM C 665.

E. Filters:








1. As specified under Section 15860 - Air Filtration Equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendation.

B. Casing seams shall be airtight.

C. Condensate drains shall prevent any accumulation of condensate inside air handlers. P-trap on condensate drain

on unit shall have a vertical leg equal to the maximum static pressure of the air handler.

D. Seal coils at perimeter to prevent air bypass and shall be installed to be completely drainable through header

drains.

END OF SECTION



DUCTLESS AIR CONDITIONER 15736 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 3 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15736 – DUCTLESS AIR CONDITIONER

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductless air conditioning unit. B. Controls. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15010 – Standard Mechanical Requirements. ∆ Addendum #4 B. Section 15071 – Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control. ∆ Addendum #4 C. Division 16 – Electrical. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ARI 210 – Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment. B. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code. C. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A – Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. The IT Room shall be provided with supplemental DX air conditioning units to provide 75 Degree F conditioned air

with a relative humidity ranging from 50 to 60 percent RH during unoccupied periods such as evenings, weekends and holidays throughout the entire year.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon




1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a ductless air conditioning unit with manufacturer’s name, model number, SEER and capacity identified. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of 01330 “Submittal Procedures”. City of Miami Front End Documents. ∆ Addendum #4 B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service and locations. C. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Friedrich B. Mitsubishi C. Daykin D. Samsung 2.02 DUCTLESS AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. Split system, air-to-air packaged DX ductless air conditioning unit having the capability of cooling the required

capacity of outside air from 91 Degree Fdb/78 Degree Fwb so as to supply room air at 75 Degree Fdb/50 percent RH. B. Ductless unit to be factory assembled and pre-wired suitable for low pressure operation, consisting of an indoor and

outdoor unit, controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil and refrigerant piping. C. The ductless unit drain pan shall be provided with a float switch to automatically shutoff the unit should the drain pan

fill an indicated, a clogged condensate drain line. D. Ductless units installed in the equipment room and each telecommunication room shall be electrically connected to

sys1

Polygon




the facility emergency generator so that it is operable during electrical outages. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. For areas containing ceilings, provide a ceiling recessed type unit. Should a wall unit be required, install a unit as

high as possible under provisions of the manufacturer’s instruction. B. Identify unit with its tag showing the building number, unit number and area served. For example, label the Data

Room unit “AC-4A.” C. Coordinate installation with architectural and electrical work. D. During construction, keep unit inlet and outlet sealed with polyethylene sheet to prevent accumulation of construction

dust in unit. E. Prior to startup, clean inside of unit thoroughly of all construction dust. F. Do not operate unit until area has been cleaned and filters are in place. G. Electrically interlock unit to the primary chilled water system air handler unit serving the area so that unit operates

during unoccupied periods when the primary system is shutdown and, in addition, to the facility emergency generator. H. Unit to be fully charged with refrigerant. I. Correct any deficiencies in unit operation.

END OF SECTION




DUCTWORK 15810




SECTION 15810 - DUCTWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings before ordering or any work commences.


A. Each sheet of metal used in construction of ductwork must be factory labeled with the gauge of metal.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Ductwork Accessories: Section 15820

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Section 15850

C. Tests: Section 15955

D. Mechanical Systems Insulation: Section 15180

E. Variable air volume boxes: Section 15840

∆∆∆∆ Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4

F. HVAC Insulation: Section 15080

∆∆∆∆ Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4 Addendum #4

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All ductwork shall be galvanized steel fabricated and installed in accordance with SFBC, NFPA Codes, SMACNA

Standards, and ASHRAE Standards.

2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Includes all supply ductwork to air distribution outlets, all exhaust, outside and return air ductwork. Velocities not

to exceed 1,500 FPM and static pressures not to exceed 2 inches w.c.




DUCTWORK 15810




B. Provide galvanized steel ductwork, designed, constructed, installed and tested in accordance with latest edition of

SMACNA, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

C. Flexible Insulated Ductwork:

1. Flexible ductwork, used to connect diffusers with branch duct, shall be spiral formed out of 3,003 bright

reflective finish, aluminum alloy and mechanically locked, bonded within fabric, insulated with 1-1/2

inch thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass flexible insulation and covered with a vapor barrier of aluminum metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh, elastomer back coated. Duct shall meet N.F.P.A. 90A

and 90B requirements and be listed as Class 1 Air Duct Material, U.L. Standard 181. It shall be as

manufactured by Wiremold Company, Venture Type VTKC Thermaflex II, Clevaflex.

D. Splitter dampers shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, one gauge heavier than the ductwork in which they are

located.

E. Turning vanes shall be provided in all rectangular and square elbows and shall be of same material as ductwork in which they are installed. Turning vanes shall be airfoil type, double thickness factory fabricated.

F. Low pressure ductwork round fittings shall be galvanized sheet metal type. Fittings to be provided with twist ring,

butterfly damper, quadrant operation and insulation guard.

G. Longitudinal seams and transverse joints shall be flat and smooth inside. Any slip joints shall be made in

direction of air flow.

2.03 RATTLES AND AIR NOISES

A. All ductwork shall be free from rattles and air noises when in operation. All ductwork must present a smooth

interior and joints must be tight and shall be caulked to accomplish this object. Ductwork visible through grilles

to be painted flat Black. All rubbish and trash to be removed from ducts before installing air distribution products

and setting dampers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install low and medium velocity ductwork as shown on drawings.

B. Before systems are tested and balanced, all ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned and blown out.

C. Where interferences arise during construction, make transition or division of ductwork on basis of pressure drop

equivalent to original size. Obtain approval from Architect-Engineer prior to fabrication.

3.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. All seams and joints in supply, return, outside air and exhaust ductwork shall be made as airtight as possible.

Seal all supply duct joints with sealer as hereinafter specified for field sealing of medium pressure ductwork.




DUCTWORK 15810




B. Flexible ductwork shall be installed as indicated on drawings. Duct length shall be no longer than 7 feet. Duct

shall be adequately supported to prevent kinks and sharp bends. Install as per manufacturer's recommendations

and as shown on drawings.

3.03 DUCTWORK SUPPORT AND HANGERS

A. Provide support and hangers as per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

B. Hangers shall be galvanized steel hung from inserts or clip angles secured to structure with expansion bolts in

shear or tension as follows:

1. Floor slab: In tension.

2. Structural Beams: In shear, 12 inches minimum from bottom of beam.

3. Hangers shall be bent under ductwork at least 2 inches. Hangers for ducts over 48 inches wide shall be

secured to bottom and sides of duct.

C. Where ducts pass through floors and walls, galvanized supporting angles shall be installed on at least two sides

of the ducts and shall be rigidly attached to ducts and floors and/or walls. The space between the duct and

floor/wall opening shall be sealed airtight with materials that will maintain required fire integrity. Where ducts

penetrate the floors, install 4 inch high waterproof curb.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install all materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's standard printed specifications, recommendations, instructions and specified herein.

B. All duct dimensions shown on drawings are clear inside dimensions.

END OF SECTION




DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15820




SECTION 15820 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's data for approval before ordering parts or commencing any work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Dampers: Manual volume dampers shall be of multi-blade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Where space does not permit use of multi-blade type, single blade damper

shall be submitted for approval. Provide galvanized steel dampers one gauge heavier than duct in which

installed.

Control dampers shall be with parallel blades for 2-position control, or opposed blades for modulating control.

Provide blades of steel, heavy-duty molded self-lubricating nylon bearings, with galvanized steel finish and

aluminum touch-up.

Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows:

1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. Airguide Corp.

3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Penn Ventilator Co.

5. Rusking Manufacturing Co.

B. Fire and Smoke Dampers:

1. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish, fusible link,

lock in closed position, and with the following additional features:

a. Damper blade assembly shall be curtain type. Damper shall provide 100 percent free area.

b. Blade material shall be steel to match the casing or stainless steel. Ruskin model IBD2 or equal. Dampers shall be constructed and installed per U.L. 555 and shall bear U.L. label.

2. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be motor driven in smoke mode with casing constructed of

galvanized steel with multi bonded enamel finish, fusible link, and multi-blade type stainless steel

blades, with electric motor equipped with instant closure clutch, stainless steel cable damper blade

linkage, motor mounting bracket, and wire leads for connecting to smoke detector, and with the motor

mounted outside air and bear UL label. Leakage rating shall be Class I. Dampers shall be automatic

reset type in smoke mode. Ruskin FSD or equal.

3. Smoke dampers shall have all features of combination fire/smoke dampers except the fusible links.

4. Acceptable manufacturer's are as follows:

a. Air Balance, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.

c. Arrow Louver and Damper




DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15820




d. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.

e. Penn Ventilator Co.

f. Phillips - Aire

g. Ruskin Manufacturing Co.

C. Duct Hardware: Duct hardware shall be manufactured by one Manufacturer for all items on the project (test Hole

cover, quadrant locks, etc.)

D. Duct Access Doors: Duct access doors shall be 16"x16" or maximum size duct will allow, and placed in

strategically accessible locations, constructed of same or greater gage as ductwork served, insulated doors for

insulated ductwork, flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct with one

side hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for

larger doors.

Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows: 1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Corp.

3. Register and Grille Manufacturing Co., Inc.

4. Rusking Manufacturing Co.

5. Ventfabrics, Inc.

6. Zurn Industries, Inc.

E. Flexible Connections: Flexible duct connections shall be used wherever duct work connects to vibration isolated

equipment. Flexible connections shall not be less than five inches long and shall be of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment, make an airtight joint, provide

adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also be capable of

absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows:

1. American/Elgen Co.

2. Duro Dyne Corp.

3. Flexaust (The) Co. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install as per manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION



FANS 15821 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 2 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15821 - FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 06100 – Rough Carpentry. ∆ Addendum #4 2. 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3. 09200 - Metal studs, Lath, Suspension Ceiling, Plaster, and Stucco. 4. 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's catalog cuts and technical data before starting work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fans shall be constructed and rated according to AMCA Standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Ceiling Mounted Fans, Centrifugal Type: 1. Nutone Co. 2. Penn Ventilator Co. 3. Carnes. B. Curb Mounted Exhaust Fans: 1. Carnes 2. Greenheck. 3. Penn Ventilator Co. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Ceiling Mounted Fans, Centrifugal Type: 1. Enclose in an acoustically insulated housing and provide with an integral back draft damper and aluminum

inlet grille. 2. Provide capacities and electrical requirements as shown in schedule.

sys1

Polygon



FANS 15821 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 2 of 2 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

3. Statically and dynamically balance fan wheels at factory. B. Curb Mounted Exhaust Fans: 1. Weatherproof Housing: Heavy gage galvanized steel with integral roof curb and weather protected intake

hoods with filter finished with 2 coats of off-white epoxy enamel inside and out. a. Top of housing shall be removable for service access. 2. Forward curved centrifugal wheel and scroll housing fabricated of galvanized steel (direct) (adjustable belt)

drive assembly (single) (two) speed motor all mounted on common (direct) (adjustable belt) base plate, complete with vibration suspension system.

a. Provide adjustable pitch motor pulley and quick adjust belt tension and alignment system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the

work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install according to the manufacturer's recommendations and accepted Shop Drawings.

END OF SECTION




POWER VENTILATORS 15830




SECTION 15830 - POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings before ordering or any work commences.


A. Fans shall be factory fabricated, assembled, tested and finished.

B. Fans shall be constructed and rated in accordance with AMCA Standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Capacities and electrical requirements shall be as shown in the drawings schedule.

2. All ventilators shall be provided with belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal ventilators and shall consist

of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base and

accessories (i.e., bird screens, dampers, roof curbs, etc.). 3. Roof ventilators shall be provided with aluminum prefabricated roof curbs, 12 inches high.

4. Fan wheels and shafts shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.

B. In-line Exhauster: Shall be galvanized steel construction, centrifugal type with flanged ends.

C. Gravity Intake: Shall be storm-proof aluminum louvered penthouse.

D. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilator: Centrifugal fan (ceiling- mounted ventilator) shall be designed for installation in ceiling wall, or concealed in-line applications and shall include housing, fan wheel, grille, remote fan speed

control and accessories.

E. Fans shall be as manufactured by Greenheck, ILG, Jenn Industries, Loren Cook, Carnes, Ammerman Co., Central

Blower, Cincinnati Fan, Essick Air Products or Quietaire Corp.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's standard printed specification, instruction and recommendations.

B. Roof curbs shall not be installed under this section.




POWER VENTILATORS 15830




C. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.

END OF SECTION



LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK 15841 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 5 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15841 - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 07270 - Firestopping and Fire and Smoke Barrier Caulking. 2. 15260 - Vibration Isolation. 3. 15280 - Thermal Insulation (HVAC). 4. 15855 - Air Handling Units. 5. 15910 - Duct Accessories. 6. 15940 - Outlets (HVAC). 7. 15990 - Tests (HVAC). 1.02 REFERENCES A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA), latest edition: 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible). 2. High Velocity Duct Construction Standards. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): C. National Electrical Code - 1999 (NEC) - 70. D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) 62 - Ventilation for

Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Ductwork: 1. Provide 1/4" scale composite Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be coordinated with other trades before

submitting. 2. Catalog Cuts: Low pressure ductwork, duct sealer, and turning vanes. 3. Catalog Cuts, Ratings, and Performance Data: Flexible ductwork. B. Casings, Plenums, and Housings: Details of construction. C. Provide details of proposed typical ductwork fittings including: 1. Seams and joints. 2. Joint sealing. 3. Elbows, vaned and radius. 4. Transitions and Offsets.




5. Taps and outlet frames. 6. Branch connections and tees. D. Duct Hanger System: Catalog cuts and shop drawing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible: Genflex or Flexible Technologies. B. Ductwork and Fittings: 1. Metalaire. 2. Semco. 3. Spiramatic. 4. United Sheet Metal. C. Ductwork Adhesive Sealing Compound: 1. Interior: a. Benjamin Foster #30-02. b. 3M Hardcast. 2. Exterior: a. Flexomastic No.210 with fiberglass membrane for weatherproofing as manufactured by

Weatherproofing Products, Inc. or accepted equivalent. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed according to the SMACNA Standards, except as shown on drawings or

specified. B. Ductwork shall have manufacturer's gage stamp intact. 2.03 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Includes ductwork from low pressure air handlers, exhaust, and outside and return air ductwork. Velocities shall not

exceed 1600 fpm for rectangular and 2,000 fpm for round ductwork. Static pressures not to exceed 2 inches WG. B. Provide galvanized steel ductwork, designed, constructed, installed and tested according SMACNA - "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards" and as shown on drawings. Ductwork to have manufacturer's gage stamp. Provide cross-breaking or beading to prevent flexing, but do not reduce gage of metal below that required for flat ductwork sheets. Minimum gauge for all ductwork shall be 24 gauge.




1. Ductwork gages shall comply with the following: Greatest Dimension US Gage 0" to 12" 24 13" to 30" 24 31" to 60" 22 61" to 90" 20 over 90" 18 2. Ductwork dimensions shown on the drawings are clear inside dimensions. C. Splitters and Dampers: 1. Provide as shown and as necessary for proper regulation of air distribution system. 2. Locate dampers to be easily adjustable after work is completed. Provide a set screw locking device for each

splitter or damper. On insulated ducts, place locking device on a bracket so set screw is on surface of insulation and is easily operable. Provide Armaflex plug. Use Ventlock or Young Regulator.

3. Sheet Metal Gage: Construct splitters and dampers of galvanized steel 1 gauge heavier than duct where installed.

D. The following ductwork and plenums shall be insulated, unless noted otherwise. 1. Outside air ductwork at air handler =S closets. ∆ Addendum #4 E. Flexible Insulated Ductwork: 1. Lightweight duct, core of corrosion resistant reinforcing wire helix permanently bonded within fabric,

insulated with 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass flexible insulation and covered with a vapor barrier of aluminum metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh, elastomer back coated. Duct shall meet NFPA 90A requirements and be listed as Class 1 Air Duct Material, UL 181. Minimum R=6 insulating value.

2. Flexible Collar Connections: Make connections to and from units with collars not less than 4 inches long, secured by peripheral strap iron, using 30 ounce neoprene coated glass fabric by Ventglas or accepted equivalent. Collar connections from rectangular ductwork to flexible ductwork shall be "Low Loss".

3. Manufacturers: a. Atco Rubber Products. b. Genflex. c. Thermaflex II. d. Venture Type VTKC. e. Wiremold Co. F. Turning vanes shall be provided in square elbows and shall be of same material as the ductwork. Turning vanes shall

be of airfoil type, double thickness factory fabricated.

sys1

Polygon




G. Install ductwork materials and accessories according to the latest edition of SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards as specified. These written specifications shall take precedence in case of conflict.

H. Thoroughly clean ductwork before attempting test and balance. I. Where interferences arise during construction, make transition or division of ductwork on a basis of pressure drop

equivalent to the original size. Obtain acceptance from A/E before fabrication. J. Seams And Joints at Exhaust, Supply, Return and Outside Air Distribution Systems: All joints shall be sealed whether

longitudinal or transverse Make airtight as possible. Seal joints with 4 inch wide cloth tape with adhesive sealing compound, except ductwork exposed to weather shall have joints sealed with specified joint sealant.

K. Apply Flexomastic weatherproofing with smooth finish to joints of ductwork exposed to weather as recommended by

joint sealant manufacturer, with at least 2 final coats of No.210. L. Sound Levels: Discharge sound levels for occupied areas shall not exceed a rating of RC 35 as defined in ASHRAE. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install ductwork as shown on drawings. B. Before systems are tested and balanced, ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned and blown out. C. Where interferences arise during construction, make transition or division of ductwork on basis of pressure drop equivalent to original size. Obtain approval from A/E before fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install ductwork materials and accessories according to the latest edition of SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Construction

Standards as specified. In case of conflict with these specifications, the most restrictive shall govern. B. Seams and joints in all ductwork shall be made airtight. Seal duct joints with sealer as specified for field sealing of

high pressure ductwork. Make exhaust ducts passing through return air chases airtight. C. Install flexible ductwork shall be installed in sizes to match diffuser necks as indicated on drawings schedules. Duct

length shall be not less than 5 feet and no longer than 8 feet. Duct shall be adequately supported to prevent kinks and sharp bends. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings.

3.03 DUCTWORK SUPPORTS AND HANGERS




A. Provide support and hangers according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 1. Hangers: Hang horizontal ducts at intervals not exceeding 8 feet, with hangers of 16 gage by 1 inch wide

galvanized band iron on ducts up to and including 30 inches wide and 12 gage by 1-1/2" wide galvanized band iron on ducts over 30 inches wide. Extend hangers down and fasten underneath duct in addition to both sides of duct.

B. Hanger straps shall be hung from inserts or clip angles secured to structure with expansion bolts in shear or tension

as follows: 1. Roof Slab: In tension. 2. Structural Beams: In shear, 12 inches minimum from bottom of beam. 3. Joists: Use existing forming bolts openings only. Hangers shall be bent under ductwork at least 2 inches.

Hangers for ducts over 48 inches wide shall be secured to bottom and sides of duct. 3.04 DUCT PENETRATIONS TO FLOOR AND FIRE WALLS A. Joints around duct penetrations shall be packed with fire safing insulation and sealed with fire and smoke barrier caulk

as specified in Section 07270, Firestopping and Fire and Smoke Barrier Caulking. Section 07920, Sealants and Caulking.

∆ Addendum #4

END OF SECTION

sys1

Polygon




AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 15850 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc.

RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 4 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15850 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers.

B. Ceiling Grilles.

C. Louvers.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15810 - Ducts.

B. Section 15816 - Non-Metal Ducts.

1.03 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

C. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

D. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

E. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.

F. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Grille: Air outlet/inlet provided without an integral opposed blade damper.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets under provisions of ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate performance of exterior louvers under provisions of AMCA 500. In addition, all exterior louvers shall possess a

Miami-Dade Notice of Approval (NOA) indicating that they conform to the protocol for hurricanes wind force.

C. Acoustical: Noise generated at each terminal inlet, outlet or other air distribution device shall conform to the RC Noise

Rating Procedure outlined in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. Classrooms shall be designed

for a noise criteria range of RC-25(N) to RC-30(N).

D. Pressure drop across any air distribution device shall not exceed 0.10 Inch WG total pressure unless otherwise indicated.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A standards.

1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

C. Submit schedule and product data of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application and noise level.






D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and

schedules of outlets and inlets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Titus

B. Price

C. Krueger

D. Metal Aire

E. Nailor-Hart

F. Anemostat

G. Carnes

2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSER (Layin Ceiling) A. Rectangular, stamped, multi-core diffuser with 24 inch x 24 inch extended panel module with round neck, fixed discharge,

Model TDC-AA manufactured by Titus.

B. Inverted T-bar type frame.

C. Fabricate of aluminum with baked enamel off-white finish.

NOTE: Multi-core diffusers shall be provided in all areas except within ten feet of the kitchen hood canopy perimeter.

2.03 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSER (Surface Mount/Plastered Ceiling) A. Rectangular, stamped, multi-core diffuser with 24 inch x 24 inch extended panel module with round neck, fixed discharge,

Model TDC-AA manufactured by Titus.

B. Surface mount type frame.


NOTE: Multi-core diffusers shall be provided in all areas except within ten feet of the kitchen hood canopy perimeter.

2.04 SIDEWALL DIFFUSER A. Rectangular, single deflection, adjustable blades, 3/4 inch blade spacing with blades parallel to long dimension, Model

300FL manufactured by Titus.



2.05 SIDEWALL DIFFUSER (OPTIONAL) A. Rectangular, single deflection, 45 degree fixed blades, 3/4 inch blade spacing with blades parallel to long dimension, Model

3FL manufactured by Titus.



2.06 CEILING RETURN GRILLE (Layin Ceiling/Ducted Return)






A. Fixed 3/4 inch blade spacing, hinged, louvered, without filter, Model 350FFL manufactured by Titus.



2.07 CEILING RETURN GRILLE (Plastered Ceiling/Ducted Return) A. Fixed 3/4 inch blade spacing, hinged, louvered, without filter, Model 350FFL manufactured by Titus.



2.08 CEILING RETURN GRILLE (Ceiling Plenum/Non-Ducted Return) A. Fixed 3/4 inch blade spacing, hinged, louvered, without filter, Model 350FL manufactured by Titus.



2.09 CEILING RELIEF GRILLE (Non-Ducted) A. Fixed 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch eggcrate core, Model 50F manufactured by Titus.


C. Fabricate of aluminum with baked off-white finish.

2.10 EXHAUST GRILLE A. Fixed 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch eggcrate core, Model 50F manufactured by Titus.



2.11 TRANSFER GRILLE A. Fixed 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch eggcrate core, Model 50F manufactured by Titus.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install air outlets and inlets under provisions of the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install supply air diffusers and return air grilles to ductwork with airtight connection.

C. Verify that all return air grilles are hinged for access to and cleaning of the return air ducts.

D. The top panel of the supply air diffusers and return air grilles above the ceiling shall be fully insulated to prevent

condensation with the outer edges of the insulation adhered to the ceiling grid with silver foil tape.






E. Install all supply air diffusers and return air grilles to ensure that they are parallel to adjacent ceiling grids, exposed duct

runs, wall lines or structural framing. Make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features,

symmetry and lighting arrangement.

F. Provide balancing dampers at duct takeoffs to supply air outlets and return air inlets. The use of opposed blade dampers

immediately behind the supply air diffuser or the return air grille is PROHIBITED.

G. During construction, provide temporary closures on all supply and return air duct openings by sealing with a disposable

polyethylene sheeting to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

H. Paint exposed ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.

3.02 TEST AND ADJUST A. After installation, test and operate each device to ensure adjustable blades and dampers move freely without binding through

their entire range of adjustments.

B. Balance air quantities to plus 10 percent, minus 5 percent of specified design values.

C. Ensure that all "snap-in" cores on supply air diffusers can be removed and replaced.

D. Ensure that all returns air grilles can be removed or swung open to allow access to return air duct for duct cleaning.

3.03 CLEANING A. Clean oil, grease, fingerprints or other grime from the surfaces of diffusers, return air grilles and door grilles.

B. Remove debris and waste materials resulting from installation.

END OF SECTIONEND OF SECTIONEND OF SECTIONEND OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT 15861




SECTION 15861 - AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Related Sections


2. 15855 - Air Handling Units.

3. 15885 - Air Filtration Equipment.

4. 15890 - Ductwork.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA), Fan Construction and Testing Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Fans: Shop drawings, catalog cuts, and certified performance curves.

B. Inlet Vanes: Shop drawings, catalog cuts.


A. Fans shall be constructed and rated according to AMCA standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fans:

1. Carnes.

2. Greenheck.

3. Loren Cook.

4. Penn Ventilator.

5. Powerline.

6. Trane.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise noted, fans shall be as follows:

1. Centrifugal type.

2. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.

3. Fan brake horsepower ratings shall not exceed those scheduled.


FIRE STATION No. 13







4. Belt drives for fans shall be matched multiple V-belts rated for at least l.3 times motor horsepower.

5. Pulleys shall be cast iron adjustable pitch type.

6. Fan blades and housing of proper design, sufficient strength and rigidity to operate under installed conditions

without objectionable noise and vibrations.

7. Surfaces provided with approved corrosion resistant coatings.

8. Provide drives to deliver design capacity at actual static pressures developed.

B. Propeller Fans:

1. Heavy-duty industrial type and designed for wall mounting.

2. Fans may be direct or belt driven by an open drip-proof electric motor.

3. Direct driven fans shall have fan wheel mounted on extension of motor shaft.

a. Mount motor in rigid streamlined frame designed to provide vibration isolation for motor and with

concealed wiring run to motor.

b. Mount fan on a steel frame and shall have aluminum or steel blades with heavy hubs.

c. Bearings shall be of permanently lubricated type.

d. Motor speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm.

e. Provide fan with a heavy gage wire personnel guard easily removable for servicing fan.

4. If standard mounting is not large enough to fit the opening provided, fabricate auxiliary mounting plates to not

impair air flow to wheel at the opening provided.

a. Plates shall be made of zinc-coated steel in thicknesses as follows:

Wheel Diameter Plate Thickness (M.S. Gage)

12" and less 18

Over 12" to 16" 16

Over 16" to 24" 14

Over 24" to 36" 12

Over 36" to 60" 10

5. Inline Centrifugal Fans:

a. Fans shall be aluminum construction, centrifugal, with belt or direct drives.

b. Fan wheels shall have aluminum airfoil blades, backwardly inclined non-overloading.

c. Motors on belt driven units shall be supported on exterior of fan casing with bearings encased within

fan tube.

d. Support fan with vibration isolators.

e. Extend bearing lubrication lines outside of casing.

f. Provide variable inlet vanes as indicated.

C. Centrifugal Vent Set:

1. Fan housing and scroll shall be steel with baked-on enamel finish inside and out.

2. Fan wheel shall be steel with forward curved blades.

3. Support fan shaft by resiliently mounted prelubricated ball bearings.

4. Fan motors shall be open drip-proof type with belt drives and adjustable pulleys.


FIRE STATION No. 13







D. Ceiling Mounted Fans:

1. Fans shall have a centrifugal wheel enclosed in an acoustically insulated housing.

2. Units shall have integral back draft damper and an inlet grille.

3. Motor shall be resiliently supported and shall be completely removable through the face of the unit.

4. Discharge position shall be changeable through use of interchangeable casing panels.

E. Power Roof Exhauster:

1. Fans shall be standard outlet or up blast as scheduled, centrifugal type with backward inclined non-

overloading wheels, and belt driven by an electric motor.

2. Fan shall have weatherproof, low profile aluminum housing suitable for curb mounting.

3. Fan shall have motor space accessible from outside and local disconnect switch.

4. Motor and fan shall be resiliently mounted.

5. Each fan shall be provided with aluminum or galvanized steel bird screen, disconnect switch, and multi-blade

backdraft damper as indicated.

6. Belt drives shall be provided with not less than double belt pulleys and 2 belts.

7. Upblast fans shall be provided with a non-corrosive epoxy coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide roof or masonry openings required for proper fan installation.

B. Refer to Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation for proper isolator requirements.

C. Install fans according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on Construction Documents.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



AIR FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15885




SECTION 15885 - AIR FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. 15855 - Air Handling Units.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Air filter catalog data and sample.


A. Protect materials from damage during storage and installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Filters:

1. American Air Filter Co.

2. Bioclimatic.

3. Circul-Aire.

4. Scott.

5. Purafil Clean Air Systems.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Air Handling Unit Filters:

1. Temporary Construction Filters:

a. Provide 2 sets of temporary 2 inch thick fiberglass throwaway type filters for use during

construction and start up. Construction filters shall be a minimum of MERV-8 efficient. ASHRAE

Standard 52-2004.

b. Construction filters shall be provided for all filter applications and air handing units shall not be

operated at any time without filters.

2. Final Filters: Shall consist of a single 2-inch thick, disposable, pleated particulate filter, per ASHRAE

Standard 52.2 shall have a minimum efficiency reporting valve (MERV) of 13 of 80 to 90 percent atmospheric

dust spot efficiency (ADS), located in filter box upstream of each coil. The maximum allowed velocity

through the filter media shall be 500 FPM. Initial resistance 0.16 inch W.G. final resistance 0.75 inch W.G.


FIRE STATION No. 13



AIR FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15885




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment and materials according to manufacturer's recommendations. Maintain proper access around

equipment access doors for filter maintenance removal.

B. Execute work in a neat and professional manner.

C. Use construction filters during initial start-up periods to blow systems clean of construction dust without clogging

coils.

D. Install the permanent type filters after cleanup period and before final test and balance of air systems. Do not use for

temporary filters.

END OF SECTION




CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15905




SECTION 15905 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. 15670 - Air Cooled Condensing Units.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide complete operating data, system drawings, writing diagrams, and written detailed operation description

of sequences and description and engineering data on each control system component before starting work.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s literature of components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Controls and Instrumentation:

1. Delta Controls by South Florida Controls.

2. Delta Controls by Advanced Controls.

3. Johnson Corp.

2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, indicating devices and other apparatus required to operate

mechanical system and to perform functions specified.

B. Provide materials and field work necessary to connect control components factory supplied as part of equipment

controlled, unless specified otherwise.

C. Unless specified otherwise, provide fully proportional components.

2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Remote Sensor Thermostat:

1. Programmable thermostat.

2. Remotely located thermal element shall actuate 1 snap action SPDT switch per stage for two stages.

a. Contoller shall allow mounting in any position and shall operate with an ambient temperature

range of -40 to 140 degrees F.

B. Miscellaneous Devices: Provide necessary relays, switches, transformers, etc., to make a complete and operable

system.




CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15905




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Check and verify location of remote control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. At completion of work, submit test report automatic control system.

C. Provide control diagrams for each system, framed under glass for wall mounting.

END OF SECTION



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15950 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 5 Footer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL A. The Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) of equipment, and all air and water systems, shall be performed by an independent TAB Agency acceptable to MDFRD Fire Department. No part of the ownership of this agency ∆ Addendum #4 shall be held by any individual or firm who have a direct interest in any contractual portion of this project, or who

are in direct competition with any of those with such a contractual interest. B. Selection of TAB Agency: 1. The TAB Agency shall be employed directly by the General Contractor who will be solely responsible for

its performance and the timely schedule of its operation. 2. General Contractor shall solicit prices from at least three agencies for the TAB Work, and submit the names and the price quotes to the A/E Consultant and MDFRD Fire Department Project Manager for final ∆ Addendum #4 selection. C. TAB Agency Minimum Qualifications: 1. The TAB Agency shall be certified by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). In lieu of such

certification, a non-certified experienced TAB Agency may be selected if its qualifications and its personnel qualifications meet the minimum requirements listed below to the satisfaction of the A/E

Consultant and MDFRD Fire Department. The TAB Team shall consist of full time employees of the TAB ∆ Addendum #4 Agency and shall include one certified TAB Engineer to act as the Team Supervisor, and one certified Tab Technician to

act as a Field Team Leader. 2. Non-Certified TAB Agency Qualification Requirements: a. Duration of Experience: The TAB Agency shall have been in business satisfactorily performing

TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately preceding Bid opening date for this Contract, this TAB work shall have been overall supervision and management of project TAB work.

b. Professional Engineer Endorsements: The TAB Agency shall be endorsed by three recognized active South Florida HVAC professional engineers (P.E.), registered in Florida.

c. Instruments: The type and number of TAB instruments used by the TAB Agency, shall meet the requirements specified in AABC Standards or in ASHRAE Standard 111-1988.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon




d. Place of Business Ownership: The TAB Agency must have an established place of business (not in a home or residence) in South Florida, and must furnish a proof of sole ownership, independent of any other business affiliations.

3. Non-Certified TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements: a. TAB Team Supervisor qualifications shall meet the following minimum requirements:

Satisfactory performance of overall supervision and management of TAB work for not less than 3 years immediately preceding this Contract's Bid opening date and shall have one of the following:

College Degree and HVAC Experience: An engineering degree (from a 4 year college program) and a minimum of 4 additional years of experience in either HVAC system installation work, HVAC design work or HVAC TAB field work.

or

HVAC Experience: A minimum of 6 years of TAB field work experience (not including apprenticeship experience) as TAB Team Field Leader, and a minimum of 4 additional years of experience in either HVAC system installation work or HVAC TAB field work immediately preceding this Contract's Bid opening date.

b. TAB Team Field Leader: Shall have satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of TAB work in the field for not less than three years immediately preceding this Contract's Bide opening date and in addition, shall have at least (3) years experience as a TAB Team Field Technician.

c. TAB Team Field Technician: Shall have satisfactorily assisted TAB Team Field Leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than one year immediately preceding the Contract's Bid opening date.

PART 2 PRODUCTS A. All Testing, Adjusting and balancing equipment, instruments, etc., shall be provided by the TAB Agency. PART 3 EXECUTION A. Scope of Work: Balance of air and water distribution; adjustment of total system to provide design quantities and

performance; verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls; sound and vibration testing; and reporting the TAB work results.

B. Standards and Industry Practice: In performing the TAB work, the TAB Agency shall follow the industry practice

as recommended in the latest ASHRAE HVAC Systems Handbook TAB chapter, and shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 111-1988 procedures and requirements.

C. Pre-construction Plans Review: Plans and specifications shall be reviewed by the selected TAB Agency prior to




the start of work. A written report shall be submitted to the A/E Consultant and MDFRD Fire Department ∆ Addendum #4 indicating deficiencies in the systems that may preclude the proper testing, adjusting and balancing of the

systems and equipment and, consequently interfere with their capacity to attain specified or intended performance. The report shall include proposed corrective modifications. The TAB Agency shall confirm that access is provided to all work which will be concealed and which will require TAB or future maintenance.

D. Scheduling and Readiness for Tests: The Tab work shall be performed as the HVAC construction progresses, so

that the TAB work will not disturb the overall schedule of Substantial Completion Acceptance. However, testing of any system shall not begin before the following readiness points are verified.

1. System has been started, operating and clean. 2. Permanent electric wiring is complete. 3. Ductwork is installed as designed and passed leak test. Certificated of leaktest approved by the A/E

Consultant shall be transmitted to the TAB Agency for inclusion in the report. 4. Ceilings are installed in areas where air distribution pattern is affected by the ceiling. 5. All equipment and ductwork access doors are secured. 6. All balancing, smoke and fire dampers are open. 7. All isolation, and balancing valves are open, and control valves are operational. 8. All system controls and instrumentation are installed and operational. The control contractor shall attest

in writing that the systems are operating as intended. 9. All grilles, registers and diffusers, vanes and blades are in neutral position. 10. All filters are installed and are clean. E. Compliance with ASHRAE STANDARD 111-1988 1. Instrumentation: The minimum instrumentation requirements for the TAB work shall be those which

provide the most accuracy as prescribed in Section 5 of the Standard. 2. Installed Flow Meters and Measuring and Balancing Devices: Criteria shall be as prescribed in Section

6 of the Standard. 3. Air and Hydronic Measurements: Criteria and accuracy shall be as prescribed in Sections 8 and 9 of the

Standard. 4. Verification of Control Operation: The correct function and sequence of controls shall be verified as

prescribed in Section 10 and 11, and documented on a special form. 5. Vibration Isolation Acceptance Tests: Verify free Floating and proper deflection as detailed in Chapter

52 of the 1987 ASHRAE HVAC Handbook. 6. Equipment Tests: Record, measure and report data required per Section 13 of the Standard for all listed

equipment. 7. Reporting Procedures and Forms: Prepare a final report comprising of all pertinent forms listed in

Section 13 of the Standard, and including all the subjects and systems contained in the scope of work. A system diagram shall be added to the report for each system or subsystem, per the requirements of Section 13.3.1 of the Standard. This diagram shall include numerical identification for equipment, terminals, outlets, balancing devices, etc., corresponding to identification numbers used in the body of the report.

sys1

Polygon




F. Submittals:

Submit certified test reports, signed by the TAB Team Supervisor who was in charge of the effort and the TAB Team Field Leader who actually performed the measurements. In addition to the requirements listed in the ASHRAE STANDARD 111-1988 Section 13 and herein before the report shall also include:

1. List of instruments used and their recent calibration date. 2. List of balancing devices final setting positions. Use sketches to show quadrant position. The list shall

use the I.D. numbers shown on the line diagram included in the report. 3. List of deviations, if any, from the specified or implied requirements of the design documents, and an

explanation of why compliance could not be achieved. 4. List of all points of excessive noise and/or vibration identified, if any, between TAB Agency instrument

measurements and permanently installed measuring devices.

All submittals shall six (6) set of prints for each required shop drawing. Interim test reports shall be submitted for each subsystem or system tested, upon completion of the tests. The A/E Consultant and MDFRD Fire Department Maintenance shall review and approve each report, and return the approved ∆ Addendum #4 copy to the TAB Agency. The final report shall include all approved sub system sections.

G. Acceptance of TAB Tests:

If required by MDFRD Fire Department or the A/E Consultant, the TAB Contractor shall retest in the presence of ∆ Addendum #4 MDFRD Fire Department Representative the air and water flows, AHU or fan performances or other equipment ∆ Addendum #4 data, randomly selected by MDFRD Fire Department. The readings shall be reproducible with plus or minus ∆ Addendum #4 10%. If the readings will not reproduce themselves, rebalancing shall be required and the retesting shall continue in the same and in other randomly selected spots until conclusion will be drawn regarding the accuracy and validity of the measurements.

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon




H. Marking of Final Settings:

Following the final acceptance of the Certified Reports and the Random test Checks, the setting of the balancing damper quadrants, valves, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked or identified to facilitate future restoration if disturbed at any time.

END OF SECTION




TESTS 15955




SECTION 15955 - TESTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit test results for approval by Architect. Upon completion of tests, Contractor shall submit mark-up

drawings showing portions of system tested.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Provide pumps, blowers, compressors, gauges, instruments, test equipment and personnel required for tests, and make provisions for removal of test equipment and draining of pipes after tests have been made.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Tests may be made of isolated portions of systems as will facilitate general progress of installation. Any

subsequent revisions to systems will necessitate retesting of affected portions. 1. Systems shall be tested prior to painting, installation of insulation and concealment.

2. 48 hours prior to performing test, Architect shall be notified in writing of pending test.

3. Tests shall be witnessed by Architect/Engineer.

3.02 PLUMBING SYSTEMS TESTS

A. General: Concealed work shall remain uncovered until required tests have been completed, but if necessary,

tests on portions of the work may be made and those portions of the work may be concealed after being inspected and proved satisfactory. Repairs of defects that are discovered as a result of inspections or tests shall

be made with new materials. Tests shall be repeated after defects have been eliminated.

B. Sanitary Drainage, Waste & Vent; Roof Drainage; Condensate Drainage & Planter Drainage Systems Tests: A flow

test shall be applied to all parts of the system before the pipes are concealed. Where possible all parts of the

system shall be subject to not less than 10 feet of hydrostatic head. The water shall remain in the system for not

less than 30 minutes after which time no leaks at any point or lowering of the water level shall be visible.

C. Domestic Hot and Cold Water System Tests: A water pressure test shall be applied to the water supply piping upon completion of the roughing-in before the piping is insulated, covered or concealed and before equipment is

connected. Potable water should be used for the test. A hydrostatic pressure of 1-1/2 times the working

pressure of the system, but in no case less than 125 psig shall be applied to the system, and there shall be no

leaks at any point in the system at this pressure for a period of three (3) hours. Concealed or underground piping

shall be inspected, tested and approved before concealing piping. When the water system has been completely




TESTS 15955




installed, including all fixtures, faucets, trim hose connections and final connections to all equipment, the entire

system shall be placed in operating condition and thoroughly checked for leaks. All valves, faucets and trim shall

be operated and adjusted for maximum performance.

1. Sterilization:

a. General:

1) Before being placed in service all potable water piping shall be chlorinated as specified herein, in accordance with AWWA Standard C601-54 and as required by the

local Building and Health Department Codes.

2) Chlorine may be applied by the use of chlorine gas-water mixture, direct chlorine-gas

feed or a mixture of calcium hypochlorite and water. If calcium hypochlorite is used it

shall be comparable to commercial products such as Perchloron, HTH or Maxochlor.

The powder shall be mixed with water to form a paste thinned to slurry and pumped or

injected into the piping as hereinafter specified.

3) If direct chlorine-gas feed is used it shall be fed with either a solution-feed chlorinator or by a pressure feed chlorinator with a diffuser in the pipe.

b. Procedure:

1) Prior to chlorination, all dirt and foreign matter shall be removed by a through

flushing of the potable water system. The chlorinating agent may be applied to the

piping system at any convenient point. Water shall be fed slowly into the potable

water system and the chlorine applied in quantities to produce a dosage of 50 parts

per million of available chlorine. Retention in the system shall be for a minimum

period of eight hours. During the chlorination process all valves and accessories shall be operated.

2) After completion of the above requirements, the system shall be flushed until the

water in the system gives chemical and bacteriological test readings equal to those of

the permanent potable water supply.

3) Chemical and bacteriological tests shall be conducted by a state-certified laboratory

and approved by the local authorities having jurisdiction. Copies of the tests shall be

submitted to the engineer and all governing authorities.

4) Warning signs shall be provided at all outlets while the chlorination of the system is in progress.

3.03 WATER QUALITY TEST

A. Chilled water systems shall not be accepted until a sample of the water is taken and analyzed by a reputable

established local laboratory and the report furnished to the A/E. Water quality shall not be in excess of the

following limits:

1. P & M alkalinity 10 and 40 PPM

2. Chlorides 100 PPM 3. Total dissolved solids 70 PPM

4. Total dissolved solids 400 MMHOS

5. PH 6.0-7.0

6. Soluble/insoluble oils by

Freon extractable analysis




TESTS 15955




(72 hrs. period required) 2 PPM

B. If the oil level is too high, the system will require a "boilout" using a chemical product composed of alkalies,

soaps, synthetic detergents, brittleness inhibitors and dispersants. If water is allowed to stand idle in piping

system longer than 90 days, this water quality test shall be repeated before final acceptance.

END OF SECTION



CODES AND STANDARDS 16023 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 1


SECTION 16023 - CODES AND STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. Comply with the following: 1. Florida Building Code (FBC) 2004 with 2006 Revision. 2007. ∆ Addendum #4 2. Florida Building Code (FBC) - Gas. 3. Florida Building Code (FBC) - Mechanical. 4. Florida Building Code (FBC) - Plumbing. 5. National Electrical Code – 2005 2008 (NEC), (NFPA 70). ∆ Addendum #4 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). NFPA 101 and other NFPA codes as applicable. 7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1, 1995 2007. ∆ Addendum #4 8. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-98. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where materials and equipment are available under the continuing inspection and listing service of Underwriters

Laboratories (UL), furnish materials and equipment so listed. B. Comply with latest FPL Commercial/Industrial Energy Conservation Program Standards, if FPL is the available

utility company. C. A maximum of 3 helpers to 1 journeyman are allowed according to Metropolitan Dade County. PART 2 NOT USED PART 3 NOT USED

END OF SECTION

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon



Header has been updated - ∆ Add∆ Add∆ Add∆ Addendum #4endum #4endum #4endum #4

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100




SECTION 16100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Examine drawings and specifications. Visit site to determine work to be performed by Electrical,

Mechanical, HVAC, and other trades.

2. Provide required electrical materials and equipment to put work into operation, completely wired, tested,

and ready for use including raceways, conductors, disconnects, starters/contactors, or other devices for

proper operation and sequences of electrical, mechanical, or other systems or equipment. 3. Unless otherwise noted, conduit, wire for controls, and devices, both line and low voltage, shall be

provided and installed as described in this or other parts of the Construction Documents.

a. Install boxes or housings necessary for conduit and wire to controls, excluding items to be

installed in piping, ducts, tanks, machinery, solenoid valves, pressure switches, aquastats, or

similar devices.

b. These items are specified for installation in other sections. Connecting wiring is specified in

this Division.

4. Control wiring in separate conduit between HVAC sensing devices and control panels or motors, shall

be installed under this Division after verification from approved shop drawings of the required locations

and connections.

5. Seal penetrations through fire rated floors or walls with fire resistant compound.

6. Connect electrical equipment and devices as parts of the equipment or furniture furnished under other

sections.

B. Tradesperson Qualifications:

1. Contractor shall provide or cause to be provided by the appropriate subcontractors in the electrical trade for all work required by this Division 16, a ratio of one licensed master or journeyman for every three

trainees at all times as those terms are defined by Chapter 10 of the Miami-Dade County Code. No other

workers shall be allowed.

2. Where the work of these trades is subcontracted:

a. The contractor shall include this requirement in those subcontracts.

b. The subcontractor shall show capacity to bond the subcontracted work. The decision to require

such bond to be issued remains with the general contractor.

C. To ensure compliance with the above tradesperson qualifications requirement, the General Contractor shall

require the trade subcontractor to submit with each draw request, and shall in turn submit with the General

Contractor’s draw request, a certified payroll identifying each tradesperson employed for the work of this section

during the payroll period, the qualification level of each tradesperson, and where licensed as a Master or

Journeyman the license number of each individual.

1. This certified payroll shall also reflect the number of hours spent on this project performing the work of

this section and shall reflect the appropriate ratio of qualified tradespersons as required by this section.

2. Failure to comply with this section either in providing the appropriate number of required licensed



Header has been updated - ∆ Add∆ Add∆ Add∆ Addendum #4endum #4endum #4endum #4

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100




personnel or failure to submit the appropriate certified payroll information as required herein shall be a

major breach of the contract and shall result in rejection of the payment application where the breach

occurs and be cause for termination of the contract.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Data:

1. Complete list of materials to be furnished under this section.

2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data required to assure specification compliance.

3. Catalog cuts, clearly marked for identification of items to be provided, including disconnects, breakers,

fuses, starters, lighting fixtures, transformers, or other materials not requiring specially prepared Shop

Drawings.

B. Shop Drawings for nonstandard items, including but not limited to panelboards, switchboards, control centers,

anchoring layouts and details, lighting fixtures, or similar products.

C. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Warranties.

3. Operating Instructions, maintenance manuals, and parts lists. 4. Point-to-point wiring diagrams.


A. Delivery and Storage:

1. Deliver materials to jobsite in their original unopened containers with labels and certifications intact and

clearly legible at time of use.

2. Store materials according to manufacturers' recommendations and as approved by A/E.

B. Replacement: In case of damage, pilferage, or other loss, make immediate repair or replacement of materials

necessary to obtain approvals of A/E, without cost to the Board.

C. Protection: Use necessary means to protect materials of this section before, during, and after installation,

including protection of installed work and materials of other trades.

PART 2 NOT USED

PART 3 NOT USED

END OF SECTION




RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS 16112


RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 13


SECTION 16112 – RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. 10400 - Identifying Devices.

2. 16120 - Wire and Cable.

3. 16131 - Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes.

4. 16450 - Grounding.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to NEMA Standard VE 1 for definitions of cable tray terminology used in this section.


A. Performance Requirements: Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature including printed installation instructions and recommendations before

starting work. Submit samples if requested.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fibrated Emulsion Conduit Coatings:

1. Karnak Chemical Corp., 220 Fibrated Emulsion.

2. Monsey Products Co., Monsey Asphalt Emulsion Roof Coating Fiber.

3. Sonneborn Building Products, Hydrocide 700B.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Conduit shall be sized according to NEC, unless otherwise noted. Feeders and home runs shall not be less than

3/4" diameter.

B. Rigid Conduit:

1. Metallic Conduit (RMC): Hot dip galvanized or electro-galvanized, with corrosion resistant coating on

the inside, threaded, standard weight steel conduit complying with ANSI C80.1-1990, and Article 346 of






RC&P Project # 08012.00 2 of 13


the NEC.

2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Hot dip galvanized or electro-galvanized, threaded, steel conduit

complying with ANSI C80.6-1986 and Article 345 of the NEC. 3. Rigid Non-Metallic: Schedule 40, PVC plastic 90 degrees C. complying with ANSI/UL 651-1989, and

Article 347 of the NEC.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):

1. Galvanized steel tubing with smooth interior coat of lacquer enamel or zinc coat.

2. Comply with ANSI C80.3-1983, and UL 797, and Article 348 of the NEC.

B. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Steel: Flexible galvanized steel conduit (Greenfield) complying with UL 1 and Article 350 of the NEC.

2. Liquid Tight: Flexible galvanized steel conduit with oil and water-resistant overall plastic sheath,

complying with UL 1, and Article 351 of the NEC.

3. Minimum size for flexible metal conduit 1/2" except 3/8" where allowed by Section 349 of the NEC for

connections to lighting fixtures.

C. Conduit Fittings:

1. Rigid Metallic Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit: Zinc or cadmium plated steel or galvanized

malleable iron complying with ANSI C80.1 and C80.3. Fittings shall be threaded type. Die cast zinc alloy fittings are not allowed.

2. Rigid PVC conduit: 90 degrees C., PVC fittings UL listed. Fittings shall match conduit and complying

with ANSI/UL 651-1989.

3. EMT fittings: Zinc or cadmium plated steel or malleable iron of the compression type or stainless steel

multiple point locking (set screw) type. Connectors shall have insulated throats. Fittings shall comply

with ANSI C80.3-1983. Die cast zinc alloy fittings are not allowed.

4. Flexible metal conduit fittings: Steel or malleable iron only with insulated throat, complying with Fed.

Spec.W-F-406B. Die cast zinc alloy fittings are not allowed.

5. Bushings and connectors shall incorporate an insulating insert of at least 150 degrees C. rated plastic or 105 degrees C. rated nylon. Conduit bushings made entirely of nonmetallic material are not allowed.

Grounding and bonding bushings shall have clamp type terminal for copper conductor.

6. Expansion Fittings and Sealing Fittings: UL listed with ground continuity means.

D. Conduit Supports:

1. Straps: Formed zinc coated steel or malleable iron one-hole pipe straps or conduit clamps sized for

conduits or tubing.

2. Fastenings: Zinc coated or cadmium plated steel screws, bolts, toggles, and expansion anchors as required.

3. Electrical steel channels shall be equivalent to Unistrut P-3000 Series. Provide trapeze, clamps,

supports, concrete inserts, galvanized steel or plated steel with galvanized conduit clamps, and threaded

1/4" diameter minimum suspension rods.

4. For individual branch circuit EMT or flexible metal conduit concealed above accessible hung ceilings

only, "caddy clips" spring steel conduit clamps.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 3 of 13


G. Conduit Coatings: Steel conduit buried directly in the earth shall receive a factory applied PVC coating or 2 coats

of fibrated emulsion conduit coating. Comply with manufacturer's application recommendations.

H. Surface Raceways: Only where specifically indicated. UL listed and comply with Fed.Spec.W-C-582, and Articles

352 and 353 of the NEC.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Walker, Division of Butler Manufacturing Co.

b. Wiremold.

2. Pull Wires: Galvanized steel or nylon rope of sufficient strength to pull in the maximum size conductors through trade size conduit. Minimum strength shall be 200 lbs.

I. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:

1. Hot dip galvanized code gage sheet steel, complete with knockouts, enclosures, and removable covers

unless indicated as hinged.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Hoffman.

2) Lee Products.

3) Keystone. 4) Square D.

2. Exterior locations shall have weathertight gasketed covers, joints, and drip-proof rain shields. Paint after

installation with exterior enamel paint.

3. Wireways and gutters shall comply with Articles 362 and 374 of the NEC.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not proceed with the work of this Section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of

the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide where indicated and where required, ducts, conduits, tubing, wireways, and gutters to form a complete and integrally grounded raceway system. The system shall be installed according to NEC and local code

requirements. Components of the system shall be of sufficient size, strength, and capacity to allow for

placements, pulling-in, or other installation of conductors, wires, cables, splices, taps, and terminations whether

included in this Contract or for future use without strain or injury to those items being installed.

B. Provide pull wires in empty raceways where no conductors are installed in this Contract. Allow 10 inches






RC&P Project # 08012.00 4 of 13


minimum slack at each end of pull wire and securely caulk in place. Provide marking tags showing opposite

destination noting building and closet number at each end.

C. The minimum size of rigid conduit, EMT, and flexible metallic conduit shall be according to NEC except as follows:

1. Unless otherwise specified under "Products" or shown on the Drawings.

2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, telephone conduits shall be not less than 1 inch trade size.

3. Feeders and homeruns shall not be less than 3/4" diameter.

D. Check sizes of raceways to determine the green equipment ground conductor specified, shown, or required can

be installed in the same raceway with phase and neutral conductors according to the percentage of fill

requirements of NEC. If necessary, increase the duct, conduit, tubing, or raceway sizes shown or specified to accommodate conductors without additional cost to the Board.

E. Raceway and Conduit Locations: Unless indicated otherwise, conduit types specified shall be used in the

following locations. Any deviation from this schedule shall be submitted for approval with corresponding price

adjustments before installation. Any conduit installed and not of the specified type shall be removed and replaced

with the specified type at no additional cost to the Board.

1. Exterior Raceways:

a. Below Grade:

1) Below Grade Direct Buried: Rigid Metallic Conduit (RMC), painted or PVC jacketed.

PVC Schedule 40, as noted on plans.

2) Below Grade Concrete Encased:

RMC.

PVC Schedule 40.

b. Exterior Exposed:

1) RMC conduit.

2) IMC conduit. 3) PVC flexible conduit, PVC jacketed with liquid tight fittings.

4) Gutters, wireways, and troughs of the gasketed, raintight type.

2. Interior Raceways:

a. Under Slabs on Grade:

1) RMC (painted or PVC coated).

2) PVC Schedule 40, with 12 inches clear to bottom of slab.

b. Embedded in Concrete Walls or Floor On or Below Grade: PVC or GRS with threaded or

concrete tight steel fittings.

c. Embedded in Concrete Walls or Floors Above Grade:

1) PVC Schedule 40.

2) RMC or IMC with threaded or concrete tight steel fittings.

3) EMT with concrete tight steel fittings.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 5 of 13


d. Concealed in Masonry Walls:

1) RMC or IMC with steel fittings. 2) EMT with concrete tight fittings.

e. Concealed in dry wall construction, or in suspended ceilings: EMT or flexible metal conduit

with steel fittings.

f. Interior Exposed:

1) RMC or IMC at 8 feet or less above finish floor.

2) EMT with steel fittings more than 8 feet above finish floor.

3) Option: EMT installed below 8 feet from floor in electrical, mechanical, and telephone rooms.

3. Sealing fittings shall be installed at the following points and as otherwise indicated:

a. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous areas and enclosures for explosion-proof lighting

fixtures, switches, receptacles, etc., use sealing compounds according to NEC to be of a type

approved for the conduits.

b. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces and

air conditioned spaces, use to prevent passage of water vapor.

c. Where required by the NEC.

4. PVC conduit shall not be used indoors either exposed or concealed, except embedded in concrete or

under slabs on grade.

a. The depth of conduits under interior slabs shall be based on the minimum allowable bending

radii of stub-ups.

b. Stub-ups on exterior and exterior walls shall be RMC, with transitions from PVC to RMC

occurring below grade. Curves to stub-ups shall be RMC.

F. Raceway and Conduit Installation: 1. Conduit Routing:

a. Route feeders, homeruns, and conduits as indicated, except for minor deviations as accepted.

b. Maintain a minimum separation of 12 inches between conduits containing emergency feeders

and conduits containing normal feeders.

c. The routing of conduit, as shown on the plans, is general.

d. Before installing any work, examine the working layouts of all other trades to determine exact

locations and clearances.

e. Where equipment is installed by other trades requiring connection as specified in this section, determine exact conduit entry locations from the approved shop drawings.

f. Modifications to conduit runs shown on the electrical drawings, based on this section, shall be

made without additional cost to the Board, and shall be subject to A/E approval.

g. In determining clearances, conduit shall not be run within 6 inches of any heated pipe or duct,

or if unavoidable, the conduit must be kept at least 1 inch from the outer covering.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 6 of 13


2. Conduits in Finished Spaces:

a. Conduits, fittings, outlet boxes, and pull boxes shall be concealed in ceilings, floor slabs,

walls, or partitions of the buildings. b. Provide sufficient space at concealed conduits over conduit and coupling for the applications

of finished floor, walls, and ceilings.

c. Examine the Drawings, and if necessary, confer with the A/E to determine the type of

construction containing the concealed conduits and the space available for such conduits.

d. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, conduit may be run exposed on unfinished walls, on

unfurred basement ceilings, in mechanical rooms and in penthouses, attics, and roof spaces.

3. Roof Conduit: a. Avoid running conduit on the roof wherever possible.

b. If absolutely necessary, roof mounted conduit shall be GRS or IMC, a minimum of 16 inches

above roof on galvanized steel struts, securely supported, horizontally and vertically with pitch

pans as required, on supports and conduit penetrations.

4. Conduits Penetrating Waterproof Membranes Under Floor Slabs on Grade:

a. Coordinate installation of conduits before installation of waterproof membrane.

b. Membrane to be sealed waterproof to conduits as specified in Section 07120 before pouring of

slab over membrane. c. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for conduits penetrating floor slabs.

5. Conduits Penetrating Waterproof Membranes on Walls: Provide properly coordinated Schedule 40

galvanized steel pipe sleeves for conduits in concrete forms.

6. Conduit Embedded in Concrete:

a. Conduit embedded in poured concrete shall be of the specified type, unless otherwise

indicated.

b. EMT shall not be installed underground, in slabs on grade, in wet locations, in hazardous

areas, or for circuits operating at more than 600 volts. c. Metallic conduit buried in the ground shall be of the specified type.

d. The outside diameter of any conduit buried in concrete shall not exceed one-third of the

thickness of the structural slab, wall or beam in which it is placed. The conduit shall be located

entirely within the middle third of the member whenever possible.

e. Lateral spacing of conduits buried in concrete slabs shall be not less than three diameters

except where drawings indicate the concrete slab has been specially designed to

accommodate a closer spacing of conduits entering signal or electric closets, panelboards,

etc., or the arrangement is accepted by the A/E. f. In general, conduits shall not be run through beams, except where clearly indicated on

Drawings, specified, or where allowed by the A/E.

g. No vertical conduit passing through horizontal concrete beams shall interfere with reinforcing.

Where accepted by the A/E, horizontal conduit may pass through beams, provided they are not

closer than 6 inches clear and are confined to upper half of beam section.

h. Properly support conduit to be embedded to maintain correct location and spacing during






RC&P Project # 08012.00 7 of 13


concreting operations. If necessary, provide suitable metal supports for this purpose.

i. Where a concrete embedded conduit passes through an expansion or contraction joint in the

structure, install the conduit at right angles to the joint, and provide an approved conduit expansion fitting at the joint installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Paint the

conduit with an approved bituminous compound for 1 foot on either side of the expansion joint.

j. Conduits concealed in slabs on grade shall be installed over vapor barrier. Underground rigid

conduit not encased in concrete shall receive the specified conduit coating.

k. Factory applied plastic resin or epoxy coated metal conduit and fittings may be used, provided

that coating holidays and abrasions to coating are repaired with compatible mastic.

l. At any 1 point, not more than 2 lines of conduits shall intersect in any portion of slab.

1) In all such cases, any additional conduit shall be rerouted through other areas, or run under the slab and stubbed through the slab at the required locations.

2) Conduits and pipes shall have a minimum cover of 1 inch of concrete.

3) Do not install conduit in slabs 3 inches thick or less.

4) Under no conditions shall aluminum conduit be buried in concrete slabs.

5) Slab installed conduit shall be stubbed within webbing of block and shall be extended

vertically concurrently with laying of block.

6) Determine centerline of block partitions measured from column centerlines.

7. Conduit Bending, Cutting, and Placement: a. Conduit bends and offsets shall be avoided where possible.

b. Required bends shall be made with standard benders designed for the purpose and with a

minimum radius of 6 times the internal conduit diameter.

c. Make conduit bends according to the NEC unless otherwise shown on the contract Drawings.

Use of a pipe tee or vise for bending conduit is not allowed.

d. Conduit crushed or deformed shall not be installed.

e. Bends shall be free from dents or flattening. Bends more than 360 degrees are not allowed in

conduit between any 2 terminations of pull boxes.

f. Make no bend in surface raceways. Use factory formed fittings for surface raceways. g. Raceways shall not contain more than two 90 degree bends or equivalent. Provide additional

junction or pull boxes to meet this requirement.

h. The ends of conduit shall be carefully reamed out free from burrs before installation and after

threading.

1) Cuts shall be made square.

2) Coupling of conduit by means of running threads is not allowed.

3) Where it is impossible to run the conduit and coupling sections together, an Erickson

coupling or other accepted combination coupling shall be used. 4) Joints shall be made up tight.

5) Joints in conduits concealed in slab, floor fill, earth, etc., shall be made using

approved silicone paint on threads.

i. Prevent lodgment of plaster, dirt, or trash in raceways, boxes, fittings, and equipment during

course of construction. Clogged raceways shall be entirely freed of obstructions or replaced.






RC&P Project # 08012.00 8 of 13


j. During installation of conduit, unfinished runs and terminations in pull boxes, cabinets, etc.,

shall be capped until conductors are installed.



WIRE AND CABLE 16120 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 5


SECTION 16120 – WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 16112 - Raceways and Conduit. 2. 16155 - Motor Power and Control Wiring. ∆ Addendum #4 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and descriptive literature before starting work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Wire and Cable: 1. Wire and cable shall be soft annealed 98 percent conductivity copper with 600 volt A.C. thermoplastic

insulation unless otherwise noted. 2. Wire and cable shall be new and manufactured not more than 12 months before installation. 3. Each coil or reel shall bear UL label and wire marked with AWG or circular mil wire size, voltage rating,

insulation type, type stranding, and the manufacturer's name. 4. Unmarked wire found installed shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Wiring shall comply with NEMA WC-5, NEMA WC-7, IPCEA S-61-402 and IPCEA S-66-524. B. Light and Power Wiring Circuit Conductors: 1. Light and power wiring circuit conductors may be stranded in sizes No.10 AWG and smaller, and

concentric strand Class B for conductors No.8 AWG and larger. 2. Stranded copper conductors may be used for final connections to individual recessed lighting fixtures,

devices, and for control and signal circuit wiring only with crimp-on type terminations. 3. Do not use stranded wire for wiring to receptacles, unless insulated crimp-on connectors are installed

on the wiring ends. C. Wiring Insulation shall be as follows: 1. For Feeders and Motor and Equipment Power Circuits: Type THW-75 degrees C., XHHW-75 degrees C.,

sys1

Polygon





or THWN-75 degrees C. in wet or dry locations, and THHN-90 degrees C. or XHHW-90 degrees C. only at dry locations.

2. For Branch Circuit Wiring for Lighting and Power Circuits: Type THW-75 degrees C., THWN-75 degrees C. in wet or dry locations, and THHN-90 degrees C. only at dry locations.

3. For Wiring Through Fluorescent Fixtures Where Fixture Is Used As Wireway: Type THHN-90 degrees C D. Color Coding: 1. Wire of Size No.8 and smaller shall be factory color coded 600 volt, THW, THWN, or THHN. Sizes larger

than No.8 may be factory color coded or color coded with 3M tape or accepted equivalent. Should tape be used, it shall cover not less than 6 inches of cable within enclosure.

2. Colors to be used in coding shall be: 120/208 Volt System Neutral - White Phase A - Black Phase B – Red Phase C - Blue Ground - Green Electrical grounding and static - bare wire, where allowed by NEC. 3. All other colors (violet, traced, etc.) shall only be used for switch legs, control, or communication

circuits. 4. Conductors for control wiring shall be color coded, using different color coding than the energy

conductor coding specified above. Control wires shall be numbered. E. Minimum Wire Size: Use No.12 AWG for control over 200 feet, unless otherwise noted. Control wiring may No.14

AWG if distance is less than 200 feet. 1. Fire alarms, CCTV, intercoms, and intrusion systems shall have cable and wiring according to

manufacturer's specifications or as specified. F. Wire and Cable Connectors and Terminations: 1. For splices in branch circuit conductors solid or stranded size No.10 AWG and smaller, use UL listed

soft plastic wire nut with sharp self-cutting interior threads, 3M Scotchlok, Ideal Supernut, or T&B Piggy of the size to match the wire.

2. For terminations of stranded or solid wire in size No.10 AWG and smaller at equipment terminals, use UL listed, tin-plated copper, 600 volt vinyl insulated compression type ring or fork type equivalent to T&B "Sta-Kon" or Burndy "Vinylug".

3. For No.8 AWG and Larger: T&B "Locktite" connectors, Burndy "Versitap" connectors, or OZ-Gedney solderless connectors, with insulating covers, tape or heat shrink insulation system.

a. Terminations and splices in feeders may be made with solderless pressure type connectors complete with composition insulating covers, field insulating tape, or heat shrink insulation system.

b. Connectors and lugs for 250 mcm cable and larger shall be of the 2-hole type and for





compression type shall have at least 2 indents. c. Compression lugs and connectors shall be tin plated wrought copper, of size to match the

cable. 4. Splices in underground exterior wiring shall be made fully waterproof by potting or encapsulating. 5. Insulating tapes shall be of a type approved for the application and shall be flame retardant. Tapes shall

be as manufactured by 3M or Bishop Electric. 6. Cable Ties: T&B "Ty-Rap" or Burndy "Unirap". 7. Cable Identification: Branch circuits wire markers 3M "Scotch Code" or accepted equivalent. For feeder

sizes, non-ferrous metal stencil tags. 8. Thermal Fusion Connections: "Catalytic thermal weld" by Cadweld or accepted equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the

work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Wire and Cable Installation: 1. Wire and cable shall be suitably protected from weather or damage during storage and handling and

shall be in first-class condition when installed. 2. Conductors shall not be pulled into conduit until raceway system is substantially complete. Wiring shall

be continuous within conduit runs. Splices will be allowed only at outlet and junction boxes. Joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure.

3. Pulling lubricants, if used, shall comply with UL requirements for the type of conduit material and cable insulation being used.

4. Care shall be taken to prevent cutting and abrasion of cable insulation during the pulling of feeders. a. Ropes used for pulling of feeders shall be made of polyethylene or other suitable nonmetallic

material. b. Pulling lines shall be attached to conductor cables by means of either woven basket grips or

pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors. c. Rope hitches shall not be used. d. Cables to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. e. Where polyethylene insulation is used and a pulling lubricant is required, the lubricant shall be

certified by the manufacturer to be noninjurious to such insulation. 5. Do not bend cables during installation, either permanently or temporarily, to radii less than 12 times the

outer diameters, except where conditions make the specified radius impracticable and shorter radii are allowed by the NEC and NEMA Standards.

6. Neatly and securely bundle conductors located in branch circuit panelboards, cabinets, control boards, switchboards, and motor control centers. Use nylon bundling straps.





7. Provide suitable installation equipment to prevent cutting or distortion of conduits during the pulling of feeders. Use masking or other means to prevent obliteration of cable identification when solid color coating or colored tracers are used.

8. Control wiring color codes, shall be of type as required by its equipment manufacturer. Interconnections of control wiring shall be on numbered terminal strips.

9. Where 2 neutrals are installed in same conduit, their sets of wiring shall be grouped and clearly identified by permanent tags or other means.

10. At each outlet, a loop or end of wire not less than 9 inches long shall be left for connection to lead. 11. Leading end of each conductor pulled shall be carefully examined for damage to jacket. If damage is

evident, cable shall be extended and further checked for damage, with good cable only to remain. 12. Cables in junction and pull boxes shall be properly trained and racked. 13. Branch circuit wiring in panelboard gutters shall be installed vertically in the gutter with a 90-degree

bend at the supply circuit breaker, wire shall enter the circuit breaker lug horizontally. 14. Install cable supports and boxes at vertical feeders and according to the schedule in the NEC. Boxes

shall be built of heavy steel plates not less than No.10 USS gage fastened to an angle iron frame with removable covers secured by brass machine screws. The cable support shall be of the split wedge type that clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of the conductor.

B. Wire and Cable Splicing and Terminations: 1. Splices and terminations of conductors shall be made using specified materials and methods installed

according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Splices in branch circuit wiring shall be made by stripping conductor insulation, twisting conductors

until mechanically secure, and installing a self-threading insulated type connector. Splices are not allowed within panelboards.

3. Conductors shall be squarely cut and fully inserted into the lug barrel or connector. Insulation shall be stripped without cutting the conductor or removing strands, exposing the conductor for the minimum distance required for connection. Splice connectors shall be of a type and be so installed that the conductor is fully insulated by a skirt of such design, or taped so cold flow of the conductor insulation will not be induced when the conductor is positioned in its final operating position.

4. Do not combine conductors under the same lug. Provide individual lugs for individual conductors. Re-tighten bolt type connectors 24 to 48 hours after initial installation and before taping. 5. Connectors shall be insulated by approved type, integral or separate cover, or by means of taping with

approved plastic or rubber and friction tapes to provide insulating value equal to that of the conductors being joined. The number and size and combinations of conductors allowed by UL as listed on manufacturers' packaging of connector shall be strictly complied with.

6. Terminations at equipment terminal blocks shall be made using compression type connectors suitable to match terminal type.

7. Continuity of neutral on multi-wire branch circuits shall not be made on any device at terminal blocks, but shall be spliced and a tap brought out, thereby assuring no openings of the neutral in the replacement of a device.

8. Feeders shall be identified by means of nonferrous tags or pressure-sensitive labels securely fastened to all cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, manholes, switchboard rooms, terminations of cables, etc. Tags or labels shall be stamped or printed to include the feeder number, source and equipment supplied. If suspended type tags are provided, they shall be attached by nylon cables ties or other nonconductive permanent means.





9. Branch circuit conductors shall be identified at supply circuit breakers, with the circuit number using pressure sensitive adhesive wire markers.

10. Branch circuit wiring for lighting and other single phase 277 volt or 120 volt applications shall be multi-wired utilizing common neutrals. Under no circumstances shall any switch break a neutral conductor. Branch circuit wiring extending more than 100 feet to the nearest outlet from a panel shall be No.10.

11. Circuiting work shall comply with the following: a. Loads on panel busses shall be balanced on phases as evenly as possible. b. No neutral conductor shall be common to more than 1 circuit conductor connected to the

same phase leg of the supply system. c. Circuiting of panelboards shall allow breakers to be grouped logically by functions. C. Voltage Drops at New Construction: 1. Total Allowable Drop for Service Source to Load: Limit to a maximum drop of 5 percent. Increase wire

size, where necessary, to comply with this requirement. a. Branch Circuits: Limit to a maximum drop of 3 percent. b. Service Source to Individual Panelboards: Limit to a maximum drop of 2 percent.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES 16131




SECTION 16131 – OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY




A. Performance Requirements:

1. Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels.

2. Box size shall comply with NEC for number and size of conductors in boxes.

3. Box size shall comply with NEC for number and size of conduits entering and exiting each box.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s literature and technical data before starting work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Outlet Boxes:

1. Provide outlet boxes at required locations, where shown on the drawings, and as specified.

a. Fixture studs shall be securely fastened in an acceptable manner.

b. Plaster covers shall have depths suitable to the finish being applied to the walls.

c. Sheet steel boxes shall be properly drilled and tapped.

d. There shall be not more holes in any of the outlet boxes than are required for the entering conduits.

e. Depth of boxes shall allow for easy wire pulling and proper installation of wiring devices.

2. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel or rust resistant malleable iron alloy and comply with ANSI C33.65.

3. Outlet Boxes shall be as follows:

a. For Recessed Ceiling Fixtures:

1) 4 inch square sheet steel box with blank cover and suitable hanger bar-box to be fastened

to ceiling suspension members in an acceptable manner not more than 1 foot from fixture

opening.

b. For Surface or Stem Mounted Ceiling Fixtures from Slab with Concealed Conduit:

1) 4 inch sheet steel octagon concrete ring of a depth suitable to the construction and

furnished with top cover having a 3/8” fixture stud.

c. For Ceiling and Wall Bracket Outlets on Exposed Conduit in Dry Locations:

1) 4 inch octagon sheet steel box with 3/8” fixture stud.


FIRE STATION No. 13







d. For Surface Mounted Ceiling Fixture or Hung Ceilings:

1) 4 inch octagon sheet steel hung ceiling box with suitable hanger bars and 3/8” fixture

stud. Box to be fastened to ceiling suspension in an acceptable manner.

e. For Surface Mounted Wall Bracket Fixtures with Concealed Conduit:

1) 4 inch square sheet box with round opening plaster cover and 3/8” fixture stud.

f. For Ceiling and Wall Bracket Outlets on Exposed Conduit at Damp or Wet Locations:

1) 4 inch cast iron.

g. For Switches and Receptacles in Tile, Plastered, or Gypsum Board Walls:

1) 4 inch square sheet steel box or multi-gang box with proper plaster covers as required.

Two gangs may be provided by means of a 4 inch square box with two gang plaster cover.

h. For Switches and Receptacles in Enameled or Face Brick walls, Unfinished Walls, and Woodwork:

1) Single or multi-gang sheet steel utility boxes as required.

i. For Switches and Receptacles on Exposed Exterior Conduit Work:

1) Type FS or FD conduit.

j. For Telephone or Computer Outlets:

1) 4-11/16” square X 2-1/2” deep.

4. Boxes for fire alarm or signal systems, clocks, pilot lights, and other specialty equipment shall be by the

manufacturer of the enclosed equipment.

5. Wet/Damp Locations:

a. Provide gasketed, weathertight, screw covers, code gage galvanized steel pull boxes with

weatherproof conduit hubs equivalent to Myers Scru-Hub for pull boxes with multiple conduit

entries.

b. Provide cast metal hub type, dipped in rust inhibitor and with gaskets for individual conduit runs.

6. Extension Rings: Do not use to increase the volume of boxes, except where necessary due to multiple conduit

run conflicts.

a. Where such conflicts occur, an extension ring may be allowed for changes in direction of conduit to

make necessary clearances.

1) Not more than one extension ring may be used for each box where necessary.

B. Pull and Junction Boxes:

1. Where indicated in the plans and specifications or where necessary for compliance with code requirements

for cable installation, install junction and pull boxes of the proper size for conduits over 1-inch trade size.

Pull and junction boxes shall be of adequate size to accommodate installation of conductors without

excessive bending of conductors that could damage insulation.

2. Pull and junction boxes shall comply with Fed.Spec.WJ-800 and be of all steel construction, spot or seam

welded at joints, and hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

3. Boxes shall be drip proof with screw attached covers. Each box shall have a turned-in lip welded at joint to

develop full strength. Lip shall be drilled and tapped for 1/8” or 3/16” round head screws, symmetrically

placed. To provide adequate length of thread, nuts shall be tack welded on inside of lip, or lip shall be made

double thickness.


FIRE STATION No. 13







4. Pull and junction boxes shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand moderate twisting

strains. Steel boxes shall comply with the following:

a. 100 cubic inches or less shall be of No.14 gage steel.

b. Between 101 and 8500 cubic inches shall be No.12 gage steel.

c. Larger boxes shall be No.10 gage steel.

d. Barriers and reinforcing angles shall be supplied as required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Do not proceed with the work or this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the

work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Locations of outlets on electrical drawings are approximate only.

1. Do not scale drawings.

2. Consult architectural plans, sections, elevations, and details for exact locations of outlets and equipment and

rooms and spaces having furring or hung ceilings.

3. Verify door swings on architectural drawings for properly locating light switches.

4. Coordinate wall outlet locations with chalkboards, tackboards, cabinets, and equipment.

B. Determine the proper position of outlets and receptacles. Relocate any outlet or receptacle without additional cost to

the Owner if improperly located.

C. The A/E reserves the right to change the location of any outlet, apparatus, or equipment up to the time of roughing in

without additional cost to the Owner, provided conduit runs are not substantially increased.

D. Fasten and secure boxes to the building structure independent of the conduit. Provide acceptable plaster stops for

boxes to be set in plastered walls and ceilings.

E. Boxes and supports shall be fastened as follows:

1. To concrete or brick: Bolts and expansion shields.

2. To hollow masonry: Toggle bolts, or bolts and expansion shields.

3. To steel work: Machine screws or welded studs.

4. Explosive charge setting devices are not allowed.

F. Recessed wall outlets shall be flush with the wall surface. Install box in wall with cover to allow block or wall surface to

fit tight against lip of cover.


FIRE STATION No. 13







G. Where shown together on the plans, switches shall be ganged in one outlet.

1. Switches and receptacles shall be ganged together only where plans specifically indicate such combinations.

H. Outlets for duplex receptacles shall be arranged for vertical mounting of the receptacles except as specifically

indicated on plans.

I. Barriers shall be provided as necessary to isolate voltage classes.

J. Under no circumstances shall outlet boxes for adjoining spaces be placed back to back in partition walls.

K. Circuit breakers and switches shall not be grouped or ganged in outlet boxes unless they can be arranged where the

voltage between exposed live metal parts of adjacent switches does not exceed 300 volts. Provide barriers between

120 and 277 volt switches where ganged together.

L. Align rows of outlet boxes for ceiling lights.

M. Unless noted, specified, or directed otherwise, wall outlets shall be centered above finished floor as follows:

1. Convenience outlets: 18 inches to bottom of box.

2. Utility outlets: 18 inches to bottom of box.

3. Clock outlets: 90 inches to center.

4. Exit lights: 6 inches over doorway.

5. Switch outlets: 46 inches to bottom of box.

6. Special purpose outlets: as directed.

7. Telephone outlets: 18 inches to bottom of box.

8. Fire alarm visuals with or without horns: 78 inches to bottom of box.

9. Fire alarm horns: 6” minimum below adjacent surface, but not less than 8’6” or greater than 10’0” above

finish floor.

10. Fire alarm pull station: 46 inches to bottom of box. Refer to Architectural drawings for additional mounting

heights.

N. Pull and junction boxes shall be provided at locations required to reduce length of cable pull or reduce number of

elbows between outlets.

O. Provide blank covers for outlet boxes when devices or wiring has been removed or not installed.

P. Paint exposed boxes to match the color of the wall or ceiling to which they are mounted.

Q. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box, tag each feeder to clearly indicate electrical characteristics,

circuit number, and panel designation.

R. Color code covers of each box and panel, except for normal power system, for identification as follows:

1. Emergency power Red

2. Fire alarm Orange

3. Security alarm Blue

4. Sound Yellow


FIRE STATION No. 13







5. Telephone Green

6. TV Brown

7. Controls Purple

END OF SECTION



WIRING DEVICES 16140 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 3


SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections:

1. 01043 - Mechanical and Electrical General Requirements. ∆ Addendum #4 2. Division 16 - Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature and data before starting work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Florida Building Code (FBC). B. Comply with NEC 2005 (NFPA 70). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wiring devices shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, Bryant, Leviton, or Pass and Seymour. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Wiring Devices: Comply with NEMA Wd6 and NEC (NFPA 70). 1. Switches: a. Rated at 20 amps, 277 volts AC, horsepower rated for 1HP at 120 volts. b. Provide for back (not push-in) or side wiring. c. Key type switches shall be keyed identically. d. Flammable Storage Rooms: Use explosion proof switches. e. Manufacturers: Hubbell CSB 120 Series or accepted equivalent by Bryant, Leviton, or Pass and

Seymour. 2. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: a. Comply with NEMA 5-20R as applicable, be of specification grade, back (not push-in) and side

sys1

Polygon





wired, U-slotted grounding type, 3-wire, rated 20 amp, l25 volts AC. b. Double Duplex: Consist of 2 receptacles under a common plate. Single receptacles shall be

similar to duplex receptacles. c. Manufacturers: Hubbell CR20 or accepted equivalent by Bryant, Leviton, or Pass and Seymour. 3. Ground Fault Receptacles: a. NEMA 5-20R type, rated at 20 amps, 120 volts with 5 + 1 mA trip threshold, and UL nominal trip

time of 0.025 sec. b. Manufacturers: 1) Hubbell GF5352, Pass and Seymour 2091-FI feed thru type, or accepted equivalent by

Bryant or Leviton. 4. Special Purposes Receptacles: a. Comply with NEMA 5-20R, of specification grade, back (not push-in) or side wired. b. Provide ratings and type as indicated on Drawings. 5. Wiring devices shall be white color unless noted otherwise. B. Lighting and Exhaust Fan Switch at Single Use Toilet Rooms: Switch with built-in time delay. 1. Fan and light operate together when control is in "on" position. 2. Fan continues to operate for a minimum of 5 minutes after light is turned off. 3. 120V, 60 Hz, 4 amp capacity for each light circuit and fan circuit, white. 4. No.5C209 by Broan or accepted equivalent. C. Cover Plates: 1. Impact resistant nylon, by Hubbell or Leviton. Color as selected by A/E. Plate design shall be smooth

without ornamentation. 2. Molded plastic, by Hubbell or Leviton. Color as selected by A/E. Plate design shall be smooth without

ornamentation. 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) requirements: a. Metallic Outlet Boxes: UL 514A. b. Non-metallic Outlet Boxes: UL 514C. 4. Outlets in kitchens shall have brushed stainless steel plates. 5. Provide ganged switches to a maximum of three. If more are required on Drawings, provide in multiples of

two or three. 6. Provide weatherproof receptacles with cast aluminum, spring loaded dock-type gasketed wet location cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION





A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the

work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Verify location of wiring devices before rough-in of outlet boxes and conduit with Architectural Drawings for door

swings and furniture details. Duplex receptacles in finished areas shall be vertically mounted. C. Boxes mounted back-to-back are not allowed. D. Install devices tightly within box with screws provided. Do not rely upon plate for device alignment and support to

assure devices are grounded to box. In receptacles, use self-grounding screws, separate ground conductor or bond wire to box.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



MOTOR STARTER GROUP CONTROL 16156




SECTION 16156 MOTOR STARTER GROUP CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Motor starters with motor circuit protectors in a single enclosure as indicated on the drawings and

specified in this section.



2. 16120 - Wires and Cables.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's literature and technical information before starting work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Controls:

1. Cutler Hammer

2. General Electric.

3. Square D.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels.

B. Combination Starter Modules: Full voltage, non-reversing, magnetic starter, overload relays per phase, prewired with

motor circuit protector, sizes as shown on the drawings, panel mounted.

1. Furnish each combination starter module with the following mounted on the bottom part of the starter:

a. Reset button.

b. Start-stop pushbuttons with pilot light.

2. Construction:

a. Each combination starter module shall be in a separate compartment with removable barriers, all

part of a NEMA 1 enclosure with top and bottom gutters.

1) Lift-off door on each compartment shall be interlocked to prevent opening when the

breaker is in the ON position.

2) Disconnect mechanism shall be able to be pad locked in either the "ON" or "OFF" position.

3. Nameplate Identification: Furnish each combination starter module with accepted nameplate

identifying motors controlled, horsepower, and voltage.


FIRE STATION No. 13



MOTOR STARTER GROUP CONTROL 16156




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mount equipment on a 3/4" exterior grade plywood backboard.

1. Prime coat all surfaces, including edges, and apply 1 finish coat of accepted gray enamel on front side.

B. Install equipment according to manufacturer's recommendations and control wiring diagram furnished under Division

15.

END OF SECTION



TERMINAL CABINETS 16160 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 2


SECTION 16160 - TERMINAL CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 13810 - Energy Management System. 2. 13845 - Security Alarm System. 3. 15970 - HVAC Control System. ∆ Addendum #4 4. 167221 - Fire Alarm Detection System. ∆ Addendum #4 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's literature and technical data before starting work. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, construction details, elevations, and installation procedures. 1. Dimensioned outline drawings of the cabinets, including hinged door, lock data, metal gage, and finish. 2. Cabinet nameplate type, dimensions, and wording. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Ortronics Communication Cabinets or accepted equivalent. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels. B. Terminal Cabinets: 1. Cabinet shall be fabricated of 14 gage sheet metal. 2. Provide hinged doors of 14 gage sheet metal with lock. Lock shall be similar to type used on circuit breaker

panelboards. 3. Front cover shall be primed and painted with enamel finish manufacturer's standard gray. 4. Nameplate on cover shall have white letters on black background. 5. Cabinets shall be of size as required but in no event shall be less than 14 inches wide, 20 inches high, and 4

sys1

Polygon

sys1

Polygon



TERMINAL CABINETS 16160 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 2 of 2


inches deep. 6. Cabinets shall be keyed alike. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install surface mounted on wall or recessed as shown on plan. B. Provide identification number for each terminal in the cabinet. 1. Shop Drawings submitted shall contain diagram and schedule for each terminal cabinet showing use of each

wire and the associated terminal number.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 16250




SECTION 16250 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. 16620 - Standby Emergency Generator.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit detailed shop drawing for review.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Automatic Transfer Switch: ASCO Bulletin 940 or accepted equivalent by Onan, Russell, or Zenith.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Automatic Transfer Switch:

1. The current rating shall be as shown on the Drawings.

2. Control voltage shall be l20 volts.

3. The transfer switch shall be suitable for operation at a maximum line voltage of 600 volts and according to

the requirements of NFPA 110 and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Ull008.

B. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be designed and tested by manufacturer. Include necessary relays and

component parts, with electrically and mechanically interlocked switch. Provide the following functions:

1. Upon power line outage, automatically start generating set. When generating set comes up to voltage,

disconnect load circuits from main line and transfer them to standby set output.

2. Upon normal power line return, transfer load back to line and stop set.

3. Rating of transfer switch shall be sufficient to handle capacity of loads being transferred and allow for short

circuit currents of 20 times full load rating for one second.

4. Automatic transfer switch shall be mechanically held, electrically operated type rated for continuous duty in

an unventilated sheet metal enclosure.

a. The switch shall be double throw having electrically operated normal/emergency positions

inherently interlocked mechanically and with main contacts mechanically attached to a common

shaft.

b. Provide a manual operator.

2. Main contacts shall be silver alloy wiping-action type and protected by arcing contacts.

a. Main contacts shall transfer in l/l5th of a second or less.

b. Switch and relay contacts, coils, springs, and control elements shall be removable from the front of


FIRE STATION No. 13







the transfer switch without removal of the switch panels from the enclosure and without

disconnection of drive linkages or power conductors.

c. Sensing and control relays shall be continuous duty industrial control type with minimum contact

rating of 10 amperes.

3. Undervoltage Protection:

a. Solid state voltage sensitive devices shall be provided to monitor normal power source and signal

emergency power to start and assume load, on a partial loss of power on any phase or where

feedback voltages exist.

b. These shall have calibrated dial adjustments and be temperature compensated for a maximum

deviation of plus or minus 2 volts, from minus 25 degrees F. to plus 175 degrees F.

4. Battery Charger:

a. Load transfer control shall include a SCR design, fused, battery charger to automatically charge and

maintain starting battery of emergency set.

b. It shall have a maximum charge rate of 2 amps at 24 volts (nominal) and automatically taper to

trickle charge.

c. It shall have a manually set timer to provide an equalized charge for periods up to l2 hours.

5. Time Delay to Start Emergency Power: Provide a time delay, adjustable from l.5 seconds, to prevent

emergency power from needless starting and stopping during periods of momentary voltage fluctuations from

normal power source.

6. Time Delay to Pick-Up Load: Provide a time delay, adjustable from 5 seconds to 50 seconds, to prevent

emergency power from accepting load until emergency power operates unloaded for a predetermined period

of time.

7. Time Delay to Retransfer Load: After normal power has returned to service, provide a time delay adjustable

from 1 to 30 minutes to delay retransferring load to normal power for purpose of;

a. Overriding initial voltage fluctuations of returning normal power.

b. Providing a predetermined minimum period of operating time for emergency power.

c. If emergency set should fail during delay period, time delay shall be bypassed and load instantly

retransferred to normal power.

8. Time Delay to Stop Emergency Power: After load has been retransferred to normal power, provide a time

delay, adjustable from 1 to 30 minutes, to allow engine to cool by permitting emergency set to operate

unloaded for a predetermined period of time before shutdown.

9. Automatic Exerciser:

a. Means shall be provided to automatically start and run emergency generating set for a set period of

time for purpose of testing or exercising complete engine, alternator and load transfer control.

b. After completion of set period of time for testing and exercising, emergency source shall be

automatically shutdown.

c. Such periods for testing or exercising shall be adjustable in multiples of 15 minutes per period with


FIRE STATION No. 13







period repeated on any combination of days over a cycle of 7 days before recycling.

d. During period of testing or exercising, emergency power shall assume load.

10. Test Switch: Provide to simulate a normal source failure.

11. Provide for Remote Control Operation from the Fire Control Station where required.

12. Disconnect Device: Provide means to electrically disconnect control section from transfer switch to permit

safe access for maintenance or service of control, during periods of normal operation.

13. Switch: Fully rated neutral transfer contacts driven by the main contact shaft that momentarily connect the

neutrals of the 2 sources during the transfer/ retransfer operations. The neutrals shall remain interconnected

until the source contacts close on the source to which the load is being transferred.

14. Normal and Emergency Lamps: Provide colored indicating lights on the enclosure door and labeled to show

transfer switch position: Green - normal source; Red - emergency.

15. Provide 2 auxiliary contacts, 1 to close and the other to open when normal source fails.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the cabinet rigidly and securely attached to building construction and not depending upon conduits for support.

B. Install and connect automatic transfer switch according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



ELECTRICAL SITE UTILITIES 16402




SECTION 16402 - ELECTRICAL SITE UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Electrical site utilities and coordination of requirements with the utility company and service

specifications.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data before starting work. Include materials, finishes, accessories, and installation

instructions.

B. Dimensioned drawings of manholes and handholes/pullboxes.

C. Specification sheets including splice prints of primary cable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Precast Concrete Manholes and Handholes/Pullboxes

1. Brooks Products, El Monte, CA or accepted equivalent.

B. Precast Polymer Concrete Manholes and Handholes/Pullboxes.

1. Quazite by Strongwell, Lenoir City, TN or accepted equivalent.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Manholes:

1. Manholes shall be constructed approximately where shown. The exact location of each manhole shall be

determined after careful consideration has been given to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving.

Manholes in corridors or pedestrian traffic areas are not allowed.

2. The location of each manhole shall be approved by the A/E before construction of the manhole is started.

3. Manholes shall be the type noted on the layout drawings and shall be constructed according to the applicable

details as indicated.

a. Top, walls, and bottom shall consist of reinforced concrete.

b. Walls and bottom shall be of monolithic construction.

c. Concrete shall be Class B or 2,500 psi at 28 days.


FIRE STATION No. 13







d. Concrete, forms, mixing, pouring, and reinforcing steel shall comply with concrete section.

4. The Contractor may, at his option, use precast concrete or precast polymer concrete manholes having the

required strength and inside dimensions.

a. Precast Polymer Concrete Products:

1) Provide standard cover logos and colors as selected by A/E.

2) Not to used where exposed to vehicular traffic.

5. Frames and Covers:

a. Gray cast iron construction.

b. A machine-finished seat shall be provided to insure a perfect joint between the frame and cover.

c. Frames and covers shall be delivered on the job unpainted and, after inspection and approval of the

A/E, shall be given 2 coats of asphalt paint.

d. In paved areas, the top of manhole covers shall be flush with the finished surface of the paving.

e. In unpaved areas, the top of manhole covers shall be approximately 1/2" above the finished grade.

f. Where existing grades are higher than finished grades, a sufficient number of courses of brick shall

be installed between the top of manhole and manhole frame to elevate temporarily the manhole

cover to existing grade level.

g. Where duct lines enter manholes, the sections of duct may be either cast in the concrete or may

enter the manhole through a rectangular window opening of suitable dimensions provided in the

manhole walls.

h. Where openings are provided for entrance of duct lines, the space between ducts and between

ducts and manhole walls shall be calked tight with lead wool or equivalent.

j. A cast metal grille-type sump frame and cover shall be installed over the manhole sump.

k. A cable-pulling iron shall be installed in the wall opposite each duct line entrance.

6. Cables:

a. Support on walls by hot dip galvanized cable racks equipped with adjustable hooks and insulators.

b. Cable racks shall be installed in each manhole.

c. Not less than 2 spare hooks shall be installed on each cable rack.

d. Insulators shall be made of best-quality, high-glazed porcelain.

e. Insulators are not required on spare hooks.

B. Ground Rods:

1. In each electric manhole, at a convenient point close to the wall, a 3/4" by 10-foot copper clad steel ground

rod shall be driven into the earth before the floor is poured with approximately 4 inches of the ground rod

extending above the manhole floor.

a. When precast-concrete manholes are used, the top of the ground rod may be below the floor and a

No.1/0 AWG tinned copper ground conductor brought into the manhole through a watertight sleeve

in the manhole wall.


FIRE STATION No. 13







b. All non-current carrying metal items within the manhole shall be bonded to the ground rod.

2. Exterior of concrete manholes shall receive 2 coats of 220 Fibrated Emulsion by Karnak Chemical Corp.,

Monsey Products Co., Monsey Asphalt Emulsion Roof Coating Fiber, or Sonneborn Building Products,

Hydrocide 700B.

C. Ducts:

1. Underground ducts of the size as indicated on drawings shall consist of a number of individual PVC or steel

ducts:

a. Unprotected service conductor raceways before the main disconnect shall be encased in a

reinforced concrete envelope with a minimum depth of 24 inches between finished grade and top of

the concrete envelope.

b. Protected service conductor raceways past the main disconnect may be direct buried if at least 24

inches below grade.

2. Plastic conduit shall be single bore and shall be Schedule 40 polyvinyl-chloride conduit conforming to

NEMA TC

3. Conduit fittings shall comply with the applicable NEMA Standards, except if NEMA standards for conduit

fittings do not exist for the type of plastic installed, fittings shall be as recommended by the conduit

manufacturer.

4. Conduit and Fittings:

a. Free, within commercial tolerances, of objectionable lines, striations, bubbles, welds, and other

manufacturing defects that would impair the service of the conduit.

b. The bore of the conduit shall be straight and circular in cross section with smooth interior surfaces

free from obstructions and rough and flaky areas.

c. The conduit and fittings shall be free of all substances that could damage wire or cable covering

used on rubber-covered wire, polyethylene, or polyvinyl chloride sheathed cable.

d. The conduit and fittings shall be corrosion-resistant and not adversely affected by acids, alkalies,

salts, bacteria, and other organic matter that would normally be encountered in the ground.

e. The conduit length for each size shall be the length that is standard with the manufacturer with a

permissible tolerance of 1/4" per 10 foot length.

f. Bends, elbows, and other fittings shall be capable of freely passing a ball that is 1/4" less in

diameter that the nominal bore of the conduit.

g. Fittings shall be of a type especially made for use with plastic conduit for electrical service.

h. Conduit and fittings shall be capable of being joined, by means of a solvent welding cement to

provide a watertight and roof-proof joint.

5. Provide No.12 AWG galvanized iron drag wire in empty power and signal ducts.

6. Steel ducts shall be Schedule 40 hot dip galvanized rigid steel conduit.

D. Underground Concrete Pull Boxes:


FIRE STATION No. 13







1. Concrete pull boxes, with sizes as shown on drawings, can be either poured-in-place as described for

manholes, or precast concrete or precast polymer concrete manholes having the required strength and inside

dimensions.

2. Boxes shall be provided with vehicular traffic covers. Covers shall have 1/2" hex bolt at 2 places to bolt cover

to pull box walls.

3. Install boxes plumb and level with final grade. Do not install boxes in walkways.

4. Boxes shall be accessible and only for the use intended. Do not mix power and communication cables in the

same box or normal power with emergency power unless system cables are completely isolated in a manner

approved by A/E.

5. Boxes shall be installed to not allow more than 200 feet of cable pulling. Provide ground rod where shown on

drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Duct lines shall be laid to a minimum grade of 4 inches per 100 feet.

B. Grade may be away from buildings, from one manhole to the next or both ways from a high point between manholes,

depending on the contour of the finished grade. Low points that may trap water are not acceptable.

C. Duct lines shall be installed with the top of conduits or concrete in encased duct lines not less than 24 inches below

finished grade or finished paving at any point.

1. 3 inch minimum concrete cover on all sides and 2-1/2" minimum clear separation between power conduits.

2. 3 inch minimum separation between power conduits and signal conduits in the same concrete encasement.

D. Changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by

long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends may be used at

the ends of the run.

1. The long sweep bends may be made up of one or combinations of curved or straight sections.

2. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of 18 inches for use with ducts of less than 3 inches in

diameter and a minimum radius of 36 inches for ducts of 3 inches in diameter and larger.

E. Conduits shall terminate in end bells where duct lines enter manholes.


FIRE STATION No. 13







F. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned before using or laying.

G. During construction and after the duct line is completed, the ends of the conduits shall be plugged to prevent water

washing mud into the conduits or manholes.

H. Keep the conduits clean of concrete, dirt, and any other substance during construction.

I. After the duct line has been completed, a standard flexible mandrel not less than 12 inches long, having a diameter

approximately 1/4" less than the inside diameter of the conduit, shall be pulled through each conduit. After mandrel

pull, a brush with stiff bristles shall be pulled through each conduit to remove particles of earth, sand, or gravel from

the line.

J. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in the lead wire.

K. Where connection is made to an existing duct that is of different material and shape that the duct line being installed, a

suitable coupling of a type recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used.

L. Conduits shall be stored to avoid warping or deterioration. Plastic conduit shall be stored on a flat surface and

protected from the direct rays of the sun.

M. Conduit joints in concrete encasement may be placed side-by-side horizontally but shall be staggered at least 6 inches

vertically.

N. At locations where transition couplings between different types of conduits are installed and either run of conduit is

concrete encased, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or required, the encasement shall include the conduit joint

plus a 30 inch extension of the encasement behind the conduit joint measured along the centerline of the conduit

unless the 30 inch extension carries to a point more than 8 inches above grade level in which case the encasement

may be terminated at the 8 inch level.

O. Each single conduit of the duct bank shall be completely encased in concrete as indicated.

1. The thickness of concrete encasement indicated is the minimum thickness, and may be increased to fit the

actual shape of the trench.

2. Separators or spacing blocks shall be made of steel, concrete, plastic, or a combination of these materials

placed on not greater than 5-foot centers. Wood spacers are not acceptable.

3. Ducts shall be securely tied down and anchored to prevent movement during the placement of concrete.

P. Installation of Couplings:

1. Joints in conduit shall be made up according to the manufacturer's recommendations for the particular

conduit and coupling selected.

2. Without specific recommendations, the various types of conduit joint couplings shall be made watertight.


FIRE STATION No. 13







Q. Plastic conduit joints shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement inside the plastic coupling fitting and outside

the conduit ends.

1. The conduit and fitting shall then be slipped together, until seated, with a slight twist to set the joint tightly,

and the conduit then rotated one-half turn to distribute the cement evenly.

2. Excess cement built up on the inside surface of the conduit shall then be removed.

R. Ends of ducts entering through concrete foundation walls, manholes, concrete pads, and at the duct bank termination

points shall be of rigid steel conduit 10 length minimum. Connections between duct line conduits and steel conduits

shall be made with approved couplings. At ends of cable carrying ducts shall be adequately sealed against water entry.

Provide end bells on conduit entries into manholes and walls as specified under manholes.

S. Duct openings in manholes shall have extended reinforcing rods and shall be keyed-in reinforcing rods of duct bank.

T. Steel reinforcing rods shall be installed during construction of the duct bank.

U. Spare conduits shall be capped inside building wall. Spare ducts shall be plugged with plastic duct plugs in all

manholes.

V. A No.6 bare stranded copper ground conductor shall be laid in concrete. It shall be continuous in duct work and

through manholes and shall be attached to ground rods in each manhole.

W. Where primary cable is installed inside buildings it shall be run in Schedule 40 rigid metallic conduit marked High

Voltage 10 feet on centers along the conduit. Steel conduit shall be grounded.

X. Bond all metal underground pull box covers.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



METERING AND SUB-METERING 16430




SECTION 16430 - METERING AND SUB-METERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. 16112 - Raceways and Conduit.



A. Coordinate requirements for metering with local utility company. Sub-meters shall be installed where indicated and as

requested by the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Monitoring Sub-Meters: Triad Communications Inc., Albuquerque, NM, of the type and characteristics of the load

being monitored or accepted equivalent.

B. Refer to Section 16112 - Raceways.

C. Refer to Section 16120 - Wire and Cable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit and meter as directed and required by utility company for connection to meter.

B. Meter Can: Provided by Contractor.

C. Sub-meter to be installed per manufacturer's instructions, semi-permanent to be reused in other areas.


FIRE STATION No. 13



METERING AND SUB-METERING 16430




END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440




SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. 09900 - Painting.

2. 16475 - Overcurrent Protective Devices


A. Performance Requirements: Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels. Label for "SERVICE ENTRANCE"

where so applied.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's literature and technical data before starting work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Disconnect Switches:

1. Siemens.

2. Square D.

3. Cutler Hammer

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Disconnect switches shall comply NEMA KSI-1975 for type HD and shall be of heavy duty type, enclosed, of quick-

make, quick-break construction. Rating shall be as indicated on drawings. Switches shall be horsepower and I2t rated,

UL labeled.

B. Disconnect Switch Enclosure:

1. NEMA 1 for indoor use.

2. NEMA 3R for outdoor use.

3. NEMA 4X for use in kitchens and exterior corrosive environments.

C. Disconnect switch operating handle shall be of insulated box mounted type that directly drives switch mechanism

suitable for padlocking in "OFF" position.

D. Defeatable, front accessible, "coin-proof" interlocks shall be provided to prevent opening of cover when switch is in

"ON" position, and prevent turning switch ON when door is open. Securely fastened metallic nameplate shall include


FIRE STATION No. 13



DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440




highly visible "ON-OFF" indication.

E. Motor Disconnect Means: Provide each motor with an in-sight disconnect means, when required by NEC, and where

shown on the drawings.

F. Provide fuses for disconnect switches so indicated. Fuses shall be dual element type as specified in Section 6475 -

Overcurrent Protective Devices.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install the disconnect switches vertically with top not more than 6 feet above the floor, and rigidly and securely

attached to the building. Disconnect switches shall not depend upon conduit for support.

B. Where used as service entrance main disconnects, switches shall be permanently labeled "MAIN SWITCH 1 of 4",

"MAIN SWITCH 2 of 4", etc.

C. Optional Mounting:

1. Plywood Panel: Mount panelboards on backboard of 3/4" exterior grade plywood, finished one side, primed

all surfaces, painted with one coat gray of fire retardant enamel (finished side) and secure to wall with

approved shields or screws as directed by the A/E.

2. Unistrut: Mount disconnect switches on Unistrut P-3000 mounting channels at top and bottom, secured

similarly to wall.

D. Label switch covers in 1inch high stenciled letters showing equipment served.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



GROUNDING 16450



Fotoer has been updated - ∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4∆ Addendum #4

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY





1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's literature giving materials, finishes, accessories, and installations where required.

B. Ground resistance tests.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Grounding system installation shall comply with Article 250 NFPA 70 National Electrical

Code -2005 (NEC).

B. Coordination: Arrange with Plumbing Contractor to have 3/4" copper water line stubbed 6 inches inside rooms with

transformers for ground connection. The water line shall be buried and have at least 10 feet in contact with earth.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Grounding System.

1. Grounding system shall comply with ANSI C33.8, IEEE-81.

2. The electrical system and equipment shall be grounded according to the requirements of the NEC and as

specified.

3. The grounding conductor shall be an insulated copper wire of size indicated.

4. Where not indicated, the conductor shall be according to the requirements of the NEC except that minimum

size shall be No.8 copper for system ground.

5. Inaccessible connections shall be made with the exothermic welding process using equipment manufactured

by Burndy or Erico Products.

6. Accessible connections shall be made with multiple bolt silicon bronze connectors specifically designed and

accepted for the connection to be made.

7. Connectors shall be as manufactured by Burndy or O.Z. Electric.

8. Grounding jumpers shall be provided across metal parts separated by non-conducting materials, or when


FIRE STATION No. 13



GROUNDING 16450




joined, so there is a high resistance at the joints.

9. Grounding electrical conductors shall not be buried directly in concrete. Provide a conduit sleeve where each

cable passes through concrete. If buried in earth, they shall be tinned.

10. Grounding for the lightning protection system shall be as specified under "LIGHTNING PROTECTION

SYSTEM" and as shown on the drawings.

11. Refer to electrical drawings for additional grounding.

B. Grounding Source:

1. Grounding electrical system shall comply with NEC 250.81. A ground ring or mat buried beneath the

switchgear room, counterpoise and ground rods as shown on drawings, connection to the metal cold water

main, metal frame of the building, and to a concrete encased electrode. All the grounding electrodes shall be

bonded together if available on site.

2. Ground sources shall be connected to the 4" wide x 1/4" thick (length to be determined by the number of

ground terminals to be connected to the bus) ground bus mounted on the switchgear room wall. The

substation ground bus shall be connected to this ground bus, with a separate cable at each end of each bus.

3. Maximum resistance to ground shall be limited to 5 ohms. Additional ground rods shall be driven if required

to maintain this level.

4. Maximum ground resistance to each of individual rods shall be 25 ohms.

5. Submit test results for acceptance indicating that these values have been met, using the fall of potential

method as directed in IEEE Standard 81-1983.

C. System Grounds: Neutral bus and ground bus in switchgear shall be connected by means of an accepted bus link, and

connected to the ground bus in the substation room.

D. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel not less than 3/4" in diameter, 10 feet long, driven full length into the earth.

E. Cold Water Pipe:

1. Ground loop shall be connected to the building steel and shall also be grounded to main cold water pipe at

point of entrance of the metallic water service with copper conductor in conduit.

2. Connection to cold water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp.

3. If flanged pipes are encountered, connections shall be made with the lug bolted to the street side of the

flange connection.

F. Parts to be Grounded: Switchgear frame, panelboard frames, fittings, fixtures and devices, cable sheaths, neutral of

transformers, boxes and raceways, motor frames, outdoor lighting poles, emergency generator set, non-current

carrying parts of appliances and devices, and all other parts and equipment as required by NEC. Neutral wire shall

never be used as grounding means.

G. Conductor: Grounding cable shall be green insulated copper stranded cable, soft drawn or annealed. Sized as indicated

on drawings, from the main switchboard to each panel, power outlet, or load, except as specified for lighting branch

circuits.


FIRE STATION No. 13



GROUNDING 16450




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install grounding system as shown on drawings.

B. Connections to equipment, bus, or conduit shall be made with approved type of solderless connector and shall be

thoroughly cleaned and made bright before connection is made to insure metal contact.

C. Connections inaccessible after completion of project shall be irreversible type.

D. The grounding medium for lighting branch circuits shall be the conduit system.

1. Ground the lighting fixture by means of a conductor between the outlet box and the fixture.

2. Locknut connections to cabinets, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., shall be drawn up sufficiently tight to assure

a continuous metal-to-metal bond, where a separate ground conductor is not provided.

3. Where GFCI type receptacles are indicated, provide a separate ground conductor from the panelboard.

E. Bond conduits stubbing under switchboard, motor control center, and similar locations using bonding bushings. Run a

separate ground conductor with the phase conductors from the motor control center ground bus or a grounding

bushing in the starter enclosure to each motor frame.

F. Do not use flexible conduit as a grounding medium. Provide a bonding wire in flexible conduits and connect to the

boxes at each end in an approved manner.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, provide in each feeder conduit an equipment grounding conductor. For parallel runs,

provide a ground conductor in each conduit.

H. Provide a ground rod driven through or near pole bases and weld a No.10 AWG wire or as indicated on drawings, to the

top of the rod and extend the wire to a grounding lug in the base and bond the anchor bolts. Ground wire shall be

connected to metallic feed conduit or circuit ground conductor if non-metallic feed conduit is used.

I. Bond all metal underground pull box covers.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



GROUNDING 16450





FIRE STATION No. 13



PANELBOARDS 16470




SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY



2. 16475 - Overcurrent Protective Devices.


A. Performance Requirements: Materials shall bear Underwriter Laboratories (UL) labels.

B. Panelboards used as service entrance equipment shall be UL labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Panelboards:

1. Siemens.

2. Square D.

3. Cutler Hammer

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Panelboards:

1. Interiors shall be factory assembled and designed to allow switching and protective devices to be replaced

without disturbing adjacent units, without removing the main bus connectors, and allowing circuits to change

without machining, drilling, or tapping.

2. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction unless narrow column panels are indicated.

A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.

3. Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single

pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral bussing shall

have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. A ground bus shall be provided in

all panels.

B. Boxes and Trim:

1. Boxes shall be at least 20 inches wide made from code gage galvanized sheet steel.


FIRE STATION No. 13



PANELBOARDS 16470




a. Provide minimum gutter space according to NEC.

b. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other

electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space.

c. At least 4 interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided.

2. Switching device handles shall be accessible.

a. Doors and panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts.

b. Doors shall have flush chrome plated handle with cylinder lock and catch, except doors over 48

inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners top and bottom of door in addition to the flush type

cylinder lock and catch.

c. Panelboard switching devices with individual dead front doors shall be acceptable instead of

standard door in trim design.

d. Panelboard trim clamps shall be of the indicating type.

3. Door hinges shall be concealed. Locks shall be keyed alike. Furnish directory frame and card having a

transparent cover with each door.

4. Exterior and interior steel surfaces of the trim shall be properly cleaned, primed with rust inhibiting

phosphatic coating, and finished with manufacturer's standard gray paint.

a. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box for at least 3/4" all around.

b. Surface trims shall have the same width and height as the box.

c. Trims shall be mountable by a screwdriver without the need for special tools.

d. After installation, trim clamps shall not be accessible when the panel door is closed and locked.

5. Panelboards exposed to the weather shall have NEMA type 3R raintight enclosure or NEMA 4X in corrosive

environments.

C. Electrical Components:

1. Main bus bars shall be copper sized according to UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any current

carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C. above an ambient of 40 degrees C. maximum. Provide main

circuit breakers, main lugs, or sub-feed lugs as required.

2. Each panelboard shall incorporate breakers as shown with AIC or higher, at the application voltage, than the

available fault at its location along the electrical distribution system, as determined by short circuit study.

Minimum rating of breakers shall be:

a. Lighting and power panels for use at 120/208 volts: 225 amp maximum with circuit breakers rated

at 10K AIC symmetrical at 240 volts. Type B10B by Westinghouse or accepted equivalent.

b. Distribution panels for use at 120/208 volts: UL listed with minimum integrated assembly rating of

22K AIC. Type Q22B by Westinghouse or accepted equivalent.

3. Panels tested and listed according to UL 67 and bearing an integrated short circuit rating shall be determined

by the short circuit study on the electrical system with 10,000 AIC minimum.

4. Any 2 single pole circuit breaker shall be replaceable by 1 two-pole circuit breaker and any 3 single-pole


FIRE STATION No. 13



PANELBOARDS 16470




breaker shall be replaceable by 1 three-pole circuit breaker.

5. Where new circuit breakers are specified to be installed within existing panelboards, they shall be compatible

in terms of manufacture, type, and AIC.

6. Distribution panelboards, 400 amperes and over, shall be provided with molded case circuit breakers tested

and UL labeled according to UL 489.

7. Breakers 100 ampere through 400 ampere frame sizes shall be thermal-magnetic trip with inverse time

current characteristics, unless otherwise noted.

8. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter circuit breakers where indicated.

9. Emergency Panelboards Identification: Paint door red and stencil in 1 inch high yellow letters "EMERGENCY

PANEL" in addition to appropriate individual panel identification as shown on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and regulations.

B. Panelboards shall be installed where indicated and with top of cabinet 6'-6" above floor, and shall be rigidly and

securely attached to building construction and shall not depend upon conduit for support. Allow at least 1/2" air space

behind wall mounted panelboards.

C. Install panelboards according to manufacturer's recommended data. Maintain clearances required by the National

Electrical Code, with particular attention to working space around panelboards. Maintain clear space above

panelboards, coordinate with other trades to avoid placement of panelboards below piping, ductwork, or other foreign

appurtenances. Relocate panels at no additional cost should such interferences occur.

D. Supply panelboards with phenolic nameplate 1 inch x 3 inch on exterior of panels and engraved with panel designation

and voltage rating. Lighting and power panelboards shall be provided with a clear plastic enclosed typewritten directory

inside. Circuit identification shall include load type (lighting, receptacles, etc.) and rooms served.

E. Where flush type panelboards are indicated, provide one 3/4" empty conduit terminated in accessible ceiling above for

each 3 spare circuit breakers provided in the panelboard.

F. Install circuit breakers in existing panelboards according to manufacturer's recommendation. Verify tightness of

connections including mains. Identify new circuits on the panel directory. If none exists, provide one.


FIRE STATION No. 13



PANELBOARDS 16470




G. Clean and touch up panelboard as required at completion of the project.

END OF SECTION



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 3


SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY


1. 16425 - Switchboards. ∆ Addendum #4

2. 16440 - Disconnect Switches. 3. 16470 - Panelboards. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature and technical data before starting work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Fuses shall comply with NEMA FUI and ANSI C33.42. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Circuit Breakers: 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. Cutler Hammer B. Fuses: 1. Bussman. 2. Cefco. 3. Littelfuse, Inc.

sys1

Polygon





2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers shall be a circuit interrupting device operating both manually for normal switching functions

and automatically under overload and short circuit conditions, while providing circuit and self protection when applied in its ratings. Provide at voltage, phase, and amps indicated, with symmetrical amperes interrupting rating to be equal or larger than that shown on drawings. Control and signaling function may be incorporated by use of accessories.

2. Operating mechanism shall be entirely trip-free so contacts cannot be held close against an abnormal over-current or short circuit condition.

3. Operating handle of circuit breaker shall open and close all poles of a multi-pole breaker simultaneously. Circuit breakers shall meet applicable NEMA AB-1 and have UL label. Each circuit breaker shall have a trip unit to provide overload and short circuit protection. Trip element shall operate a common trip bar that shall open all poles in case of an overload or short circuit through any 1 pole.

4. Ampere rating shall be clearly visible. Contacts shall be of non-welding silver alloy. Circuit breakers to be used in switchboards, lighting and power panelboards, distribution panelboards and individually enclosed shall be 1, 2, or 3 poles as indicated on drawings.

B. Molded Case: 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type, mounted in lighting and power panelboards and

individually enclosed units. 2. Molded case circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break action. 3. Molded case circuit breakers for panelboards shall have the following minimum symmetrical ampere

interrupting capacities (RMS): a. 120 volts: 10,000 SAIC power panelboards. 4. Each molded case circuit breaker shall have a thermal magnetic trip device with trip ratings as shown on

drawings. C. Combination Molded Case and Current Limiting Fuse: 1. Bolt-on type mounted in switchboard. 2. Circuit breaker section shall be molded case and shall have the features previously mentioned for molded

case breakers. 3. Fuse compartment located within molded case enclosure with accessibility for fuse replacing. 4. Unit circuit breaker shall trip as any of its fuses blows. 5. Unit shall be rated at 100,000 AIC RMS minimum. 6. Current limiting fuses provided as specified in this section. D. Fuses: 1. Provide fuses for fusible equipment regardless of which trade has furnished such equipment. 2. The time-current characteristic and ratings shall assure positive selective coordination. 3. Fuses, 601 amperes and larger, shall comply with UL Class L standard and be Shawmut Form 480 "Amp-

Trap" or Bussman "Hi Cap". 4. Fuses, 600 amperes and lower, where applied to general feeder and branch circuit protection, shall comply

with UL Class RKl standards and be Shawmut dual element "Amp- Trap" or Bussman "Low Peak" Limitron.





5. Dual element fuses shall have low resistance and relatively low operating temperatures. Fuses shall be provided with thermal protection against damage from poor contact. Fuse shall open when temperature at thermal cutout reaches 280 degrees F., preventing damage to clips and switches before fuse opens. They shall combine high interrupting capacity (200,000 ampere RMS symmetrical) with time delay, holding 500 percent load for a minimum of 10 seconds.

6. Current limiting fuses shall be designed to provide high interrupting capacity (200,000 AIC SYM RMS) plus fast clearing time restricting let-thru current and energy to very low values. Clearing time on a severe short circuit shall be limited to less than 1/4 cycle.

7. Individual motor circuit fuses shall be sized at approximately 150 percent of motor full load current. Fuses, below 600 amperes shall comply with UL Class RK5 standards and be Shawmut dual element "Amp-Trap" or Bussman Fusetron. Fuses 60l amperes and larger, shall comply with UL Class L standards and be Shawmut Form 480 "Amp-Trap" or Bussman "Hi Cap" KTU.

8. Fuses, where required for circuit breaker backup protection shall comply with UL Class RKl standards and be Chase-Shawmut Class RK1 "Amp-Trap" or Bussman "Limitron".

9. Provide 10 percent spares (minimum of three) of each size and type of fuses furnished. Spare fuses shall be placed in a wall-mounted cabinet located in the main electric room.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the

work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations applicable codes and regulations and accepted submittals. B. Two and three pole breakers must be true two and three pole breakers. C. Do not combine single pole breakers with common handle connection to meet multiple pole breaker requirements. D. Label circuit breaker enclosures with 1 inch high stenciled letters showing equipment served.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 16511




SECTION 16511 - LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY






B. Explosion-proof, shielded, and vapor tight and wet location fixtures shall bear UL labels appropriate for the type of

application.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Furnish certified photometric data for fixtures.

C. Upon request, a sample of each fixture proposed for use and specified unit shall be submitted to the A/E for review.

D. Provide lighting calculations to comply with Florida Building Code (FBC) and IES minimum footcandle level when

required.


A. Lighting fixtures and lamps requirements shall comply with FPL Commercial/Industrial Energy Conservation Programs

Standards, if FPL is the available utility company.

B. Comply with Florida Building Code (FBC).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Fixtures in student areas shall be provided with solid lenses.

B. Surface mounted fixtures in student areas or outdoors shall be vandal resistant, with 10 year lens warranty. Fixture

bases shall be metal and fastened to mounting locations with metal components.


FIRE STATION No. 13







C. Exterior fixture shall be of aluminum or plastic construction.

D. Lighting Fixtures:

1. Provide lighting fixtures as indicated on the drawings and as specified.

2. The schedule and details of lighting fixtures, appearing on the drawings, indicate the type, construction,

appearance, quality, and performance of the fixtures required.

a. Any proposed deviation from the fixtures specified requires the proposed substitute product be

listed in the latest FPL Commercial/Industrial Lighting Approved Products.

b. Any proposed deviation from the fixtures specified shall equal or be superior to the item specified

under these headings.

c. Proposed substitute lighting fixtures will be judged on overall quality on construction.

d. Provide 120V working sample of proposed substitution with cord, plug, and lamp.

e. The fixture manufacturers products scheduled are considered acceptable, based on the equivalency

of individual units as determined by the A/E.

3. Materials used in the manufacture of fixtures shall be new and the best of their respective kind, and shall be

formed and assembled in a neat, accurate, and professional manner.

a. Sheet metal shall be of sufficient thickness or shall be ribbed, flanged, or otherwise reinforced so

that lighting fixtures and their component parts will withstand the stresses of normal handling and

installation and service without undue distortion of shape.

b. Plastering or other installation procedures shall not be relied on to reinforce lighting fixtures or their

component parts.

c. Fixture bases shall be metal and fastened to mounting location with metal components.

4. Finishes:

a. Painted steel sheet shall be processed with Bonderize or equal phosphate treatment or shall be

Paintlok or Galvanneal.

b. Unpainted sheet steel shall be Galvanneal, by Republic Steel or accepted equivalent.

c. Springs shall be of full hard temper stainless steel.

d. Fasteners of ferrous metal shall be cadmium plated or zinc plated with chromate.

e. Screws mounting fixture housing in plaster ring shall be minimum #8, pointed to facilitate

installation.

f. Plaster frame rings shall be of sufficient strength to withstand deformation during installation, and of

suitable materials or finish to prevent corrosion from ceiling plasters and mortars.

1) The contractor shall furnish the fixture manufacturer a complete list of fixtures that will be

installed in acoustical plaster ceilings with types and quantities.

g. Painted finishes shall be baked epoxy, polyester powder coated, acrylic or accepted equivalent

finish suitable for the service required including temperature and accepted by A/E. Finish shall be

applied after fabrication.

5. Fixtures shall be complete with canopies, suspensions of proper lengths, hickeys, casing, sockets, holders,

reflectors, hardware, and shall be completely wired and assembled. Each troffers shall have 2 earthquake

clips minimum, positive enclosed spring loaded catches, and safety hinges.

6. Furnish suitable plaster rings or plaster stops for fixtures set in plaster ceilings. Consult the "Finish


FIRE STATION No. 13







Schedules" on drawings for locations and extent of plaster ceilings. Coordinate the mounting methods of

recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures with ceiling suspension system and ceiling trades.

7. Fluorescent and HID ballasts shall be low wattage, high efficiency 120 volt as noted on Drawings.

a. Ballasts shall be individually fused and shall be high power factor, non-PCB construction UL listed

Class P and be listed by Electric Testing Laboratories.

b. Ballasts used outdoors shall be suitable for 32 degrees F. operation.

c. Provide electronic ballasts, with a Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of not more than 15 percent and

a 5-year manufacturer's warranty, for fluorescent fixtures compatible with 32 watt T-8 lamps.

d. Ballast sound rating shall be ASA "A" for fluorescent ballasts.

e. Provide emergency fluorescent fixtures with magnetic ballasts. Type B-30 by Bodine or accepted

equivalent where indicated.

f. HID Ballasts shall be constant wattage type.

8. Fluorescent Lampholders shall be General Electric Leviton or Bryant.

a. Silicone-fiberglass insulated wire rated at 150 degrees or 200 degrees C. or Teflon-fiberglass

insulated wire rated at 250 degrees C. shall be provided as required with recessed incandescent

and HID fixtures for connection of fixtures to adjacent boxes.

b. Medium and mogul screw base lampholders shall have porcelain bodies.

c. Screw-shell sockets shall be nickel plated and shall have spring contacts wherever possible.

9. Provide a positive device to assure proper axial alignment of lamps with asymmetric distribution when

relamping.

a. This device may be preset or adjustable as required by the specifications.

b. Axial and angular lamp adjustments shall have provision for locking in adjusted position by hex

head or hex socket bolts or nuts with special toothed washers that resist turning in both directions.

10. Fluorescent ballasts and lampholders shall be readily and simply replaceable without demounting the fixture.

a. Bottom and one side of ballast shall be in full contact with metallic fixture surfaces for maximum

heat conductance.

b. Exposed lamp fluorescent sockets shall be telescoping type or be provided with lamp support

brackets.

11. Exposed bare lamps on fluorescent fixtures shall be protected with wire guards or a protective tubular shield.

For HID lamps, consult with respective manufacturer for requirements of enclosure made of suitable material

capable of withstanding the glass lamp particles if the outer jacket of the lamp bursts or shatters.

12. Incandescent and HID reflectors shall be fabricated from minimum 0.050 Alcoa #12 reflector sheet or

accepted equivalent, free from forming lines and other visible imperfections.

a. Black anodized finish shall be minimum 0.001 thick guaranteed against fading and discoloration.

b. Plain anodized finish used indoors shall be Alcoa MI Alzak or accepted equivalent.

c. Plain anodized finish used outdoors shall be Alcoa SI Alzak with fixture protected with glass cover

or other means.

13. Fluorescent Specular Reflectors: Specular reflectance shall be 86 percent minimum.

a. Concealed fluorescent specular reflectors shall be Alcoa MI Alzak finish or accepted equivalent.

b. Visible reflectors shall be Alcoa reflector sheet type 1 or accepted equivalent.


FIRE STATION No. 13







14. Glass lenses for incandescent and HID fixtures shall be borosilicate glass with maximum coefficient of

expansion of 0.33x107. Glass lenses for fluorescent fixtures shall be Corning Glass or accepted equivalent.

15. Plastic lenses and diffusers used on fluorescent fixtures shall be 100 percent prime virgin acrylic KSH K-12

or accepted equivalent, minimum unpenetrated thickness of 0.125" and be furnished with antistatic treatment.

Injection molded lenses shall be as manufactured by Holophane or accepted equivalent.

16. Exposed fixture housings or frames shall have a continuous, smooth surface with no visible seams and a neat

and finished quality appearance. Hinges and fastening devices shall be fully concealed except with special

permission of the A/E.

17. The thickness of visible edges of mounting frames and rings at the ceiling line shall be between 0.035" and

0.050". Light leaks around trim frame or lens or between any of these are unacceptable.

18. Where fixture type is not indicated on drawings, fixture type used in similar locations shall be provided, as

accepted by the A/E.

19. Components of the same type, size, rating, functional characteristics, and make of similar interior lighting

fixtures shall be interchangeable.

20. Fixture stems shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the fixture specified or as shown on the drawings.

21. Fixtures for use outdoors or in wet areas shall suitably gasketed to prevent access of moisture or insects into

fixture or diffuser.

22. Metal parts of fixtures for use in damp locations, specified as requiring painting, shall be painted with

suitable weather and moisture resistant paints exhibiting moisture resisting qualities equal to epoxy based

coatings.

23. Aluminum parts of fixtures for use in damp locations specified as requiring an unpainted finish shall be

anodized.

E. Lamps:

1. Provide lamps for lighting fixtures. Lamps shall be as specified and indicated on the drawings.

2. Incandescent lamps shall be suitable to operate on 120 volts, 60 Hertz supply, with the following

requirements:

a. Wattage rating as shown on fixture schedule.

b. Type of lamp as shown on fixture schedule.

c. Lamps shall be inside frosted unless noted otherwise.

d. Unless noted otherwise lamps shall be extended service type rated at 130V.

3. Fluorescent lamps shall be suitable to operate with specified ballasts on 120 volts, 60 Hertz supply as

required, with the following requirements:

a. Wattage rating as shown on fixture schedule.

b. Lamp shall be rapid start energy saving type T-8, with 2900 minimum lumen output, by Sylvania or

accepted equivalent.

c. Provide T-8 lamps with 4 foot lengths, whenever possible, and medium bi-pin bases, as shown on

Drawings and fixture schedule.

d. Color: 3500 degrees Kelvin, 75 CRI.

4. Compact fluorescent "PL" lamps shall be used for down lighting applications and shall be suitable to operate

with specified ballasts on 120 volts, 60 hertz supply as required with the following requirements:

a. High power factor ballasts only.


FIRE STATION No. 13







b. Wattage rating and lamp type as shown on fixture schedule.

c. Color: 3500 degrees Kelvin, 75 CRI.

5. HID lamps shall be suitable to operate with specified ballasts on 120 volts, 60 hertz supply as required with

the following requirements:

a. Wattage ratings and lamp designation as shown on fixture schedule.

b. Lamp base shall be mogul base, whenever possible.

c. Rated life shall be a minimum of 24,000 hours for high pressure sodium.

d. Metal halide lamps shall be phosphor coated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install "Lay-In" type fixtures with 6 foot lengths of flexible conduit to enable fixture relocation with minimum

inconvenience. Fixture to be securely fastened to ceiling frame members by mechanical means as per the NEC.

C. Exit lights:

1. Install wall or ceiling mounted as shown on drawings.

2. Provide directional arrows required to show correct path to exit.

3. Install exit lights at a location and height to assure a clear line of sight from the egress passageway.

4. Relocate exit lights that are not readily visible at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Internally illuminated exit signs shall have LED light source on normal power.

D. Fixture Supports:

1. Support each fixture securely.

2. Each recessed fluorescent troffer shall be lay-in supported by ceiling suspension system. Provide at least 2

earthquake clips.

3. Where pendant fixtures are mounted in continuous rows, the number of hangers shall equal the number of 4

foot lengths, plus 1.

4. Do not support fixtures to plaster or gypsum board ceilings.

5. Furnish and install steel members and supports to fasten and suspend fixtures.

E. Install lighting fixtures on ceilings or walls of mechanical and electrical equipment rooms after piping, ductwork, and

equipment are installed therein.

1. Exact location and switching for such fixtures will be determined at the job site during the work.

2. Fixtures shall be located to give maximum illumination to items of equipment requiring servicing, and moving


FIRE STATION No. 13







machinery.

3. Any lighting fixtures blocked, inaccessible, or improperly located shall be relocated at no extra cost.

4. Where fan rooms are used as an air plenum, provide suitable gasketed vaportight lighting fixtures.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16530




SECTION 16530 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY





A. Material shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Properly identified manufacturer's literature and technical data before starting work.

B. Photometric data for exterior lighting fixtures and a point by point illumination plan for entire site at same scale as

Construction Documents

C. Wind load certification, by a Florida registered structural engineer, for exterior lighting poles.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Surface mounted fixtures shall be vandal proof types by Kenall Mfg. Co. or accepted equivalent.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Exterior Lighting Fixtures:

1. Exterior fixtures shall be vandal resistant.

2. Provide required exterior lighting fixtures and components with NEMA LE2 HID lighting systems noise ratings.

3. Exterior lighting fixtures shall be furnished as indicated on drawings and fixture schedule. Fixtures shall be

complete with necessary wiring, lamps, reflectors, glassware, and mounting accessories.

4. Components of the same type, size, rating, functional characteristic, and make of similar exterior lighting

fixtures shall be interchangeable.

5. Fixture bases shall be metal and fastened to mounting locations with metal components.

6. Exterior fixtures shall be of aluminum or plastic construction.

B. Lamps:

1. Provide lamps for exterior lighting fixtures. Lamps shall be as indicated on the lighting fixture schedule.

2. High pressure sodium lamps shall comply with the following:


FIRE STATION No. 13







a. Wattage ratings as shown on fixture schedule.

b. Lamp base shall be mogul base.

c. Rated life shall be 24,000 hours.

3. Metal halide lamps shall comply with the following:

a. Wattage ratings as shown on fixture schedule.

b. Lamp base shall be mogul base.

C. Ballasts: High power factor, individually fused, regulator type. Ballasts shall be UL approved. Voltage shall be as shown

on fixture schedule.

D. Lighting Poles: Comply with FPL standards and specifications and the following:

1. Luminaries, pole, base, and sub-base of exterior lighting shall be capable of withstanding wind velocity

pressures determined by American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-98. Supplier shall provide Shop

Drawings and calculations, signed and sealed by a Florida registered engineer, as proof of compliance with

this requirement.

a. Use a map wind speed of 146 mph, exposure category "C", and a wind load importance factor of

1.15.

2. Poles shall be of material, shape, finish, and height as indicated on the drawings. Provide a reinforced

handhold and grounding lug on poles.

3. Metal pole base, where indicated, shall be welded to pole and furnished complete with cover and anchorage

hardware. Pole and luminare finish shall be as indicated on the drawings and as accepted by the A/E.

4. Provide anchor bolts at least 1/2" diameter by 12 inches long with 2 inch bends, complete with nuts,

washers, and shims. Anchor bolts shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel. Number of anchor bolts required

shall be determined by lighting pole manufacturer.

5. For parking lot lighting, FPL where applicable to meet their requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Exterior Lighting Fixtures: Exterior lighting fixtures shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions and

according to details as shown on electrical drawings. Fixtures in student areas shall not be mounted below 7'-6" above

the floor.

B. Lighting Poles:


FIRE STATION No. 13







1. Lighting poles shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions and according to details shown on

electrical drawings. Adjust poles to be set plumb and make final adjustments as required.

2. Build concrete bases for lighting poles to the most stringent requirements as indicated on Construction

Documents or submittal based on wind velocity pressures. Bases shall be complete with reinforcing anchor

bolts, ground rod, and conduit entry.

3. Exterior light poles shall be solidly grounded to the conduit or to the circuit ground conductor in the case of

nonmetallic conduit and to a local ground rod installed at the fixture base.

4. Provide weatherproof fuse holders in each ungrounded conductor within each lighting pole. Splices between

circuit feed conductors and fixture conductors shall be made using molded waterproof connectors equivalent

to Buss "Tron" type.

5. Luminaries shall be oriented and aimed to provide the illumination patterns desired. Adjust fixtures,

reflectors, or lamps as required to obtain desired results.

C. Exterior lighting shall be controlled using a combination of photocell control with the programmable timed lighting

control system.

END OF SECTION



STANDBY EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR 16620 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 4


SECTION 16620 - STANDBY EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR (ENGINE DRIVEN) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fuel oil, compressed powered standby emergency generators. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 15 - Mechanical. 2. 158910 - Ductwork. ∆ Addendum #4

3. 16250 - Automatic Transfer Switch. 4. 16475 - Overcurrent Protective Devices. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified product data material. B. Provide operating and maintenance manuals complete with replacement parts data for standby emergency generator

system. C. Submit sample of written warranty with product data. D. Contract Closeout Submittal: Furnish the Board with manufacturer's certification and warranty assuring each item of

equipment is complete and in good condition, free from damage, properly installed, connected, adjusted, and tested as to full power rating, stability, and voltage and frequency regulation.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Single source generator supplier and installer, acceptable to the standby emergency generator

manufacturer, capable of providing, but not limited to, the following services: 1. Generator and electrical apparatus pertinent to the generator including the automatic transfer switches. 2. Complete fuel tank system. 3. Sheet metal shrouding. 4. Plumbing pertinent to the fuel system and generator. 5. Exhaust system and piping. 6. Insulation of exhaust system. 7. Control wiring between generator and transfer switch, water heater, battery charging, and annunciator wiring. 8. Required warranty.

sys1

Polygon





9. Other work required for a complete and operable system. B. Performance Requirements: Materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Furnish standby emergency generator set completely by manufacturer and warranted for a period of 5 years from date

of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Standby Electric Generator System: 1. Caterpillar. 2. Kohler. 3. Onan. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. 200 KW/250KVA, 120/208V, 3Ph, 4W Standby Diesel Engine Driven Emergency Generator: Include an electric

generator set rated for continuous standby service. B. Emergency Generator Fuel Tanks: Fuel oil with uninterrupted, on-site, local fuel. C. System shall be a package of new and current equipment consisting of: 1. A diesel engine driven generating set to provide standby power. 2. An engine start-stop control system. 3. An automatic load transfer control to provide automatic starting and stopping of the engine and switching of

the load as specified in Section 16250. 4. Mounted accessories as specified. D. The system shall be built, tested, and shipped by the manufacturer of the alternator so there is one source of supply

and responsibility. The performance of this generating set series shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory as to the set's full power rating, stability, and voltage and frequency regulation.

E. Engine: F. Engine Instrument Panel. G. Engine Controls.





H. Alternator: Provide overcurrent protection on generator. I. Unit Performance. J. Alternator Instrument Panel: Wire, test, and shock mount on the generating set by the manufacturers of the alternator.

It shall contain panel lighting, manual reset circuit breaker, frequency meter, running time meter, voltage adjusting rheostat, AC voltmeter (dual range, indicates all voltages), AC ammeter (dual range, indicates current in each phase), meter switch, voltmeter-ammeter phase selector with OFF position.

K. Generator Mounting: 1. Concrete Pad: Provide a 6 inch high concrete pad under each emergency generator. 2. Equip with vibration isolators and mount on a welded steel base that shall provide suitable mounting to any

level surface. L. Automatic Load Transfer Control: Complete automatic transfer switch shall be supplied by manufacturer of alternator.

It shall include necessary relays and component parts, with electrically and mechanically interlocked switches. See Section 16250.

M. Accessories: Furnish accessories needed for the proper operation and maintenance of the generating set. These shall

include but not be limited to an exhaust muffler, flexible exhaust connection, starting batteries, battery cables, battery charger, battery rack, fuel oil day tank, and fuel lines.

1. Exhaust Muffler: All-welded design, constructed of sheet and plate steel. Provide with all necessary flexible exhaust connections as indicated on mechanical drawings for installation by mechanical contractor. Exhaust muffler manufacture: Maxim M-41 with side inlet or accepted equivalent.

2. Insulation: The muffler and all indoor exhaust piping shall be properly lagged using Kaylo 1800 degree F. insulation. Insulation will be furnished and installed under the insulation section.

3. Jacket water heater shall be installed inline with engine cooling system. Jacket water heater to be rated at 2 KW, at application voltage, single phase.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install standby emergency generator according to the manufacturer's recommendations and according to the

requirements of NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code - 2005 (NEC). 1. The following items of work relating to the emergency generators will be provided under other sections by

different trades. a. Fuel System including main fuel oil storage tank, (day tanks), and piping, as specified. b. Cooling air intake and exhaust louvers.





c. Sheetmetal ductwork interconnection between radiator and exhaust air louvers. d. Installation of mufflers and exhaust pipes. e. Insulation of mufflers and exhaust pipes. 2. The Installer shall be responsible for coordinating all trades to ensure the proper functioning of the entire

systems including but not limited to fuel supply, exhaust equipment and air transfer system. This coordination shall include furnishing all required information to other subcontractors regarding fuel, exhaust and cooling system dimensions, pipe and duct sizes, etc. The Installer shall furnish a dimensioned plan layout indicating all generator dimensions, roughing dimensions, piping layout, duct layout, tank locations and elevations and all required electrical wiring and interconnections.

3.02 TESTS AND START-UP A. Tests: 1. The electric generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard testing. 2. Before acceptance of the installation, the equipment shall be tested to show it will start automatically,

subjected to full load test or that load available at the job-site, shut down and reset as required in these Specifications.

3. Before acceptance, any defects that become evident during this test shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Board.

B. Start-up and Instructions: 1. On completion of the installation, perform the initial start-up by a factory-trained representative of the engine

supplier. 2. At the time of start-up, operating instructions and maintenance procedures shall be thoroughly explained to

the Board's operating personnel. 3. Two copies of operating and maintenance instruction books shall be supplied to the Board for the electric set

and auxiliary equipment. 4. One copy of special tools, operating software, connection cables and any other equipment necessary to

diagnose and repair the generator set shall be supplied to the Board.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY INCANDESCENT LIGHTING UNITS 16630




SECTION 16630 - BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY INCANDESCENT LIGHTING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Related Section:

1. 16511 - Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit identified manufacturer's literature and technical data including printed installation instructions and

recommendations.



1.04 WARRANTY

A. Three year unconditional guarantee, 5 year pro-rata against defective parts and improper construction under normal

operating conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Battery Powered Emergency Incandescent Lighting Units:

1. As indicated on drawings.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Unit equipment shall consist of the following:

1. Battery: Three-cell, 6-volt, maintenance free, rechargeable, sealed lead calcium battery having a minimum of

15 year life rating and operating capacity to power the connected lamps for 1-1/2 hours to 87.5 percent of

initial nominal voltage of 1.75 volts per cell.

2. Case: House battery in a compact injection molded UL 94V-O flame rated thermoplastic cabinet with front

section hinged for easy access to battery, battery charger, fuses, and wiring compartment and with provisions

for wall mounting. Provide access hole to test switch.

3. Charger: Solid state, multi-rate, fully automatic with sensing device to determine charging rate and to charge


FIRE STATION No. 13



BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY INCANDESCENT LIGHTING UNITS 16630




battery to 100 percent of battery capacity within 12 hours following a full rated load discharge to 87.5 percent

nominal voltage to 1.75 volts per cell.

4. Transfer Relay: Solid state transfer relay for immediate transfer.

5. Head Lamps: Two 25 watt PAR 36 heads, or the equivalent halogen type lamp, mounted on the case as part

of the unit.

6. Input Voltage: Operate on 120 volts, 60 cycle input voltage.

7. Accessories:

a. Test Switch: Locate at one side of the housing.

b. Charge Monitoring Light: Locate at one side of the housing.

c. AC Pilot light.

d. Cell vents as required by NEC 480-9.

e. Vandal resistant shields as indicated on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION


work have been corrected in an appropriate manner.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendation and with applicable codes and regulations.

B. Securely mount unit equipment on the wall on brackets, 2 feet below ceiling or 7'-6" above finished floor, whichever is

higher, exact location to be determined in the field.

C. Electrical connections to either a unit equipment or emergency lighting unit shall be permanent and connected to the

circuit supplying power to other lights in that particular area, ahead of any switch controlling those lights.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13


Header has been updated - ∆ Addendum ∆ Addendum ∆ Addendum ∆ Addendum #4#4#4#4

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16670

Rizo, Carreño & Partners, Inc.



SECTION 16670 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: A complete and certified direct lightning protection system including necessary equipment,

materials, and accessories.




1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 780 - Lightning Protection Code.

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Master Label Code 96A Standards for Lightning Protection Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit properly identified product data for review on materials and connections, fastenings, and method of installation.

Submit layout of system indicating components and connections.


A. Each item shall be UL labeled. After completion, system shall bear a master label certificate.

B. Lightning protection system shall be the standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of

lightning protection systems and manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment manufacturer shall also be a UL

listed and approved manufacturer.

1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Work with other trades to insure a correct, neat, and unobtrusive installation. Provide a sound bond to the main water

service and assure interconnection with telephone, electrical, and other building ground systems. Install proper

arresters on the power service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL

A. Copper or bronze components as described, UL listed and labeled, and of the size, weight, and construction for use

according to UL code requirements and per manufacturer recommendations.


FIRE STATION No. 13







B. Conductors:

1. Downlead conductors to ground: Copper or 28 strands 14 gage minimum.

2. Main roof conductors: Copper of 24 strands 14 gage minimum.

3. Bonding devices, cable splicers, and miscellaneous connectors on the roof:

a. Cast bronze with bolt pressure connections to cable.

b. Cast or stamped crimp fittings are not acceptable.

c. Straps and adhesive cable straps may be stamped.

C. Air Terminal:

1. Air Terminal Installed at Flat Roofs and at Parapet Tops: Solid, round copper rod, 3/8" minimum diameter with

nickel plated pointed tip. Rods shall project 10 inches minimum above the object to be protected.

2. Air Terminal Bases: Cast bronze with bolt pressure cable connections and securely mounted with stainless steel

screws or bolts. Bases on built-up roof shall be secured with a proper adhesive and shall have a minimum surface

contact area of 18.5 square inches.

D. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, minimum of 5/8" diameter and 10 feet long. Connect to the system with a 2 bolt cast

bronze clamp, having a minimum length of 1-1/2" and employing stainless steel cap screws.

E. Cable Fasteners: Substantial in construction, compatible electrolytically with the conductor and mounting surface and

space according to UL code requirements.

F. Make connections to metallic building parts and machinery with bonding plates of cast bronze with bolt tension cable

clamps or by other accepted equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Lightning protection system shall be installed according to NFPA Publication No. 78, UL Publication 96A, LPI

Publication No. 175, as specified, as shown on drawings, and according to accepted Shop Drawings.

B. Lightning protection system shall be an LPI Certified Lightning Protection System and shall be provided with UL Master

Label.

C. Contract drawings indicate extent and general arrangement of lightning protection system. If any departure from

contract drawings is deemed necessary by Contractor, details of such departures and reasons, shall be submitted as

soon as practicable to the A/E for acceptance. No such departures shall be made without prior written acceptance of the

A/E.


FIRE STATION No. 13







D. Connections made in lightning protection system shall be electrically continuous to ground rods.

E. Metal on roof, including plumbing vents, roof drains, fan housings, steel frames, flashings, roof hatch, skylights,

electrical conduit, etc., shall be bonded to lightning protection system.

F. Air Terminal Locations: On ridged and flat roofs, provide air terminals at locations indicated with fasteners according to

system manufacturer instructions.

G. Conductor Locations: Conductors shall be installed at locations indicated with fasteners spaced a maximum of 3 feet

apart.

H. Ground Rod Locations: Ground rods shall be installed at locations indicated with top of rods a minimum of 12 inches

below finished grade.

I. Completion: Secure and deliver a UL Master Label to the A/E for the Board upon completion of the installation. Submit

copies of record shop drawings with the UL Master Label Application form.

END OF SECTION


FIRE STATION No. 13



TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709




SECTION 16709 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) devices, also known as Surge Protective Devices

(SPDs), for the protection of AC electrical circuits and electronic equipment from the effects of lightning induced

transients, other externally generated transients, and internally generated transients.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/IEEE:

1. C62.33-82(89) Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge-Protective Devices.

2. C62.41-91 Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

3. C62.45-87 Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

4. 142-82 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (IEEE Green

Book).

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 1449 Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

2. UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.

2. NFPA 75 Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Producing Equipment.

3. NFPA 780 Lightning Protection Standard.

D. Federal Information Processing Standards 94 (FIPS PUB 94).

E. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association LS-1, 1992 (NEMA LS-1).


A. The manufacturer shall submit a written statement indicating that a factory authorized representative inspected the

installation. The installing contractor shall submit a checkout memorandum to the manufacturer indicating the date the

equipment was placed into service and the actual method of installation. Submit three copies to the specifying

engineer.

B. All SPDs for service entrance, distribution, and branch circuit protection within a facility shall be provided by a single

manufacturer.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. The SPD and supporting components shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be free of defects in material and


FIRE STATION No. 13







workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of substantial completion of service and activation of the system to

which the suppressor is attached.

B. An SPD that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced at

no expense to the Owner including labor and materials. Since "Acts of Nature" or similar statements typically include

the threat of lightning to which the SPD shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibility in the

general conditions of this specification shall not apply to this section. The warranty shall cover the entire device, not

just the modules.

C. The installation of SPDs in or on electrical distribution equipment shall in no way compromise or violate equipment

listing, labeling, or warranty of the distribution equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The transient voltage surge suppression submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:

1. Data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types, and connection configuration and

lead lengths.

2. Manufacturer’s certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed requirements of this

specification.

3. Drawings, with dimensions, indicating SPD mounting arrangement and lead length configuration, and

mounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies.

4. List and detail protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means, and protective materials.

5. SPD wiring, bonding, and grounding connections shall be indicated on the wiring diagrams for each system.

Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections to equipment to be

protected.

6. If requested, a sample of each suppressor type shall be submitted for use in testing and evaluation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression:

1. Advanced Protection Technologies, Clearwater, FL.

2. EDCO.

3. Hubbell-Kellems, Milford, CT.

4. Intermatic, Spring Grove, IL.

5. LEA International by Power Logics, Apollo Beach, FL.

6. Transtector, Hayden Lake, ID.

7. Current Technology


FIRE STATION No. 13







2.02 PERFORMANCE

A. General:

1. SPDs shall be listed according to UL 1449 Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors, and UL

1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters.

2. There shall be 7 modes of protection: 3-modes (Line-to-Ground), 3-modes (Line-to-Neutral), and 1-mode

(Neutral-to-Ground) for a 3-phase, 4-Wire plus ground voltage system. (Line-to-Neutral-to-Ground is not an

acceptable substitute for Line-to-Ground).

3. The UL 1449 Clamping Voltage for the following configurations shall not exceed the following:

VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION L-G L-N N-G

120/208V 400V 400V 400V

4. The unit shall be UL 1283 listed as an electromagnetic interference filter. Standardized insertion loss data

shall be obtained using MIL-STD E220A 50W insertion loss methodology. Minimum insertion loss shall be

as follows:

FREQUENCY[MHz] INSERTION LOSS[dB]

0.1 34

1.0 51

10.0 54

100.0 48

5. SPDs shall use a separate path to building ground, the equipment safety ground is not to be used as a

transient ground path.

6. SPDs shall be constructed using MOV based modules. The SPD shall have a response time of less than one

nanosecond with 6 inches or less of connected lead length for any individual protection mode.

7. Each MOV contained within a current diversion module shall be individually fused (component level safety

fusing). For the assurance of safety purposes, this feature shall be a standard design feature and not an

optional feature of the product. The individual component level fusing shall allow a reduction of protection

rather than an automatic complete loss of protection.

8. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all components shall not be less than 125 percent for

a 120V system and 115 percent for 208V systems.

B. Service Entrance Protection:

1. The service entrance TVSS equipment shall meet or exceed the minimum performance criteria as follows:

a. The SPD shall be by Current Technology, model current guard 150 plus, or accepted equivalent.

b. The single-impulse surge-current rating shall be a minimum of 300 Amps/phase.

c. SPD shall be provided with an integral fused disconnect. Switches shall have a fault withstand

rating equal or greater than the AIC rating of the equipment being protected. The disconnect switch

shall have an interlocking rotary type safety switch that turns power off to the device upon opening


FIRE STATION No. 13







the enclosure for safe inspection and/or module replacement.

d. Visual Indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be provided both on the modules

and redundant on the front door of the enclosure. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as

well as which module is operational. SPD that require a separate diagnostic test kit to determine

proper module operation must be provided.

e. SPD shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge current path. Small round wiring or plug-in

modules are not acceptable. Field-replaceable surge-current diversion modules shall be bolted to

the bus bars for reliable low impedance connections.

f. The enclosure type shall be rated NEMA 12.

C. Distribution Panel Protection:

1. The distribution panel TVSS equipment shall meet or exceed the minimum performance criteria as follows:

a. The SPD shall be by Current Technology, model current guard 80, or accepted equivalent.

b. The single-impulse surge-current rating shall be a minimum of 160 Amps/phase.

c. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be provided both on the modules

and redundant on the front door of the enclosure. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as

well as which module is operational.

d. SPD shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge current path. Small diameter round wiring and

the use of plug-in modules is not acceptable. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted

connections to the bus bars for reliable low impedance connections.

e. The enclosure type shall be rated NEMA 12.

D. Subpanel Protection:

1. The subpanel TVSS equipment shall meet or exceed the minimum performance criteria as follows:

a. The SPD shall be by Current Technology, model current guard 60, or accepted equivalent.

b. SPD shall be of compact non-modular design. The mounting position of the SPD shall allow a

straight and short lead-length connection between the SPD and the point of connection in the

panelboard.

c. The single-impulse surge-current rating shall be a minimum of 120 Amps/phase.

d. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed through the front

door of the enclosure. The indicator lights shall indicate the presence of protection on each phase.

e. The enclosure type shall have minimum rating of NEMA 12.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The installing contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as practically possible.

B. The contractor shall follow the SPD manufacturer’s recommended installation practice as found in the equipment


FIRE STATION No. 13







installation manual.

C. The installation shall apply to all applicable codes.

END OF SECTION



FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 Rizo Carreño & Partners, Inc. RC&P Project # 08012.00 1 of 13


SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Complete, operable, tested and certified, addressable or non-addressable (zoned), non-coded,

electrically supervised fire alarm detection system including necessary controls and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 13845 - Intrusion Detection System. 2. 13851 - Card Access Control System. 3. 15515 - Valves, Hangers, and Specialties. 4. 16112 - Raceways and Conduits. 5. 16120 - Wire and Cable. 6. 16131 - Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes. 7. 16709 - Transient Voltage Surge Protection. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Florida Building Code (FBC). B. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) A117.1, Building and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and

Usability for Physically Handicapped People, as referenced in FBC. C. Department of Insurance, Division of State Fire Marshall (SFM), Uniform Fire Safety Rules and Standards, Chapter 4A-

48, Fire Alarm Systems, latest edition. D. National Fire Protection Association, Inc. (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code - 2005 (NEC). 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code - 2007. 3. NFPA 90A Installation of Air-conditioning and Ventilating Systems, latest edition. 4. NFPA 92A Smoke Control Systems, latest edition. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), latest edition. 1. UL 38 Manually Activated Signaling boxes for Use with Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 2. UL 228 Door Closers-Holders, With or Without, Interior Smoke Detectors. 3. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 4. UL 268A Smoke detectors for Duct Application. 5. UL 346 Water Flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 6. UL 464 Audible Signal Appliances. 7. UL 497B Protectors for Data Communication and Fire Alarm Circuits. 8. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 9. UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 10. UL 1424 Cables for Power Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits.





11. UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 12. UL 1635 Digital Alarm Communication Systems Units. 13. UL 1971 Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design addressable and non-addressable systems to meet the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 72,

accessibility codes, FBC, and UL. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Before starting the work, the manufacturer’s authorized representative shall submit one of the following:

1. A signed document committing the manufacturer to provide the Owner or its authorized maintenance contractor with all the special tools, hardware, software, any proprietary items or products, and instruction or training programs necessary to test, service, and maintain the system installed under this contract, as well as any other system of the same manufacturer and model containing similar features, currently installed in any Owner’s facility.

2. A signed document stipulating that service and maintenance of the system installed under this contract does not require special tools, hardware, software, any proprietary items or products, or instruction or training programs.

B. Before starting the work, submit Six (6) Sets shop drawings and product data on all equipment including the following: 1. Dimensioned outline drawings and technical data sheets for all equipment. 2. Riser diagrams indicating wiring and conduits. 3. Indicate cabinet elevations with each item on the face of the cabinet identified. 4. Functional description of the complete fire alarm system and subsystem. 5. Fuel shut-off system. 6. Operation and maintenance manuals. 7. Parts list. 8. Name, address, and telephone numbers of local supplier and local factory trained Technical Representative

(TR). Provide 3 copies of TR's certificate verifying factory training on the submitted system. 9. Delineate the fire zones and the device identifications for the entire project. C. Operating Instructions: Furnish 3 sets of detailed written operating instructions to the Owner. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Before certification (NFPA 72 Record of Completion) and under the supervision of the Owner, perform a 100

percent functional test with print-outs of the following to be used for certification: a. Sensitivity readings of all devices demonstrating tolerances within manufacturers specifications. b. Print-out of walk test showing all devices functional. c. Air velocity readings of duct detectors demonstrating tolerances within manufacturers





specifications. 2. Tests and Reports: a. Perform electrical and mechanical tests required by NFPA 72 Inspection and Test Form. b. Submit a checkout report in triplicate, one copy of which will be registered with the equipment

manufacturer. c. The report shall include, but not be limited to: 1) A complete list of equipment installed and wired. 2) Indication that equipment is properly installed and conforms with manufacturers and

project specifications. 3) Functional Test of individual zones as applicable. 4) Functional Test of all manual stations and detectors that can be reset. 5) Verification of devices and wiring supervision of each alarm initiating and notification

circuit and remote power supplies. 6) Verification of the Class B operation of each initiating and appliance circuit as specified. 7) Verifying the operation of all system interface functions including, but not limited to,

smoke control, air handler shutdown, gas shutdown, elevator capture, smoke door release, and communication to M-DCPS monitoring station.

8) Written report indicating all area smoke detector sensitivity readings. 9) Written report indicating all AHU duct smoke detector air velocity and sensitivity

readings. 10) Fire alarms technician's name, EF or EC license number, company name, and date. 3. Submit a signed NFPA 72 - Record of Completion form with Parts 1 and 3 through 9 completed at least 5

working days before the Owner first formal inspection of the installed fire alarm detection system. 4. Part 2 shall be completed, notarized, and 6 original copies submitted after the Owner's acceptance. E. Substantial Completion Submittal Requirements: 1. Provide 3 complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions, literature, and information concerning

equipment indexed and bound in accepted loose-leaf binders. 2. Furnish 3 sets of Record Drawings to the A/E indicating accurate plan layout, conduit runs, and wiring

diagrams as actually installed. One of the 3 sets shall be in reproducible sepia and one set shall be on site. 3. Provide and maintain 3 sets of record drawings for the complete system. Show connections, numbering

system of every device including wiring and cabling identification, raceways, and junction and terminal cabinets. Update the record drawings daily and make available at all times for review by the Owner. Typical wiring diagrams are not allowed.

4. Fire Alarm Log Book: According to SFM Chapter 4A-48 provide fire alarm system required decal at the panel and system log book with Record of Completion at the facility on site.

5. Device Zone Map: Framed and wall mounted. 6. The notarized Record of (certification) indicating that the system has been installed and 100 percent tested

by the electrical contractor and component manufacturer's representative according to NFPA 72 and as





specified. 7. A/E verification that the field quality control inspection was conducted as specified in 3.02. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The equipment manufacturer shall have a local branch office or authorized distributor staffed with factory trained, full-

time employees capable of performing installation, testing, inspection, repair, and maintenance services for the life of the fire alarm detection system.

B. Fire alarm system, devices, and wiring installation shall be by the certifying company, either the original equipment

manufacturer or the factory distributer for the brand of equipment used. Furnish wiring diagrams and wire runs for the raceway system installed by the licensed electrical contractor, under Division 16.

C. Installer Qualifications: 1. The installing contractor for the Fire Alarm Detection System shall be properly licensed by the State of

Florida Department of Business and Professional Regulation under Section 489, Part II of the Florida Statue as an EC-Unlimited electrical contractor or an EF-Alarm contractor I. The installing contractor shall possess a valid occupational license, and a current certificate of insurance.

2. The installing contractor shall ensure that a qualified representative of the fire alarm detection system manufacturer monitors and coordinates the installation and is present at the Acceptance Inspection to test and instruct the Owner as to the use of the system.

3. Employees installing the fire alarm detection system shall possess, or be directly supervised by a person with a Certificate of Competency as an Electrical Master, Electrical Journeyman, Master Specialty or Journeyman Specialty in the fire alarm trade as issued by the Miami-Dade County Construction Trades Qualifying Board, Division B or the equivalent construction trades qualifying licensing boards of Broward, Collier, Monroe, or Palm Beach counties.

a. Provide a minimum of 1 Electrical Master, Electrical Journeyman, Master Specialty or Journeyman Specialty in the fire alarm trade for every 3 apprentices performing the installation of the fire alarm detection system.

D. Fire Alarm Detection System: 1. Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. 2. Listed and labeled for commercial use. Residential devices are not allowed. E. Components, Parts, and Assemblies: Furnished by the same manufacturer and compatible throughout the system,

one-to-the-other, without exception. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Components, parts, raceways, wiring, and assemblies furnished and installed by the manufacturer's representative or

distributer shall be warranted for 1 year after substantial completion, in writing, against defects in labor and materials.





1. Written Warranty: a. Extend the requirements of General Conditions, to include a signed manufacturer's 1 year written warranty

against defects in materials and labor quality. b. Provide 6 notarized copies signed by authorized manufacturer's representative, giving details of warranty

being provided, listing components included and not included in the warranty, number of hours per days for warranted service, and billable rates for services not covered by warranty.

c. Provide 6 original copies of: 1) A notarized and properly completed NFPA 72 - Record of Completion form signed by the EF or EC

license holder. License holder shall be employed by the manufacturer or Contractor. 2) Valid electrical license of the installing contractor. B. Warranty service shall be performed by a certified factory trained and approved fire alarm technician of the equipment

manufacturer's representative or distributer. 1. The Contractor shall respond to routine warranty service requests by completing repairs within 24 hours of

service request by the Owner. 2. The Contractor shall respond to emergency warranty service requests with the arrival of service technician at

affected site within 4 hours of notification of emergency. Repairs shall be expedited to bring system online as soon as possible. Emergencies include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Total system failure. b. Inability to acknowledge, silence, or reset audible or panel troubles. c. Failure of air-conditioning to reset after an alarm. d. Failure of any gas system to reset after an alarm. e. Failure of alarm system to communicate with the M-DCPS monitoring center. f. Loss of battery power. g. Damage caused to system due to transients and power surges. h. Complete zone or loop failure. i. Fire at a facility. 3. If problem is not correctable within specified time frames, the Contractor shall provide in writing an expected

completion date to the Owner. C. Inspections at End of Warranty: 1. At the end of the 1 year general warranty period, the Owner will decide if the warranty items cited during the

course of the warranty period have been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Meet on-site with Owner to establish the end of the 1 year warranty period and address unresolved warranty

items to the satisfaction of the Owner. D. Equipment and systems shall be warranted by the Contractor for 1 year following acceptance. The warranty shall

include parts, labor, prompt field service, pickup, and delivery. E. Required inspections according to State Fire Marshal Rule 4A-48 and NFPA 72 will be performed. Deficiencies will be





forwarded to the Owner for corrections by the warranty provider. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Detection System: 1. Edwards Systems Technology. 2. Notifier. 3. Siemens Fire Safety. 4. Simplex Grinnell LP. 5. Owner accepted Manufacturer. B. Lightning Protection and Transient Voltage and Surge Suppression: See Section 16709. C. Fuel Shut-Off System: Greitzer Model GGD or accepted equivalent by A/E and the Owner. D. Fire Alarm Cables for Wet Locations: Aquaseal by West Penn or accepted equivalent. E. UL Protective Covers: Safety Technology International (STI), Waterford, MI as follows or accepted equivalent. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Addressable Systems: 1. The fire alarm detection system shall consist of: a. A UL 864 listed intelligent microprocessor based main control panel. b. UL fire listed printer. c. Automatic detection devices. d. Manual stations. e. Notification appliance devices wired according to the schedule on the Drawings and function as

specified. 2. Equipment shall allow a one-person walk-through test of either the complete system or each individual SLC

while maintaining full functionality of SCL not being tested. If no test activity occurs for a specified period, as determined by the manufacturer, the system shall automatically return to the normal operating mode.

3. System shall be capable of being programmed in the field, by a laptop computer. Store programmed information in non-volatile memory. System programming shall be password protected by fire alarm detection manufacturer and include full upload and download capability.

4. System shall be capable of monitoring intelligent/analog and non-addressable ionization, manual stations, thermal and photoelectric detection devices, and interface modules for water flow and tamper switches.





5. As a minimum, the panel shall have behind a locked door the following switches: a. Audible silence. b. Trouble silence. c. Supervisory silence. d. Panel reset. e. Occupancy recall. 6. System shall have a real time history log, stored in non-volatile memory, capable of containing a minimum

of 400 events. 7. The input AC power to the fire alarm detection system shall be from a dedicated branch circuit of the facility

emergency backup system. AC breaker shall be marked "WARNING - AC POWER TO FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM - DO NOT TURN OFF OR DISCONNECT".

8. Provide 1 dry form C relay contacts for central monitoring for each of the following: a. System alarm. b. System trouble. c. Sprinkler supervisory. 9. Provide battery backup capable of operating the fire alarm system under maximum normal load for 24 hours

and then operating in the alarm mode for 5 minutes after loss of input power. Include remote power supplies.

10. Initiating devices for portables (relocatables) shall be conventional or addressable type wired into the main fire alarm panel.

a. The wiring shall match the existing conditions to avoid conflict with products of different manufacturers.

11. Intelligent/analog and non addressable ionization, photoelectric and thermal detectors shall be capable of

being intermixed on the same control panel. Detection devices shall contain an integral alarm LED. Intelligent/analog detectors shall be individually identifiable from the control panel.

a. The intelligent/analog type smoke detector shall be UL 268 listed. b. The intelligent/analog detector type thermal detector shall be UL 521 listed. c. The intelligent/analog detector sensitivity shall be individually adjustable from the control panel. It

shall also be possible to accurately measure the intelligent/analog detector's sensitivity from the control panel.

12. The intelligent monitoring module shall incorporate a custom microprocessor based integrated circuit,

supervised and uniquely identifiable by the control panel. The intelligent interface module shall be used to uniquely identify water flow switches, tamper switches, OS & Y valves, kitchen alarm panels, and power to the building sound system.

13. The intelligent manual fire station shall be non-coded, single action, and operate on any SLC. The intelligent





manual fire station shall be individually annunciated on the control panel. a. Intelligent Manual Fire Station: UL 38 listed. b. Manual Stations: Mount semi-flush where possible. c. If it is not possible to mount a semi-flush station, the supplier shall provide the proper

manufacturer's surface mounted box. d. Protect each manual pull station with a UL listed transparent protective cover. e. Provide 10 keys or wrenches to the Owner. 14. The air duct detector shall operate on a cross-sectional air sampling principal to overcome stratification and

the skin effect. The air duct detector shall consist of a standard intelligent/analog ionization detector mounted in an air duct sampling assembly and sampling tube that protrudes across the duct of the ventilating system. The air duct detector shall retain the features of the (intelligent/analog or non-addressable) ionization detector, and be installed in the ventilating duct as indicated in the devices if both are required.

a. Intelligent/analog air duct detector shall be UL 268A listed. b. When used for air handling control, the relay within the base of the duct detector shall be capable

of operating from general alarm. 15. Remote NAC power supplies shall be ADA type, UL fire listed with battery backup and an addressable

interface module for NAC location at the main panel. 16. Horns: Polarized 24VDC type with capability of alarm audibility and occupancy recall. a. UL 464 listed. b. Operate march time beat during alarm condition. c. Locate horns at heights according to NFPA 72 6-3.7. and ADA. d. Protect each horn less than 7'-6" above finished floor (AFF) or at unsecured or unsupervised

student occupied locations with a UL listed transparent protective cover. e. Audio shall be used for alarm audibility and occupancy recall. The recall signal shall be separate

and distinct from any other signal. f. Provide horns of the same type and sound throughout the facility. 17. Horn/Strobes: Polarized 24VDC type and meeting ADA requirements. The audio portion shall be used for

alarm audibility and occupancy recall. The recall signal shall be separate and distinct from any other signal. Each unit shall have separate terminals associated with the horns and the strobes so the strobes may remain on during the alarm condition.

a. Horn/Strobes: UL 464 and UL 1971 listed respectively. b. Horns: Operate march time beat during alarm condition. c. Provide horns of the same type and sound throughout the facility. d. Locate horns/strobes at heights according to NFPA 72 6-4.4 and ADA.





18. Strobes: Polarized 24VDC type meeting ADA requirements. The strobes shall remain on during any alarm

condition and until the system is reset. a. Strobes: UL 1971 listed. b. Install at heights according to NFPA 72 6-4.4. c. Protect each strobe with a UL listed transparent protective cover. 19. Door Holders: 24VDC powered. Door holders types are specified in Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. a. Door holders shall be UL 228 listed. 20. The Fire Alarm Detection System Annunciator shall be of an LCD or graphic LED type and display the exact

origin of the alarmed device with a custom user defined message. Locate as shown on the Drawings. The annunciator shall duplicate the information available at the main panel.

a. Locate a floor plan with legible device addresses and room numbers within each room or an area zone map with device types and locations next to the fire alarm system annunciator panel by the designated intercom station receiving incoming calls.

b. Orient the map so when facing the mounting wall, the "YOU ARE HERE" arrow will point up. 21. Wiring shall be power limited and meet the intent of NFPA 70, article 760. The systems shall be wired Style

4(Class B) and Style Y (Class B). a. Wiring shall be UL 1424 listed for indoor installations. 22. Fire Alarm Cables for Wet Locations: Cables shall be suitable for use in raceways and in wet locations,

comply with NEC 70, articles 725 and 760. a. Horns/strobes: 1) Cable Description: 4 conductor non-shielded cable manufactured according to UL 1424

and NEC 70, articles 725 and 760 type Fire Power Limited (FPL). 2) AWG of Conductors: 14 solid bare copper. 3) Number of Conductors: Four. 4) Conductor Insulation: 0.010 tri-rated semi-rigid PVC rated for 105C. 5) Cable Jacket: 0.015 Red PVC. 6) Nominal Cable Diameter: 0.225 inches. 7) Applicable UL Designation: Type FPL, 75C. 8) Meet the low capacitance requirements for the manufacture of the fire alarm system

being installed. b. Initiating Circuits: 1) Cable description: 2 conductor shielded or non-shielded cable according to

manufacturers requirements and UL 1424 and NEC, articles 725 and 760 - type fire power limited.





2) AWG of Conductors: 16 or 18 solid bare copper. 3) Number of Conductors: Two. 4) Conductor Insulation: 0.020 PVC rated for 105C. 5) Cable Shield: Overall aluminum backed polyester tape shield, aluminum facing outward,

and 100 percent shield coverage. 6) Cable Drain: 20 AWG stranded tinned copper. 7) Cable Jacket: 0.015 Red PVC. 8) Nominal Cable Diameter: 0.225 inches. 9) Applicable UL Designation: Type FPL, 75C. 10) Meet the manufacturer's low capacitance requirements for the fire alarm system being

installed. 23. Provide lightning protection and transient voltage and surge suppression for the input AC power and all load

side circuits. a. Lightning protection and transient voltage and surge suppression for load side circuits shall be UL

497B listed. b. Furnish lightning/surge protection integral with panel. Provide additional surge protection at 120

VAC disconnect breaker. c. Furnish and install additional transient suppression Isolated Loop Circuit Protector devices (ILCP)

on fire alarm wiring, (including shield), extending beyond the main building by either aerial, underground, or other methods (walkways, bridges, or other aboveground connectors). The ILCP shall be located as close as practicable to the point the circuits leave or enter the building containing the fire alarm control panel.

1) The ILCP grounding conductor shall be a No.12 AWG minimum wire having a maximum length of 28 feet to be run in as straight a line as practicable and connected to the building grounding electrode system (unified ground) according to Article 800-31 of the National Electrical Code - 1999. The ILCP shall have a line to line response time of less than one nano second capable of accepting 2,000 amps (10 x 50uS pulse). Line to earth response time shall be less than 25 nano seconds with maximum current of 2,000 amps (8 x 20uS pulse) to earth Shield to earth current shall be 5,000 amps maximum.

2) The ILCP shall be protected by a high dielectric insulating material and be of small enough size to mount in a standard 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep electrical box. Spark gap devices or devices incorporated in or installed within the fire alarm control panel in lieu of the specified ILCP are not acceptable.

B. Sequence of Operation/Alarm Activation: 1. The system shall function as follows when an area or duct detector, manual station, or water flow switch

operates: a. Sound required audible in a march time mode and activate devices and strobes throughout the

facility.





b. Display individual detector or zone number on alphanumeric display with user defined message. c. Light an indicating LED on the device initiating the alarm. Smoke detectors and monitor modules

only. d. Shut down the HVAC system and operate selected dampers. e. Activate the elevator capture if an elevator related device is activated. f. Close all magnetically held fire doors. g. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of

intelligent/analog devices that may be in alarm simultaneously. 2. When an alarm has been acknowledged and silenced, the audible devices shall cease to operate but the

strobes shall remain on. a. The block acknowledged feature of addressable system is not allowed and shall be disabled except

for system start-up and maintenance. 3. After the alarm has been investigated, it shall be possible to press the recall button in the control panel to

emit a steady sound throughout the facility as a recall signal. a. It shall not be possible to activate the recall before the alarm signal is silenced.

b. The recall button shall be used as a signal to reoccupy the building after a fire and not be for any other purpose.

4. Kitchen Hood Suppression System And Fuel Shut-off: a. Activation of kitchen hood suppression system shall cause a signal to be transmitted

instantaneously to both the fire alarm system (control/annunciator panel) and fuel shut-off system to accomplish the following:

1) The kitchen hood exhaust fan shall continue to operate, unless required to be shut down by the pre-fab engineered hood system manufacturer. EXCEPTION: The fire suppression system for an NFPA 96 exhaust hood for commercial cooking appliances and fire rated gates and shutters in the kitchen are not required to be activated by the facilities fire alarm system; however, when the hood's automatic fire extinguishing systems are activated, kitchen ventilation and heating systems shall shut down, fuel valves shall close, electrical appliances shall de-energize, fire gates and shutters shall close, and the facility's fire alarm shall activate.

2) The fire alarm system shall shut off gas and fuel oil supplies which serve student-occupied spaces or pass through such spaces. The shut-off valve shall be located exterior to the building. The shut-off valve shall have a manual reset.

3) EXCEPTION: The fire alarm system shall not shut off gas supplies which serve emergency power sources.

b. Alarm Signal Originating from the Fire Alarm System. 1) Activate gas solenoid valves to close at boiler rooms, labs, and student occupied spaces,





but not kitchen area. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount control and other panels with sufficient clearance for observation and testing of the display and panel controls

to comply with ADA and Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction, Article 4.27 - Controls and Operating Mechanisms. Provide decal with telephone contact number for warranty work at the inside face of the panel door.

B. Clearly mark fire alarm junction boxes for easy identification according to established color codes as outlined in

Section 16112 - Raceway and Conduit. Wiring shall be in conduit, EMT thin-wall or other approved methods, refer to Section 16112 - Raceway and Conduit. Use flexible metal raceway for devices mounted in suspend ceiling panels. Conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes, and panels shall be securely hung and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the system.

C. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm, or auxiliary fire protection functions shall

be allowed in fire alarm conduits. 1. Avoid wiring splices to the extent possible and, if needed, splices shall be made only in junction boxes and

be by NEC approved methods. 2. Transposing or changing color coding of wires is not allowed. 3. Conductors in conduit containing more than 1 wire shall be labeled on each end with "E-Z markers" or

accepted equivalent. 4. Conductors in cabinets shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each drop off directly opposite to its

terminal. 5. Cabinet terminals shall be numbered and coded. 6. Provide clearly labeled controls, function switches, etc., on equipment panels. 7. In junction or pull boxes with splices, provide: a. Minimum dimension of junction or pull boxes according to NEC Articles 370-18a.1.a. and 370-

18a.2, the conductor size notwithstanding. b. Terminal strips. 8. Color Codes: a. Signaling Line Circuits: Red jacket with red and black conductors. b. Initiating Device Circuits: Red and black. c. Notification Appliance Circuit Horns: Brown and orange. d. Notification Appliance Circuit Strobes: White and yellow. e. Control Circuits for Door Holders and Relays: White and orange. D. "T" tapping of fire alarm SLC and appliance circuits are not allowed.





E. Provide separate horn and strobe circuits. F. Check and test wiring to insure grounds, opens, or shorts are not present. G. Manual Pull Stations: Where manual pull stations are indicated on the Drawings, install 4'-0" AFF, with a minimum of

3 inches of clear, flat, wall space all around the devices from door or window trim, wall outlets, wall openings, thermostats, cabinets, shelving, or any other adjacent obstruction. Provide protective covers.

H. Audible Alarms: Mount on walls at least 6 inches below the adjacent surface or at 7'-6" AFF to top of unit, whichever

is lower unless otherwise directed by the A/E. Use combination horn/strobe, with protective coves, if proposed location of audible unit is less than 7'-6" AFF. Do not use horn/strobe combination units in unsupervised locations.

I. Visual Alarms and Combination Horn/Strobes: Mount on walls 96 inches AFF or 6 inches below ceiling whichever is

lower. Provide protective covers. Do not use horn/strobe combination units in unsupervised locations. J. Conduit: Run concealed, unless written approval from the Owner has been received to do otherwise. Refer to Section

16112 - Raceway and Conduit. Exceptions: 1. Electrical/mechanical rooms. 2. Kitchen. 3. Auto shops. 4. Wood shops. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION A. Manufacturer's Training: 1. Upon Owner’s Request and at no cost to the Owner, provide factory level instructional training in the

operation, maintenance and programming of the system for designated personnel. 2. At end of training provide: a. Training certificates to each trainee. b. Installation/user manual to each trainee. 3. System operation training for school staff, to include but not limited to the principal, assistant principals,

office personnel, and zone mechanic. Training shall be a minimum of 2 classes, at 2 hours minimum for each class.

a. Provide to each trainee, an operators manual incorporating a quick reference operating instructions sheet.

END OF SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1- GENERAL … · table of contents rizo, ... 01831 sustainable design...

Documents

Transcript of TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1- GENERAL … · table of contents rizo, ... 01831 sustainable design...